Cadillac Automobile 2006 DTS User Manual

2006 Cadillac DTS Owner Manual M  
OnStar® System  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
You will also find a circle  
with a slash through it in  
this book. This safety  
symbol means “Do Not,”  
“Do Not do this” or “Do Not  
let this happen.”  
Safety Warnings and Symbols  
There are a number of safety cautions in this book. We  
use a box and the word CAUTION to tell about things  
that could hurt you if you were to ignore the warning.  
{CAUTION:  
These mean there is something that could hurt  
you or other people.  
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.  
Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the  
hazard. Please read these cautions. If you do not,  
you or others could be hurt.  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Vehicle Damage Warnings  
Vehicle Symbols  
Also, in this manual you will find these notices:  
The vehicle has components and labels that use  
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along with  
the text describing the operation or information  
relating to a specific component, control, message,  
gage, or indicator.  
Notice: These mean there is something that could  
damage your vehicle.  
A notice tells about something that can damage the  
vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered  
by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly. But  
the notice will tell what to do to help avoid the damage.  
If you need help figuring out a specific name of a  
component, gage, or indicator, reference the  
following topics:  
When you read other manuals, you might see  
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors  
or in different words.  
Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1  
Features and Controls in Section 2  
Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3  
Climate Controls in Section 3  
There are also warning labels on the vehicle. They use  
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.  
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators in Section 3  
Audio System(s) in Section 3  
Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5  
iv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NOTES  
vi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 1  
Seats and Restraint Systems  
1-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Your vehicle also has  
power reclining seatbacks.  
Front Seats  
Seatbacks on page 1-5.  
Power Seats  
The power seat controls  
are located on the  
outboard side of the  
front seats.  
Power Recline Control  
If your vehicle has the memory feature, you can  
program and recall memory settings for seat positions.  
page 2-51.  
Horizontal Power  
Control  
Move the front of the control up or down to adjust  
the front portion of the cushion.  
Move the rear of the control up or down to adjust  
the rear portion of the cushion.  
Slide the control forward or rearward to move the  
entire seat forward or rearward.  
1-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Power Lumbar  
Massaging Lumbar  
The power lumbar controls  
are located on the  
outboard side of the front  
seats behind the power  
seat controls.  
If your vehicle has this  
feature, the switch is  
located on the outboard  
side of the front seats  
behind the lumbar switch.  
Press the switch to  
turn the massaging lumbar  
feature on. The ignition  
must be on.  
Press the lumbar control forward to increase support  
and rearward to decrease support. Press the control up  
or down to raise or lower the support mechanism.  
The massage cycle will run continuously for up to  
10 minutes. To stop massage, press the massaging  
lumbar switch again, or press the power lumbar switch.  
The ignition does not need to be on for the power  
lumbar feature to work.  
Keep in mind that as your seating position changes, as  
it may during long trips, so should the position of  
your lumbar support. Adjust the seat as needed.  
1-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
I (Heated Seatback): Press this button to turn on the  
heated seatback.  
Heated and Cooled Seats  
Your vehicle may have heated and cooled front seats.  
H(Cooled Seat): Press this button to turn on the  
cooled seat.  
To operate the heated or cooled seats, the ignition must  
be on.  
J(Heated Seat and Seatback): Press this button to  
turn on the heated seat and seatback.  
The buttons are located on  
the front doors forward of  
the door handle.  
Press the button to turn on the desired feature. A light  
on that button will display to show which feature is on.  
There are three temperature settings for each feature. A  
column of three lights next to the buttons will display  
which setting the feature is in: high, medium or  
low. Three lights indicate the highest setting, two lights  
for medium and one light for the lowest setting.  
Driver’s Side Buttons  
Shown, Passenger’s  
Side Buttons Similar  
1-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
When you press a button, the feature will turn on at the  
highest setting. Each time you press the button, the  
feature will go down one temperature setting.  
Power Reclining Seatbacks  
The controls for the power  
To turn the feature off, keep pressing the button until  
the display lights turn off.  
reclining seatbacks are on  
the outboard side of the  
front seats behind the  
power seat controls.  
If your vehicle has remote vehicle start and is started  
using the remote keyless entry transmitter, the front  
heated seats will be turned on to the high setting if it is  
cold outside. See “Remote Vehicle Start” under  
When the key is inserted into the ignition and the  
ignition is turned on, the heated seat feature will turn  
off. To turn the heated seat feature back on, press the  
desired button.  
Press the control rearward to recline the seatback.  
Press the control forward to raise the seatback.  
1-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
{CAUTION:  
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle  
is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you  
buckle up, your safety belts cannot do their  
job when you are reclined like this.  
The shoulder belt cannot do its job because it  
will not be against your body. Instead, it will be  
in front of you. In a crash, you could go into it,  
receiving neck or other injuries.  
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a  
crash, the belt could go up over your  
abdomen. The belt forces would be there, not  
at your pelvic bones. This could cause serious  
internal injuries.  
Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle  
is moving.  
For proper protection when the vehicle is in  
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit  
well back in the seat and wear your safety  
belt properly.  
1-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Head Restraints  
The front head restraints lock into place when raised.  
To release a front head restraint and lower it, press the  
button located at the base of the restraint.  
Adjust your head restraint so that the top of the restraint  
is closest to the top of your head. This position  
reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash.  
The front and rear head restraints may be able to be  
tilted forward and rearward, in addition to being moved  
up and down.  
The rear head restraints may also be adjustable  
up and down. They do not have a release button to  
lower them.  
1-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Center Seat  
Rear Seats  
Heated Seats  
Your vehicle may have heated rear seats.  
To operate the rear heated seats, the ignition must  
be on.  
The buttons are located on  
the rear doors.  
Your vehicle may have a front center seat. This seat  
can be converted to a storage area by lowering  
the seatback. See Center Flex Storage Unit on  
page 2-50.  
For information on safety belts for this position, see  
I (Heated Seatback): Press this button to turn on the  
heated seatback.  
1-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
J (Heated Seat and Seatback): Press this button to  
turn on the heated seat and seatback.  
Power Lumbar  
Your vehicle may be equipped with four-way lumbar  
support, without the massage feature, for the outboard  
rear seat positions.  
Press the button to turn on the desired feature. A light  
on that button will display to show which feature is on.  
There are three temperature settings for each feature. A  
column of three lights next to the buttons will display  
which setting the feature is in: high, medium or  
low. Three lights indicate the highest setting, two lights  
for medium and one light for the lowest setting.  
The rear lumbar support  
controls are located on the  
rear doors forward of  
the heated seat buttons.  
When you press a button, the feature will turn on at the  
highest setting. Each time you press the button, the  
feature will go down one temperature setting.  
To turn the feature off, keep pressing the button until  
the display lights turn off.  
Rear Seat Pass-Through Door  
To turn on the lumbar support feature, press forward on  
the control to increase support or rearward to decrease  
support. The lumbar control can also be moved up  
and down to adjust the location of the support.  
Your vehicle has a pass-through door that provides  
access to the trunk from the rear seats. See “Rear Seat  
Pass-Through Door” under Trunk on page 2-13.  
The ignition does not need to be on for the power  
lumbar feature to work.  
1-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Safety Belts  
{CAUTION:  
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone  
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo  
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a  
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety  
belts properly. It also tells you some things you should  
not do with safety belts.  
collision, people riding in these areas are more  
likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not  
allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle  
that is not equipped with seats and safety belts.  
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and  
using a safety belt properly.  
{CAUTION:  
Do not let anyone ride where he or she cannot  
wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a  
crash and you are not wearing a safety belt,  
your injuries can be much worse. You can hit  
things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it.  
You can be seriously injured or killed. In the  
same crash, you might not be, if you are  
buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,  
and check that your passengers’ belts are  
fastened properly too.  
Your vehicle has indicators to remind you and your  
passengers to buckle your safety belts. See Safety Belt  
Belt Reminder Light on page 3-58.  
1-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law  
says to wear safety belts. Here is why: They work.  
Why Safety Belts Work  
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as  
it goes.  
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have  
a crash, you do not know if it will be a bad one.  
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so  
serious that even buckled up, a person would not  
survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of  
them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes  
walk away. Without belts they could have been badly  
hurt or killed.  
After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles, the  
facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does  
matter...a lot!  
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat  
on wheels.  
1-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Put someone on it.  
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider  
does not stop.  
1-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The person keeps going until stopped by something. In  
a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...  
or the instrument panel...  
1-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Questions and Answers About  
Safety Belts  
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after an accident  
if I am wearing a safety belt?  
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety  
belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,  
even if you are upside down. And your chance of  
being conscious during and after an accident,  
so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if  
you are belted.  
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to  
wear safety belts?  
A: Airbags are in many vehicles today and will be in  
most of them in the future. But they are  
or the safety belts!  
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.  
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,  
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why  
safety belts make such good sense.  
supplemental systems only; so they work with  
safety belts — not instead of them. Every airbag  
system ever offered for sale has required the use of  
safety belts. Even if you are in a vehicle that has  
airbags, you still have to buckle up to get the most  
protection. That is true not only in frontal collisions,  
but especially in side and other collisions.  
1-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly  
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from  
home, why should I wear safety belts?  
This part is only for people of adult size.  
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in an  
accident — even one that is not your fault — you  
and your passengers can be hurt. Being a good  
driver does not protect you from things beyond your  
control, such as bad drivers.  
Be aware that there are special things to know about  
safety belts and children. And there are different  
rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be  
riding in your vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-32  
or Infants and Young Children on page 1-35. Follow  
those rules for everyone’s protection.  
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)  
of home. And the greatest number of serious  
injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than  
40 mph (65 km/h).  
First, you will want to know which restraint systems your  
vehicle has.  
We will start with the driver position.  
Safety belts are for everyone.  
1-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt  
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt  
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt  
across you more slowly.  
Driver Position  
Lap-Shoulder Belt  
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how to wear  
it properly.  
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.  
Be sure to use the correct buckle when buckling  
your lap-shoulder belt. If you find that the latch plate  
will not go fully into the buckle, see if you are  
using the buckle for the center passenger position.  
1. Close and lock the door.  
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. To see  
how, see “Seats” in the Index.  
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is  
secure. If the belt is not long enough, see Safety  
Belt Extender on page 1-31.  
Make sure the release button on the buckle is  
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the  
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.  
5. Move the shoulder belt height adjuster to the height  
that is right for you. See Shoulder Belt Height  
Adjustment on page 1-22.  
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.  
Do not let it get twisted.  
1-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the  
shoulder belt.  
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on  
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this  
applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you would  
be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid  
under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen.  
This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The  
shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across  
the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take  
belt restraining forces.  
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash, or  
if you pull the safety belt very quickly out of the retractor.  
1-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Q: What is wrong with this?  
{CAUTION:  
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt  
is too loose. In a crash, you would move  
forward too much, which could increase injury.  
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.  
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give nearly  
as much protection this way.  
1-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Q: What is wrong with this?  
{CAUTION:  
You can be seriously injured if your belt is  
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,  
the belt would go up over your abdomen. The  
belt forces would be there, not at the pelvic  
bones. This could cause serious internal  
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the  
buckle nearest you.  
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.  
1-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Q: What is wrong with this?  
{CAUTION:  
You can be seriously injured if you wear the  
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your  
body would move too far forward, which would  
increase the chance of head and neck injury.  
Also, the belt would apply too much force to  
the ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder  
bones. You could also severely injure internal  
organs like your liver or spleen.  
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should  
be worn over the shoulder at all times.  
1-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Q: What is wrong with this?  
{CAUTION:  
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.  
In a crash, you would not have the full width of  
the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is  
twisted, make it straight so it can work  
properly, or ask your dealer to fix it.  
A: The belt is twisted across the body.  
1-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment  
Before you begin to drive, move the shoulder belt height  
adjuster to the height that is right for you.  
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the  
belt is centered on your shoulder. The belt should  
be away from your face and neck, but not falling off  
your shoulder.  
To move it down, press  
the release button (A) and  
move the height adjuster  
to the desired position.  
You can move the height  
adjuster up just by  
pushing up on the  
shoulder belt guide.  
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.  
The belt should go back out of the way.  
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the  
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage  
both the belt and your vehicle.  
After you move the height adjuster to where you want it,  
try to move it down without pressing the release  
button to make sure it has locked into position.  
1-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy  
Right Front Passenger Position  
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant  
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be  
seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.  
To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safety  
belt properly, see Driver Position on page 1-16.  
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same  
way as the driver’s safety belt — except for one  
thing. If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out  
all the way, you will engage the child restraint locking  
feature. If this happens, just let the belt go back all  
the way and start again.  
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and  
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,  
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.  
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the  
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more  
likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For  
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making  
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.  
1-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Center Front Passenger Position  
Lap Belt  
If your vehicle has a front bench seat, someone can sit  
in the center position.  
To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown  
until the belt is snug.  
Buckle, position and release it the same way as the lap  
part of a lap-shoulder belt. If the belt is not long  
enough, see Safety Belt Extender on page 1-31.  
Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned  
so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt  
quickly if you ever had to.  
When you sit in the center front seating position, you  
have a lap safety belt, which has no retractor. To make  
the belt longer, tilt the latch plate and pull it along  
the belt.  
1-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Rear Seat Passengers  
It is very important for rear seat passengers to buckle  
up! Accident statistics show that unbelted people in  
the rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those  
who are wearing safety belts.  
Rear passengers who are not safety belted can be  
thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike  
others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.  
Lap-Shoulder Belt  
All rear seating positions have lap-shoulder belts. Here  
is how to wear one properly.  
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.  
Do not let it get twisted.  
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt  
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt  
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt  
across you more slowly.  
1-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.  
The latch plates for the safety belts in each rear  
seating position vary in size. If the center rear or the  
left rear latch plate is inserted into the incorrect  
buckle, the plate will not latch properly. Be sure you  
are using the correct buckle and that the latch  
plate clicks when inserted into the buckle.  
When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way, it  
will lock. If it does, let it go back and start again.  
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.  
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt  
Extender on page 1-31.  
Make sure the release button on the buckle is  
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the  
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.  
3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle  
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part.  
1-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or a crash,  
or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.  
{CAUTION:  
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt  
is too loose. In a crash, you would move  
forward too much, which could increase injury.  
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.  
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on  
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this  
applies force to the pelvic bones. And you would be  
less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it,  
the belt would apply force at your abdomen. This  
could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder  
belt should go over the shoulder and across the  
chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt  
restraining forces.  
1-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides  
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides will provide added  
safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown  
booster seats and for small adults. When installed on  
a shoulder belt, the comfort guide better positions  
the belt away from the neck and head.  
There is one guide for each outside passenger position  
in the rear seat. Here is how to install a comfort  
guide and use the safety belt:  
1. Remove the guide from its storage pocket on the  
side of the seatback.  
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.  
1-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. The elastic  
cord must be under the belt. Then, place the guide  
over the belt, and insert the two edges of the  
belt into the slots of the guide.  
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.  
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the  
guide on top.  
1-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
{CAUTION:  
A safety belt that is not properly worn may not  
provide the protection needed in a crash. The  
person wearing the belt could be seriously  
injured. The shoulder belt should go over the  
shoulder and across the chest. These parts of  
the body are best able to take belt restraining  
forces.  
4. Buckle, position and release the safety belt as  
described in Rear Seat Passengers on page 1-25.  
Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the  
shoulder.  
To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the  
belt edges together so that you can take them out of the  
guides. Slide the guide into its storage pocket on the  
top of the seatback.  
1-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Safety Belt Pretensioners  
Safety Belt Extender  
Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for the driver  
and right front passenger. Although you cannot see  
them, they are located on the retractor part of the safety  
belts. They help the safety belts reduce a person’s  
forward movement in a moderate to severe frontal or  
near frontal crash.  
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you  
should use it.  
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer will  
order you an extender. It is free. When you go in to  
order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so  
the extender will be long enough for you. To help avoid  
personal injury, do not let someone else use it, and  
use it only for the seat it is made to fit. The extender has  
been designed for adults. Never use it for securing  
child seats. To wear it, just attach it to the regular safety  
belt. For more information, see the instruction sheet  
that comes with the extender.  
Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a  
crash, you will need to get new ones, and probably other  
new parts for your safety belt system. See Replacing  
1-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?  
Child Restraints  
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt and  
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can  
provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face  
or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the  
hips, just touching the top of the thighs. It should  
never be worn over the abdomen, which could  
cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in  
a crash.  
Older Children  
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they  
are restrained in the rear seat.  
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike  
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown  
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety  
belts properly.  
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should  
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.  
1-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,  
but the child is so small that the shoulder belt  
is very close to the child’s face or neck?  
A: If the child is sitting in a seat next to a window,  
move the child toward the center of the vehicle.  
page 1-28. If the child is sitting in the center rear  
seat passenger position, move the child toward the  
safety belt buckle. In either case, be sure that  
the shoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder, so  
that in a crash the child’s upper body would  
have the restraint the belts provide.  
{CAUTION:  
Never do this.  
Here two children are wearing the same belt.  
The belt can not properly spread the impact  
forces. In a crash, the two children can be  
crushed together and seriously injured. A belt  
must be used by only one person at a time.  
1-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
{CAUTION:  
Never do this.  
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a  
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is  
behind the child. If the child wears the belt in  
this way, in a crash the child might slide under  
the belt. The belt’s force would then be applied  
right on the child’s abdomen. That could cause  
serious or fatal injuries.  
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt  
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching  
the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s  
pelvic bones in a crash.  
1-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Infants and Young Children  
{CAUTION:  
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes  
infants and all other children. Neither the distance  
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes  
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,  
the law in every state in the United States and in  
every Canadian province says children up to some age  
must be restrained while in a vehicle.  
People should never hold a baby in their arms  
while riding in a vehicle. A baby does not  
weigh much — until a crash. During a crash a  
baby will become so heavy it is not possible to  
hold it. For example, in a crash at only 25 mph  
(40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly  
become a 240 lb (110 kg) force on a person’s  
arms. A baby should be secured in an  
appropriate restraint.  
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,  
they should have the protection provided by appropriate  
restraints. Young children should not use the vehicle’s  
adult safety belts alone, unless there is no other choice.  
Instead, they need to use a child restraint.  
1-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Q: What are the different types of add-on child  
restraints?  
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the  
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.  
Selection of a particular restraint should take  
into consideration not only the child’s weight, height  
and age but also whether or not the restraint will  
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will  
be used.  
For most basic types of child restraints, there are  
many different models available. When purchasing a  
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used  
in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a  
label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle  
safety standards.  
{CAUTION:  
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come  
with the restraint, state the weight and height  
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,  
there are many kinds of restraints available for  
children with special needs.  
Children who are up against, or very close to,  
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously  
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder  
belts offer protection for adults and older  
children, but not for young children and  
infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system  
nor its airbag system is designed for them.  
Young children and infants need the protection  
that a child restraint system can provide.  
1-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
{CAUTION:  
{CAUTION:  
Newborn infants need complete support,  
including support for the head and neck. This is  
necessary because a newborn infant’s neck is  
weak and its head weighs so much compared  
with the rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in a  
rear-facing seat settles into the restraint, so the  
crash forces can be distributed across the  
strongest part of an infant’s body, the back and  
shoulders. Infants always should be secured in  
appropriate infant restraints.  
The body structure of a young child is quite  
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom  
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s  
hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s  
regular safety belt may not remain low on the  
hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle  
up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the  
belt would apply force on a body area that is  
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone  
could cause serious or fatal injuries. Young  
children always should be secured in  
appropriate child restraints.  
1-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Child Restraint Systems  
A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with the  
seating surface against the back of the infant. The  
harness system holds the infant in place and, in a crash,  
acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.  
An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in a  
motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designed  
to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat  
surface. Make sure that the infant’s head rests toward  
the center of the vehicle.  
1-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint for  
the child’s body with the harness and also sometimes  
with surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields.  
A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed to  
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system. Some  
booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner, and some  
high-back booster seats have a five-point harness. A  
booster seat can also help a child to see out the window.  
1-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Securing an Add-on Child Restraint in  
the Vehicle  
Q: How Should I Use a Child Restraint?  
A: A child restraint system is any device designed for  
use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or position  
children. A built-in child restraint system is a  
permanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-on  
child restraint system is a portable one, which  
is purchased by the vehicle’s owner. To help reduce  
injuries, an add-on child restraint must be secured  
in the vehicle. With built-in or add-on child  
restraints, the child has to be secured within the  
child restraint.  
{CAUTION:  
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a  
crash if the child restraint is not properly  
secured in the vehicle. Make sure the child  
restraint is properly installed in the vehicle  
using the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCH  
system, following the instructions that came  
with that restraint, and also the instructions in  
this manual.  
When choosing an add-on child restraint, be sure  
the child restraint is designed to be used in a  
vehicle. If it is, it will have a label saying that it  
meets federal motor vehicle safety standards. Then  
follow the instructions for the restraint. You may  
find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a  
booklet, or both.  
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint  
must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems  
must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the  
lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH  
(LATCH) on page 1-43 for more information. A child can  
be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not  
properly secured in the vehicle.  
1-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the  
instructions that come with the restraint which may be on  
the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this  
manual. The child restraint instructions are important, so  
if they are not available, obtain a replacement copy  
from the manufacturer.  
{CAUTION:  
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a  
crash if the child is not properly secured in the  
child restraint. Make sure the child is properly  
secured, following the instructions that came  
with that restraint.  
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can  
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure  
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure  
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when no  
child is in it.  
Because there are different systems, it is important to  
refer to the instructions that come with the restraint.  
A child can be endangered in a crash if the child is not  
properly secured in the child restraint.  
Securing the Child Within the Child  
Restraint  
There are several systems for securing the child within  
the child restraint. One system, the three-point  
harness, has straps that come down over each of the  
infant’s shoulders and buckle together at the crotch. The  
five-point harness system has two shoulder straps,  
two hip straps, and a crotch strap. A shield may take the  
place of hip straps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder  
straps that are attached to a flat pad which rests  
low against the child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type  
shield has straps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like  
shield that swings up or to the side.  
1-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Where to Put the Restraint  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they  
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. We,  
therefore, recommend that child restraints be secured  
in a rear seat, including an infant riding in a rear-facing  
infant seat, a child riding in a forward-facing child  
seat and an older child riding in a booster seat.  
Even though the passenger sensing system is  
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s  
frontal and seat-mounted side impact airbag if  
the system detects a rear-facing child restraint,  
no system is fail-safe, and no one can guarantee  
that an airbag will not deploy under some  
unusual circumstance, even though it is turned  
off. General Motors recommends that  
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate a  
rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun visor says,  
“Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front.” This  
is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if  
the airbag deploys.  
rear-facing child restraints be secured in the  
rear seat, even if the airbags are off.  
If you need to secure a forward-facing child  
restraint in the right front seat, always move  
the front passenger seat as far back as it  
will go. It is better to secure the child restraint  
in a rear seat.  
{CAUTION:  
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be  
seriously injured or killed if the right front  
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because  
the back of the rear-facing child restraint  
would be very close to the inflating airbag.  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
1-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Lower Anchors and Tethers for  
Children (LATCH)  
{CAUTION:  
Your vehicle has the LATCH system. The LATCH  
system holds a child restraint during driving or in a  
crash. This system is designed to make installation of a  
child restraint easier. The LATCH system uses  
anchors in the vehicle and attachments on the child  
restraint that are made for use with the LATCH system.  
A child in a child restraint in the center front  
seat can be badly injured or killed by the right  
front passenger’s airbag if it inflates. Never  
secure a child restraint in the center front seat.  
It is always better to secure a child restraint in  
the rear seat.  
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint is  
properly installed using the anchors, or use the vehicle’s  
safety belts to secure the restraint, following the  
instructions that came with that restraint, and also the  
instructions in this manual. When installing a child  
restraint with a top tether, you must also use either the  
lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure  
the child restraint. A child restraint must never be  
installed using only the top tether and anchor.  
Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure to secure  
the child restraint properly.  
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move  
around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in  
the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child restraint  
in your vehicle — even when no child is in it.  
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you  
need a child restraint equipped with LATCH  
attachments. The child restraint manufacturer will  
provide you with instructions on how to use the child  
restraint and its attachments. The following explains how  
to attach a child restraint with these attachments in  
your vehicle.  
1-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Your vehicle has lower anchors and top tether anchors.  
Your child restraint may have lower attachments and  
a top tether.  
Top Tether Anchor  
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have  
lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors  
and attachments.  
Lower Anchors  
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint  
to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the  
vehicle. The top tether attachment (B) on the child  
restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle  
in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation  
of the child restraint during driving or in a crash.  
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle.  
There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating  
position that will accommodate a child restraint with  
lower attachments (B).  
1-44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a  
dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B)  
to secure the top tether to the anchor.  
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor  
Locations  
i (Top Tether Anchor):  
Seating positions with top  
tether anchors.  
Some top tether-equipped child restraints are designed  
for use with or without the top tether being attached.  
Others require the top tether always to be attached. In  
Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child  
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be  
attached. In the United States, some child restraints also  
have a top tether. Be sure to read and follow the  
instructions for your child restraint.  
j (Lower Anchor):  
Seating positions with  
two lower anchors.  
If the child restraint does not have a top tether, one can  
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints. Ask  
the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit  
is available.  
Rear Seat  
To assist you in locating  
the lower anchors, each  
seating position with lower  
anchors has two labels,  
near the crease between  
the seatback and the seat  
cushion, showing where  
the anchors are located.  
To assist you in locating  
the top tether anchors,  
the top tether anchor  
symbol is located on  
the trim cover.  
1-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The top tether anchors are located under the trim  
covers on the rear seatback filler panel. Pull open the  
trim cover to access the anchors. Be sure to use  
an anchor located on the same side of the vehicle as  
the seating position where the child restraint will  
be placed.  
Do not secure a child restraint in the right front  
passenger’s position if a national or local law requires  
that the top tether be attached, or if the instructions that  
come with the child restraint say that the top tether  
must be attached. There is no place to attach the top  
tether in this position.  
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they  
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. See  
Where to Put the Restraint on page 1-42 for additional  
information.  
1-46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for  
the LATCH System  
{CAUTION:  
Each top tether anchor and lower anchor in the  
vehicle is designed to hold only one child  
restraint. Attaching more than one child  
restraint to a single anchor could cause the  
anchor or attachment to come loose or even  
break during a crash. A child or others could  
be injured if this happens. To help prevent  
injury to people and damage to your vehicle,  
attach only one child restraint per anchor.  
{CAUTION:  
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached  
to anchors, the restraint will not be able to  
protect the child correctly. In a crash, the child  
could be seriously injured or killed. Make sure  
that a LATCH-type child restraint is properly  
installed using the anchors, or use the vehicle’s  
safety belts to secure the restraint, following the  
instructions that came with that restraint, and  
also the instructions in this manual.  
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the  
lower anchors. If the child restraint does not have  
lower attachments or the desired seating position  
does not have lower anchors, secure the child  
restraint with the top tether and the safety belts.  
Refer to your child restraint manufacturer  
instructions and the instructions in this manual.  
1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired  
seating position.  
1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.  
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower attachments on  
the child restraint to the lower anchors.  
1-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that  
the top tether be attached, attach and tighten the  
top tether to the top tether anchor, if equipped.  
Refer to the child restraint instructions and  
the following steps:  
If the position you are  
using has a fixed or  
adjustable head restraint  
and you are using a  
dual tether, route the tether  
around the head restraint.  
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.  
2.2. Pull open the top tether anchor trim cover to  
expose the anchor.  
If the position you are  
2.3. Route, attach and tighten the top tether  
according to your child restraint instructions  
and the following instructions:  
using has an adjustable  
head restraint and you are  
using a single tether, route  
the tether under the head  
restraint and in between the  
head restraint posts.  
If the position you are  
using has a fixed head  
restraint and you are using  
a single tether, route the  
tether over the head  
restraint.  
3. Push and pull the child restraint in different  
directions to be sure it is secure.  
1-48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear  
Seat Position  
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH  
(LATCH) on page 1-43.  
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,  
you will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the  
child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the  
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure  
the child in the child restraint when and as the  
instructions say.  
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.  
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder  
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or  
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions  
will show you how.  
3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is  
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the  
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.  
1-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of  
the retractor to set the lock.  
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,  
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the  
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder  
belt back into the retractor. If you are using a  
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful  
to use your knee to push down on the child  
restraint as you tighten the belt.  
1-50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. If your child restraint manufacturer recommends  
using a top tether, attach and tighten the top  
tether to the top tether anchor. Refer to the  
instructions that came with the child restraint and  
(LATCH) on page 1-43.  
Securing a Child Restraint in the  
Center Front Seat Position  
{CAUTION:  
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different  
directions to be sure it is secure.  
A child in a child restraint in the center front  
seat can be badly injured or killed by the right  
front passenger’s airbag if it inflates. Never  
secure a child restraint in the center front seat.  
It is always better to secure a child restraint in  
the rear seat.  
To remove the child restraint, if the top tether is attached  
to the top tether anchor, disconnect it. Unbuckle the  
vehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way. The  
safety belt will move freely again and be ready to  
work for an adult or larger child passenger.  
Do not secure a child restraint in the center front  
seat position.  
1-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Securing a Child Restraint in the  
Right Front Seat Position  
{CAUTION:  
Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s airbag. A rear  
seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facing child  
restraint. See Where to Put the Restraint on page 1-42.  
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be  
seriously injured or killed if the right front  
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because  
the back of the rear-facing child restraint  
would be very close to the inflating airbag.  
In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing  
system. The passenger sensing system is designed to  
turn off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag  
when an infant in a rear-facing infant seat or a small  
child in a forward-facing child restraint or booster seat is  
detected. See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-65  
for more information on this including important  
safety information.  
Even though the passenger sensing system is  
designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal  
airbag if the system detects a rear-facing child  
restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no one  
can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy  
under some unusual circumstance, even  
though it is turned off. We recommend that  
rear-facing child restraints be secured in the  
rear seat, even if the airbag is off.  
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing  
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the  
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.  
If you need to secure a forward-facing child restraint in  
the right front seat position, move the seat as far  
back as it will go before securing the forward-facing  
child restraint. See Power Seats on page 1-2.  
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH  
(LATCH) on page 1-43.  
1-52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
There is no top tether anchor at the right front seating  
position. Do not secure a child seat in this position  
if a national or local law requires that the top tether be  
anchored or if the instructions that come with the  
child restraint say that the top tether must be anchored.  
on page 1-43 if the child restraint has a top tether.  
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder  
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or  
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions  
will show you how.  
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the  
child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the  
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure  
the child in the child restraint when and as the  
instructions say.  
1. Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s frontal  
airbag. See Passenger Sensing System on  
page 1-65. General Motors recommends that  
rear-facing child restraints be secured in a rear seat,  
even if the airbag is off. If your child restraint is  
forward-facing, move the seat as far back as it will  
go before securing the child restraint in this  
seat. See Power Seats on page 1-2.  
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is  
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the  
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.  
When the passenger sensing system has turned off  
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag, the off  
indicator on the passenger airbag status indicator  
should light and stay lit when you turn the ignition to  
RUN or START. See Passenger Airbag Status  
Indicator on page 3-59.  
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.  
1-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of  
the retractor to set the lock.  
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,  
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the  
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder  
belt back into the retractor. If you are using a  
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful  
to use your knee to push down on the child  
restraint as you tighten the belt. You should not be  
able to pull more of the belt from the retractor  
once the lock has been set.  
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different  
directions to be sure it is secure.  
8. If the airbag is off, the off indicator on the overhead  
console will be lit and stay lit when the key is  
turned to RUN or START.  
1-54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If a child restraint has been installed and the on  
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child  
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint.  
Airbag System  
Your vehicle has the following airbags:  
If after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting  
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make  
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child  
restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly  
recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat  
cushion if possible. Also make sure the child restraint is  
not trapped under the vehicle head restraint. If this  
happens, adjust the head restraint.  
a frontal airbag for the driver and another frontal  
airbag for the right front passenger, and  
a seat-mounted side impact airbag for the driver  
and another for the right front passenger.  
Your vehicle may also have the following airbags:  
a roof-mounted side impact airbag for the driver and  
passenger directly behind the driver, and  
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the child  
restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle and  
check with your dealer.  
a roof-mounted side impact airbag for the right front  
passenger and the person seated directly behind  
that passenger.  
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s  
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety  
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an  
adult or larger child passenger.  
Frontal airbags are designed to help reduce the risk of  
injury from the force of an inflating airbag. But these  
airbags must inflate very quickly to do their job  
and comply with federal regulations.  
1-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Here are the most important things to know about the  
airbag system:  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
Seat-mounted side impact airbags and  
{CAUTION:  
roof-mounted side impact airbags are designed  
to inflate in moderate to severe crashes where  
something hits the side of your vehicle. They  
are not designed to inflate in frontal, in rollover  
or in rear crashes. Everyone in your vehicle  
should wear a safety belt properly — whether  
or not there is an airbag for that person.  
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash  
if you are not wearing your safety belt — even  
if you have airbags. Wearing your safety belt  
during a crash helps reduce your chance of  
hitting things inside the vehicle or being  
ejected from it. Airbags are “supplemental  
restraints” to the safety belts. All airbags are  
designed to work with safety belts but do not  
replace them.  
Frontal airbags for the driver and right front  
passenger are designed to deploy in moderate  
to severe frontal and near frontal crashes. They  
are not designed to inflate in rollover, rear  
crashes, or in many side crashes. And, for some  
unrestrained occupants, frontal airbags may  
provide less protection in frontal crashes than  
more forceful airbags have provided in the past.  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
1-56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
{CAUTION:  
not for young children and infants. Neither the  
vehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbag  
system is designed for them. Young children  
and infants need the protection that a child  
restraint system can provide. Always secure  
children properly in your vehicle. To read how,  
see Older Children on page 1-32 or Infants and  
Young Children on page 1-35.  
Both frontal and side impact airbags inflate  
with great force, faster than the blink of an  
eye. If you are too close to an inflating airbag,  
as you would be if you were leaning forward, it  
could seriously injure you. Safety belts help  
keep you in position for airbag inflation before  
and during a crash. Always wear your safety  
belt even with frontal airbags. The driver  
should sit as far back as possible while still  
maintaining control of the vehicle. Occupants  
should not lean on or sleep against the door.  
There is an airbag  
readiness light on the  
instrument panel, which  
shows the airbag symbol.  
{CAUTION:  
Anyone who is up against, or very close to,  
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously  
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder  
belts offer the best protection for adults, but  
The system checks the airbag electrical system for  
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical  
problem. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-58  
for more information.  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
1-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Where Are the Airbags?  
The right front passenger’s frontal airbag is in the  
instrument panel on the passenger’s side.  
The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of the  
steering wheel.  
1-58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The seat-mounted side impact airbag for the driver is in  
the side of the driver’s seatback closest to the door.  
The seat-mounted side impact airbag for the right front  
passenger is in the side of the passenger’s seatback  
closest to the door.  
1-59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If your vehicle has one, the roof-mounted side  
impact airbag for the driver and the person seated  
directly behind the driver is in the ceiling above the  
side windows.  
If your vehicle has one, the roof-mounted side impact  
airbag for the right front passenger and the person  
seated directly behind that passenger is in the ceiling  
above the side windows.  
1-60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When Should an Airbag Inflate?  
{CAUTION:  
The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal airbags  
are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal  
or near-frontal crashes. But they are designed to inflate  
only if the impact exceeds a predetermined deployment  
threshold. Deployment thresholds take into account  
a variety of desired deployment and non-deployment  
events and are used to predict how severe a crash  
is likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and help  
restrain the occupants. Whether your frontal airbags  
will or should deploy is not based on how fast your  
vehicle is traveling. It depends largely on what you hit,  
the direction of the impact and how quickly your  
vehicle slows down.  
If something is between an occupant and an  
airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly or  
it might force the object into that person  
causing severe injury or even death. The path  
of an inflating airbag must be kept clear. Do  
not put anything between an occupant and an  
airbag, and do not attach or put anything on  
the steering wheel hub or on or near any other  
airbag covering. If your vehicle has  
roof-mounted side impact airbags, never  
secure anything to the roof of your vehicle by  
routing the rope or tie-down through any door  
or window opening. If you do, the path of an  
inflating airbag will be blocked. Do not let seat  
covers block the inflation path of a side impact  
airbag. The path of an inflating airbag must be  
kept clear.  
Your vehicle has a “dual stage” driver airbag, which  
adjusts the restraint according to crash severity using  
electronic frontal sensor(s) which help the sensing  
system distinguish between a moderate frontal impact  
and a more severe frontal impact. The “dual stage”  
driver airbag inflates to a level less than full deployment  
for moderate frontal impacts and to a full deployment  
for more severe frontal impacts.  
1-61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Your vehicle is also equipped with a “dual depth”  
passenger airbag that adjusts the restraint according to  
crash severity, seat location, and safety belt status using  
electronic frontal sensor(s) and other special sensors  
which enable the sensing system to monitor the status of  
the front passenger safety belt and the position of the  
front passenger seat. The passenger airbag inflates to a  
reduced depth when the passenger seat is in a forward  
position. For more rearward front seating positions, the  
passenger airbag may inflate to an increased depth (a full  
deployment), based on safety belt status and the crash  
severity measured early in the event. (Always wear your  
safety belt, even with frontal airbags.)  
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.  
For example:  
If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags  
could inflate at a different crash speed than if the  
vehicle hits a moving object.  
If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the  
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than  
if the vehicle hits an object that does not deform.  
If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole) the  
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed  
than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).  
If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle the  
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed  
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.  
If the front of your vehicle goes straight into a wall  
that does not move or deform, the threshold level for  
the reduced deployment is about 12 to 16 mph  
(19 to 26 km/h), and the threshold level for a full  
deployment is about 17 to 23 mph (27 to 37 km/h) if  
the other sensors do not over-ride this. The threshold  
level can vary, however, with specific vehicle design, so  
that it can be somewhat above or below this range.  
The frontal airbags (driver and right front passenger) are  
not intended to inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear  
impacts, or in many side impacts.  
Your vehicle has special sensors which enable the  
sensing system to monitor the position of the driver and  
right front passenger’s seats. The seat position sensor  
provides information which is used to determine if the  
airbags should deploy at a reduced level or full  
deployment.  
1-62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Side impact airbags are intended to inflate in moderate  
to severe side crashes. A side impact airbag will inflate if  
the crash severity is above the system’s designed  
“threshold level.” The threshold level can vary with  
specific vehicle design. Side impact airbags are not  
intended to inflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts,  
rollovers or rear impacts. A side impact airbag is intended  
to deploy on the side of the vehicle that is struck.  
How Does an Airbag Restrain?  
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,  
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or  
the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side  
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside  
of the vehicle. The airbag supplements the protection  
provided by safety belts. Airbags distribute the force of  
the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper  
body, stopping the occupant more gradually. But the  
frontal airbags would not help you in many types  
of collisions, including rollovers, rear impacts, and many  
side impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion  
is not toward the airbag. Side impact airbags would not  
help you in many types of collisions, including many  
frontal or near frontal collisions, and rear impacts,  
primarily because an occupant’s motion is not toward  
those airbags. Airbags should never be regarded  
as anything more than a supplement to safety belts, and  
then only in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal  
collisions for the driver’s and right front passenger’s  
frontal airbags, and only in moderate to severe  
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an  
airbag should have inflated simply because of the  
damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs  
were. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by  
what the vehicle hits, the angle of the impact, and how  
quickly the vehicle slows down. For side impact  
airbags, inflation is determined by the location and  
severity of the impact.  
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?  
In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbag sensing  
system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. The  
sensing system triggers a release of gas from the  
inflator, which inflates the airbag. The inflator, airbag,  
and related hardware are all part of the airbag modules  
inside the steering wheel and in the instrument panel  
in front of the right front passenger. For vehicles  
with side impact airbags, there are also airbag modules  
in the ceiling of the vehicle, near the side windows.  
side collisions for side impact airbags.  
1-63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
What Will You See After an  
Airbag Inflates?  
{CAUTION:  
After the frontal and seat-mounted side impact airbags  
inflate, they quickly deflate, so quickly that some  
people may not even realize the airbags inflated.  
Roof-mounted side impact airbags are designed to  
deflate more slowly and may still be partially inflated  
minutes after the vehicle comes to rest. Some  
components of the airbag module — the steering wheel  
hub for the driver’s airbag, the instrument panel for  
the right front passenger’s bag, the side of the seatback  
closest to the door for seat-mounted side impact  
airbags, and the area along the ceiling of your vehicle  
near the side windows for roof-mounted side impact  
airbags — may be hot for a short time. The parts of the  
bag that come into contact with you may be warm,  
but not too hot to touch. There will be some smoke and  
dust coming from the vents in the deflated airbags.  
Airbag inflation does not prevent the driver from seeing  
out of the windshield or being able to steer the  
When an airbag inflates, there is dust in the  
air. This dust could cause breathing problems  
for people with a history of asthma or other  
breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in  
the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe  
to do so. If you have breathing problems but  
cannot get out of the vehicle after an airbag  
inflates, then get fresh air by opening a  
window or a door. If you experience breathing  
problems following an airbag deployment, you  
should seek medical attention.  
Your vehicle has a feature that may automatically  
unlock the doors and turn the interior lamps on when  
the airbags inflate (if battery power is available). You can  
lock the doors again and turn the interior lamps off by  
using the door lock and interior lamp controls. The  
hazard warning flashers will also come on when  
the airbags deploy. If you want to turn them off, press  
the hazard warning flasher button twice.  
vehicle, nor does it stop people from leaving the vehicle.  
1-64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag,  
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.  
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the  
right front passenger airbag.  
Passenger Sensing System  
Your vehicle has a passenger sensing system. The  
passenger airbag status indicator on the overhead  
console will be visible when you turn your ignition key to  
RUN or START. The words ON and OFF or the  
symbol for on and off, will be visible during the system  
check. When the system check is complete, either  
the word ON or the word OFF, or the symbol for on or  
the symbol for off will be visible. See Passenger  
Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-59.  
Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an  
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for  
your airbag system. If you do not get them,  
the airbag system will not be there to help protect  
you in another crash. A new system will include  
airbag modules and possibly other parts. The  
service manual for your vehicle covers the need to  
replace other parts.  
Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and  
diagnostic module which records information after  
Data Recorders on page 7-9.  
Let only qualified technicians work on your airbag  
system. Improper service can mean that an  
airbag system will not work properly. See your  
dealer for service.  
United States  
Canada  
The passenger sensing system will turn off the right front  
passenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact  
airbag under certain conditions. The driver’s airbags and  
the roof-mounted side impact airbags (if equipped) are  
not part of the passenger sensing system.  
1-65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The passenger sensing system works with sensors that  
are part of the right front passenger’s seat and safety belt.  
The sensors are designed to detect the presence of a  
properly-seated occupant and determine if the right front  
passenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact  
airbag should be enabled (may inflate) or not.  
{CAUTION:  
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be  
seriously injured or killed if the right front  
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because  
the back of the rear-facing child restraint  
would be very close to the inflating airbag.  
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they  
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.  
General Motors recommends that child restraints  
be secured in a rear seat, including an infant riding in a  
rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a forward-facing  
child seat and an older child riding in a booster seat.  
Even though the passenger sensing system is  
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s  
frontal and seat-mounted side impact airbag if  
the system detects a rear-facing child restraint,  
no system is fail-safe, and no one can  
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under  
some unusual circumstance, even though it is  
turned off. General Motors recommends that  
rear-facing child restraints be secured in the  
rear seat, even if the airbags are off.  
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate  
a rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun visor  
says, “Never put a rear-facing child seat in the  
front.” This is because the risk to the rear-facing child is  
so great, if the airbag deploys.  
If you need to secure a forward-facing child  
restraint in the right front seat, always move  
the front passenger seat as far back as it will  
go. It is better to secure the child restraint in a  
rear seat.  
1-66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off  
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag and  
seat-mounted side impact airbag if:  
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the  
right front passenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mounted  
side impact airbag, the off indicator will light and  
stay lit to remind you that the airbags are off.  
the right front passenger seat is unoccupied  
If a child restraint has been installed and the on  
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child  
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint  
following the child restraint manufacturer’s directions  
Seat Position on page 1-52.  
the system determines that an infant is present in a  
rear-facing infant seat  
the system determines that a small child is present  
in a forward-facing child restraint  
the system determines that a small child is present  
in a booster seat  
If after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the  
vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make  
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child  
restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly  
recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat  
cushion if possible. Also make sure the child restraint is  
not trapped under the vehicle head restraint. If this  
happens, adjust the head restraint.  
a right front passenger takes his/her weight off of  
the seat for a period of time  
the right front passenger seat is occupied by a  
smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown  
child restraints  
or if there is a critical problem with the airbag  
system or the passenger sensing system.  
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the child  
restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle and  
check with your dealer.  
1-67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The passenger sensing system is designed to enable  
(may inflate) the right front passenger’s frontal  
airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag anytime the  
system senses that a person of adult size is sitting  
properly in the right front passenger’s seat. When the  
passenger sensing system has allowed the airbags to be  
enabled, the on indicator will light and stay lit to  
remind you that the airbags are active.  
For some children who have outgrown child restraints  
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing system  
may or may not turn off the right front passenger’s  
frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag,  
depending upon the person’s seating posture and  
body build. Everyone in your vehicle who has  
outgrown child restraints should wear a safety  
belt properly — whether or not there is an airbag  
for that person.  
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front  
passenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be  
because that person is not sitting properly in the seat. If  
this happens, turn the vehicle off and ask the person  
to place the seatback in the fully upright position, then sit  
upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion, with  
the person’s legs comfortably extended. Restart the  
vehicle and have the person remain in this position for  
about two minutes. This will allow the system to  
detect that person and then enable the right front  
passenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mounted side  
impact airbag.  
1-68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Aftermarket equipment, such as seat covers, can affect  
how well the passenger sensing system operates.  
You may want to consider not using seat covers or other  
aftermarket equipment if your vehicle has the passenger  
sensing system. See Adding Equipment to Your  
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-70 for more  
information about modifications that can affect how the  
system operates.  
{CAUTION:  
If the airbag readiness light in the instrument  
panel cluster ever comes on and stays on, it  
means that something may be wrong with the  
airbag system. If this ever happens, have the  
vehicle serviced promptly, because an  
adult-size person sitting in the right front  
passenger’s seat may not have the protection  
of the frontal airbag. See Airbag Readiness  
Light on page 3-58 for more on this, including  
important safety information.  
{CAUTION:  
Stowing of articles under the passenger’s seat  
or between the passenger’s seat cushion and  
seatback may interfere with the proper  
operation of the passenger sensing system.  
1-69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped  
Vehicle  
Adding Equipment to Your  
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle  
Airbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.  
There are parts of the airbag system in several places  
around your vehicle. Your dealer and the service manual  
have information about servicing your vehicle and the  
airbag system. To purchase a service manual, see  
Q: Is there anything I might add to the front or  
sides of the vehicle that could keep the  
airbags from working properly?  
A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s  
frame, bumper system, front end or side sheet  
metal or height, they may keep the airbag system  
from working properly. Also, the airbag system may  
not work properly if you relocate any of the airbag  
sensors. If you have any questions about this,  
you should contact Customer Assistance before you  
modify your vehicle. The phone numbers and  
addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two  
of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this  
page 7-2.  
{CAUTION:  
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition key is  
turned off and the battery is disconnected, an  
airbag can still inflate during improper service.  
You can be injured if you are close to an  
airbag when it inflates. Avoid yellow  
connectors. They are probably part of the  
airbag systems. Be sure to follow proper  
service procedures, and make sure the person  
performing work for you is qualified to do so.  
The airbag system does not need regular maintenance.  
1-70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a  
crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt  
is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.  
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get my  
vehicle modified. How can I find out whether  
this will affect my airbag system?  
Also look for any opened or broken airbag covers, and  
have them repaired or replaced. (The airbag system  
does not need regular maintenance.)  
A: Changing or moving any parts of the front seats,  
safety belts, the airbag sensing and diagnostic  
module (located under the driver’s seat), or  
the overhead console can affect the operation of  
the airbag system. If you have questions, call  
Customer Assistance. The phone numbers and  
addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two  
of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this  
page 7-2.  
Notice: If you damage the covering for the driver’s  
or the right front passenger’s airbag, or the airbag  
covering on the driver’s and right front passenger’s  
seatback, or the side impact airbag covering (if  
equipped) on the ceiling near the side windows, the  
bag may not work properly. You may have to  
replace the airbag module in the steering wheel,  
both the airbag module and the instrument panel for  
the right front passenger’s airbag, the airbag  
module and seatback for the driver’s and right front  
passenger’s seat-mounted side impact airbags,  
or side impact airbag module and ceiling covering  
for the roof-mounted side impact airbag (if  
equipped). Do not open or break the airbag  
coverings.  
Restraint System Check  
Checking the Restraint Systems  
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light  
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors  
and anchorages are working properly. Look for any other  
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see  
anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing  
its job, have it repaired.  
1-71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If the LATCH system was being used during a more  
severe crash, you may need new LATCH system parts.  
Replacing Restraint System Parts  
After a Crash  
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision  
damage also may mean you will need to have LATCH  
system, safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced.  
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt  
or LATCH system was not being used at the time of  
the collision.  
{CAUTION:  
A crash can damage the restraint systems in  
your vehicle. A damaged restraint system may  
not properly protect the person using it,  
resulting in serious injury or even death in a  
crash. To help make sure your restraint  
systems are working properly after a crash,  
have them inspected and any necessary  
replacements made as soon as possible.  
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag  
system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier  
in this section.  
If the frontal airbags inflate you will also need to replace  
the driver and front passenger’s safety belt retractor  
assembly. Be sure to do so. Then the new retractor  
assembly will be there to help protect you in a collision.  
After a crash you may need to replace the driver and  
front passenger’s safety belt retractor assemblies, even  
if the frontal airbags have not deployed. The driver  
and front passenger’s safety belt retractor assemblies  
contain the safety belt pretensioners. Have your  
safety belt pretensioners checked if your vehicle has  
been in a collision, or if your airbag readiness light stays  
on after you start your vehicle or while you are driving.  
See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-58.  
If you have had a crash, do you need new belts or  
LATCH system parts?  
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.  
But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if  
worn during a more severe crash, then you need  
new parts.  
1-72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Section 2  
Features and Controls  
Intellibeam™, OnStar®, and Compass ..........2-35  
OnStar® and Compass ...............................2-37  
PASS-Key® III+ ............................................2-21  
PASS-Key® III+ Operation ..............................2-21  
2-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Keys  
{CAUTION:  
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition  
key is dangerous for many reasons. They  
could operate the power windows or other  
controls or even make the vehicle move. The  
children or others could be badly injured or  
even killed. Do not leave the keys in a vehicle  
with children.  
2-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Remote Keyless Entry System  
Your keyless entry system operates on a radio  
frequency subject to Federal Communications  
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:  
1. This device may not cause interference.  
2. This device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired  
operation of the device.  
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:  
Master Key  
Valet Key  
There is a master key that works all of the lock cylinders  
(driver’s door, ignition, and glove box).  
1. This device may not cause interference.  
2. This device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired  
operation of the device.  
There is also a valet key which only operates the  
driver’s door and the ignition.  
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your vehicle,  
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.  
Be sure you have spare keys.  
Changes or modifications to this system by other than  
an authorized service facility could void authorization to  
use this equipment.  
In an emergency, contact Cadillac Roadside Assistance.  
See Roadside Service on page 7-6.  
If your vehicle is equipped with the OnStar® system with  
an active subscription and you lock your keys inside  
the vehicle, OnStar® may be able to send a command to  
unlock your vehicle. See OnStar® System on page 2-43  
for more information.  
2-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is  
normal for any remote keyless entry system. If the  
transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer  
to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:  
Remote Keyless Entry System  
Operation  
The vehicle’s doors can be locked and unlocked, and  
the trunk can be unlatched from about 3 feet (1 m) up to  
60 feet (18 m) away with the remote keyless entry  
transmitter.  
Check the distance. You may be too far from your  
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during  
rainy or snowy weather.  
Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may  
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the  
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and  
try again.  
You can also start your vehicle with the remote keyless  
entry transmitter. Your remote keyless entry transmitter,  
with the remote start button, provides an increased  
range of operation. You can start your vehicle from an  
average range of 195 feet (60 m) away. However,  
the range may be less while the vehicle is running and  
you may need to be closer to your vehicle to turn it  
off than you were to turn it on.  
Check to determine if battery replacement is  
necessary. See “Battery Replacement” under  
page 2-5.  
There are other conditions which can affect the  
performance of the transmitter. See Remote Keyless  
Entry System on page 2-4.  
If you are still having trouble, see your dealer or a  
qualified technician for service.  
2-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The following functions are  
available with your  
vehicle’s remote keyless  
entry system:  
" (Unlock): Press the unlock button to unlock the  
driver’s door. If the button is pressed again within  
five seconds, all remaining doors will unlock. The interior  
lamps will come on and stay on for 20 seconds or  
until the ignition is turned on. If enabled through the DIC,  
the parking lamps can be programmed to come on for  
a set amount of time when the vehicle is unlocked using  
the remote keyless entry transmitter. See DIC Vehicle  
Customization on page 3-88. Pressing the unlock button  
on the remote keyless entry transmitter may disarm  
the content theft-deterrent system. See Content  
Theft-Deterrent on page 2-19.  
V (Remote Trunk Release): Press this button to  
release the trunk lid. The transaxle must be in PARK (P)  
for this feature to operate.  
/ (Remote Vehicle Start): Your vehicle may be  
started from outside the vehicle using the remote  
keyless entry transmitter. See “Remote Vehicle Start”  
later in this section for more detailed information.  
L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): Press and release  
this button to locate your vehicle. The turn signal  
lamps will flash and the horn will sound three times.  
Press and hold this button for more than two seconds to  
activate the panic alarm. The turn signal lamps will  
flash and the horn will sound repeatedly for 30 seconds.  
The alarm will turn off when the ignition is moved to  
RUN or the alarm button is pressed again. The ignition  
must be in OFF for the panic alarm to work.  
Q (Lock): Press the lock button to lock all the doors.  
If enabled through the Driver Information Center  
(DIC), the parking lamps may flash once to indicate  
locking has occurred, or the horn may chirp when the  
lock button is pressed again within five seconds from the  
previous press of the lock button. See DIC Vehicle  
Customization on page 3-88 for additional information. If  
the vehicle has the content theft-deterrent system,  
pressing the lock button may also arm it. See Content  
Theft-Deterrent on page 2-19.  
2-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not to  
touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body  
transferred to these surfaces may damage the  
transmitter.  
Matching Transmitter(s) to  
Your Vehicle  
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to  
prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.  
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can  
be purchased through your GM dealer. Remember to  
bring any additional transmitters so they can also  
be re-coded to match the new transmitter. Once your  
dealer has coded the new transmitter, the lost  
transmitter will not unlock your vehicle. The vehicle can  
have a maximum of eight transmitters matched to it.  
See RELEARN REMOTE KEY under DIC Controls and  
Displays on page 3-72.  
Battery Replacement  
Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless  
entry transmitter should last about four years.  
You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter will not  
work at the normal range in any location. If you have  
to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works,  
it is probably time to change the battery.  
To replace the battery in the remote keyless entry  
transmitter, do the following:  
1. Insert a flat object, with a thin edge, into the notch  
located below the trunk release button, and separate  
the bottom half from the top half of the transmitter.  
The REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY message  
in the vehicle’s DIC will display if the remote keyless  
entry transmitter battery is low. See “REPLACE  
BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY” under DIC Warnings and  
Messages on page 3-76 for additional information.  
2. Remove the old battery using a pencil or similar  
object. Do not use a metal object to do this.  
2-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Slide the new battery into the transmitter with the  
positive side of the battery facing down. Use a  
type CR2032 battery, or equivalent type.  
Cooled seats are not activated during a remote start.  
Normal operation of the climate control system will  
return after the key is turned to RUN. See Dual Climate  
Control System on page 3-44.  
4. Snap the front and the back of the transmitter  
together. Make sure the cover is on tight, so  
water will not get in.  
Laws in some communities may restrict the use of  
remote starters. For example, some laws may require a  
person using remote start to have the vehicle in view  
when doing so. Check local regulations for any  
requirements on remote starting of vehicles.  
5. Test the operation of the transmitter with the  
vehicle.  
Remote Vehicle Start  
Do not use the remote start feature if your vehicle is low  
on fuel. Your vehicle may run out of fuel.  
The remote vehicle starting feature allows you to start  
the engine from outside of the vehicle. It also starts  
up the vehicle’s automatic climate control system.  
If moderate or warmer outside temperatures exist, the  
climate control system will default to automatic  
temperature control and fan speed to regulate and  
maintain a moderate inside temperature. When  
the outside temperature is cold, the climate control  
system will start up the rear window defogger and  
default to the front windshield defrost mode with the  
heat on and the fan blower set to high. If the vehicle  
has heated seats, they will also turn on.  
Your remote keyless entry transmitter, with the remote  
start button, provides an increased range of operation.  
However, the range may be less while the vehicle  
is running. As a result, you may need to be closer to  
your vehicle to turn it off, than you were to turn it on.  
There are other conditions which can affect the  
performance of the transmitter, see “Remote Keyless  
Entry System Operation” listed previously for additional  
information.  
2-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If the vehicle is left running it will automatically shut off  
after 10 minutes unless a time extension has been done.  
/ (Remote Start): Press and release the lock button  
and then press and hold this button to use the remote  
start feature.  
To manually shut off a remote start, do any of the  
following:  
To start the vehicle using the remote start feature, do  
the following:  
Aim the remote keyless entry transmitter at the  
vehicle and press the remote start button until  
the parking lamps turn off.  
1. Aim the transmitter at the vehicle.  
2. Press and release the transmitter’s lock button,  
then immediately press and hold the transmitter’s  
remote start button until the turn signal lights  
flash or if the vehicle’s lights are not visible, press  
and hold the remote start button for at least  
four seconds. The vehicle’s doors will lock. Pressing  
the remote start button again after the vehicle  
has started will turn off the ignition.  
Turn on the hazard warning flashers.  
Turn the ignition switch on and then off.  
The remote vehicle start feature provides two separate  
starts, each with 10 minutes of engine running, or it  
provides one start with 10 minutes of engine running that  
may be extended with 10 more minutes. If you press  
and release the transmitter lock button and then  
press and hold the remote start button on the remote  
keyless entry transmitter again before the first  
3. When the vehicle starts, the parking lamps will turn  
on and remain on while the vehicle is running.  
4. If it is your first remote start since last driving,  
repeat these steps while the engine is still  
running for a 10 minute time extension. Remote  
start can be extended two times.  
10 minutes of engine running time has expired,  
10 minutes are added to the remaining minutes.  
For example, if the lock button and then the remote  
start buttons are pressed again after five minutes of the  
engine run time, 10 minutes are added and you now  
have 15 minutes of engine running. The added ten  
minutes are considered a second remote vehicle start.  
When you enter the vehicle during a remote start and  
the engine is still running, insert the key into the ignition,  
and turn the key to RUN to drive the vehicle.  
2-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Once two remote starts or a single start with a time  
extension have been provided, the vehicle must  
be started normally with the ignition key to get more  
remote vehicle starts.  
Doors and Locks  
Door Locks  
The remote vehicle start feature will not operate if the  
key is in the ignition, the hood is not closed, or if there is  
an emission control system malfunction.  
{CAUTION:  
The engine will turn off during a remote vehicle start if  
the coolant temperature gets too high, or the oil pressure  
is too low.  
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.  
Passengers — especially children — can  
easily open the doors and fall out of a  
moving vehicle. When a door is locked, the  
handle will not open it. You increase the  
chance of being thrown out of the vehicle  
in a crash if the doors are not locked. So,  
wear safety belts properly and lock the  
doors whenever you drive.  
Young children who get into unlocked  
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child  
can be overcome by extreme heat and can  
suffer permanent injuries or even death  
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle  
whenever you leave it.  
Your vehicle was shipped from the factory with the  
remote vehicle start system enabled. The system may  
be disabled through the Driver Information Center (DIC).  
See “REMOTE START” under DIC Vehicle  
Customization on page 3-88 for additional information.  
See Engine Exhaust on page 2-33 for important  
safety information when using remote start in a  
closed garage.  
Outsiders can easily enter through an  
unlocked door when you slow down or  
stop your vehicle. Locking your doors can  
help prevent this from happening.  
2-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.  
Programmable Automatic  
Door Locks  
Because your vehicle has the theft-deterrent system,  
you must unlock the doors with the key or remote  
keyless entry transmitter to avoid setting off the alarm.  
Your vehicle is programmed so that, when the doors are  
closed, the ignition is on and the shift lever is moved  
out of PARK (P), all the doors will lock. The doors  
will unlock every time you stop the vehicle and move  
the shift lever into PARK (P).  
From the outside, use either the key or the remote  
keyless entry transmitter.  
From the inside, use the power door lock switches or  
manual lock knobs. The manual lock knobs are located  
at the top of the door panel near the window.  
If someone needs to get out while your vehicle is not in  
PARK (P), have the person use the manual lever or  
power door lock switch. When the door is closed again,  
it will not lock automatically. Use the manual lever or  
power door lock switch to lock the door.  
Push the manual lock knob down to lock the door. To  
unlock the door, pull up on the knob.  
Central Door Unlocking System  
With the vehicle in PARK (P) and the ignition in ON, the  
door locks can be programmed through prompts  
displayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC). These  
prompts allow the driver to choose various lock and  
unlock settings. For programming information, see DIC  
Vehicle Customization on page 3-88.  
Your vehicle has a central door unlocking mode. When  
unlocking the driver’s door, you can unlock the other  
doors at the same time by turning the key clockwise in  
the door lock cylinder twice.  
Power Door Locks  
The power door lock switches are located on the  
front doors.  
K (Unlock): Press the side of the switch with the  
unlock symbol to unlock the doors.  
Q (Lock): Press the side of the switch with the lock  
symbol to lock the doors.  
2-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
When you want to open a rear door when the security  
lock is on, do the following:  
Rear Door Security Locks  
Your vehicle has security locks that prevent passengers  
from opening the rear doors from the inside.  
1. Unlock the door using the remote keyless entry  
transmitter, the front door power lock switch, or  
by lifting the rear door manual lock knob.  
The rear door security  
locks are located on the  
inside edge of each rear  
door. You must open the  
rear doors to access them.  
2. Open the door from the outside.  
To cancel the rear door security lock, do the following:  
1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.  
2. Turn the knob below the security lock label to the  
horizontal position to disengage the lock.  
3. Do the same for the other rear door.  
Lockout Protection  
If the key is in the ignition and the power door lock  
switch is used to lock the doors, all doors will lock and  
then the driver’s door will unlock. It is always  
recommended that you remove the ignition key when  
locking your vehicle.  
To use these locks, do the following:  
1. Turn the knob below the security lock label to the  
vertical position to engage the lock.  
2. Close the door.  
The lockout protection feature can be overridden by  
holding the power door lock switch for three seconds  
or longer.  
3. Do the same for the other rear door.  
The rear doors on your vehicle cannot be opened from  
the inside when this feature is in use.  
2-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Remote Trunk Release  
Trunk  
G (Remote Trunk Release): The remote trunk  
release button is located to the left of the steering wheel  
next to the instrument panel brightness control. Press  
the button to open the trunk. To use this feature,  
your vehicle must be in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and  
the valet lockout switch must be off.  
{CAUTION:  
It can be dangerous to drive with the trunk lid  
open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can  
come into your vehicle. You cannot see or  
smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness and  
even death. If you must drive with the trunk lid  
open or if electrical wiring or other cable  
connections must pass through the seal  
between the body and the trunk lid:  
You can also press the button with the trunk symbol on  
the remote keyless entry transmitter to open the  
trunk. To disable this feature, see Valet Lockout Switch  
on page 2-19.  
Make sure all other windows are shut.  
Turn the fan on your heating or cooling  
system to its highest speed and select the  
control setting that will force outside air  
into your vehicle. See Climate Control  
System.  
If you have air outlets on or under the  
instrument panel, open them all the way.  
See Engine Exhaust on page 2-33.  
2-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Emergency Trunk Release Handle  
Rear Seat Pass-Through  
Your vehicle has a small door in the rear seat. This  
door allows you to access the trunk from inside  
the vehicle.  
The rear seat armrest must be down for the  
pass-through door to open. To release the pass-through  
door, move the release up with your fingers. To close  
the door, raise it and push it until it latches.  
Notice: Do not use the emergency trunk release  
handle as a tie-down or anchor point when securing  
items in the trunk as it could damage the handle.  
The emergency trunk release handle is only  
intended to aid a person trapped in a latched trunk,  
enabling them to open the trunk from the inside.  
There is a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunk release  
handle located inside the trunk near the latch. This  
handle will glow following exposure to light. Pull  
the release handle to open the trunk from the inside.  
2-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Windows  
{CAUTION:  
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a  
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.  
They can be overcome by the extreme heat  
and suffer permanent injuries or even death  
from heat stroke. Never leave a child, a  
helpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,  
especially with the windows closed in warm or  
hot weather.  
2-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Express-Down Window  
Power Windows  
This feature is on all windows. Press the switch to the  
second position and release the switch to activate  
the express-down feature. To stop the window as  
it is lowering, press down or pull up briefly on the  
switch again.  
The power window  
switches are located on  
the driver’s door armrest.  
Express-Up Window  
This feature is on the front windows. Pull the switch up  
to the second position and release the switch to  
activate the express-up feature. To stop the window as  
it is raising, pull up or press down briefly on the  
switch again.  
In addition, each door has a switch for its own window.  
Each power window switch operates with two positions  
for both up and down movement. Press the switch  
to the first position to lower the window to the desired  
level. Pull the switch up to raise the window.  
Programming the Power Windows  
If the battery on your vehicle has been recharged,  
disconnected, or is not working, you will need to  
reprogram each front power window for the express-up  
feature to work. Before reprogramming, you will need  
to replace or recharge your vehicle’s battery.  
Your vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP) that  
allows you to use the power windows once the  
ignition has been turned off. For more information, see  
2-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To program each front window, follow these steps:  
Express Window Anti-Pinch Override  
1. With the ignition in ACCESSORY, ON, or when  
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active, close  
all doors.  
{CAUTION:  
2. Press and hold the power window switch until the  
window has fully opened.  
If express override is activated, the window  
will not reverse automatically. You or others  
could be injured and the window could be  
damaged. Before you use express override,  
make sure that all people and obstructions are  
clear of the window path.  
3. Pull the power window switch up until the window is  
fully closed.  
4. Continue holding the switch up for approximately  
two seconds after the window is completely closed.  
The window is now reprogrammed. Repeat the process  
for the other windows.  
In an emergency, the anti-pinch feature can be  
overridden in a supervised mode. Hold the window  
switch all the way up to the second position. The window  
will rise for as long as the switch is held. Once the  
switch is released, the express mode is re-activated.  
Express Window Anti-Pinch Feature  
If any object is in the path of the window when  
the express-up is active, the window will stop at the  
obstruction and auto-reverse to a preset factory position.  
Weather conditions such as severe icing may also  
cause the window to auto-reverse. The window  
will return to normal operation once the obstruction or  
condition is removed.  
In this mode, the window can still close on an object in  
its path. Use care when using the override mode.  
2-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Window Lockout  
Rear Power Sunshade  
If your vehicle has a rear power sunshade, it helps to  
reduce the amount of heat and light entering the  
rear window.  
o (Window Lockout): The rear window lockout  
button is located on the driver’s door armrest near the  
window switches.  
The switch is located on  
the overhead console.  
Press the right side of the button to disable the rear  
window controls. The light on the button will illuminate,  
indicating the feature is in use. The rear windows  
still can be raised or lowered using the driver’s window  
switches when the lockout feature is active.  
To restore power to the rear windows, press the button  
again. The light on the button will go out.  
Sun Visors  
Swing down the primary visor to block out glare. It can  
also be detached from the center mount and moved  
to the side while the auxiliary sunshade remains to block  
the glare from the front. The visors also have  
side-to-side slide capability.  
The rear power sunshade is located in the rear shelf. It  
only works while the ignition is on or while the  
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active. See  
Lighted Visor Vanity Mirror  
To raise the power sunshade, press and release the  
switch. To close the power sunshade, press and release  
the switch again.  
Pull the visor down and lift the cover to view the mirror.  
The light will come on when the cover is opened. It  
will go out when you close the cover. If your vehicle has  
the adjustable lighting feature, slide the switch up or  
down to brighten or dim the light.  
Never store objects on the rear shelf because they may  
get caught in the sunshade or be tossed about in  
your vehicle.  
2-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
R (On): Press this side of the button to turn the  
lockout feature on. When the lockout feature is turned  
on, the trunk cannot be unlocked with the keyless  
entry transmitter or the trunk release button located near  
the headlamp switch on the instrument panel.  
Theft-Deterrent Systems  
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.  
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent  
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it  
impossible to steal.  
If the valet lockout feature is on it will also disable the  
Universal Home Remote transmitter, if equipped.  
Valet Lockout Switch  
Locking the glove box with your key will also help to  
secure your vehicle.  
The valet lockout switch  
is located inside the  
glove box.  
page 2-5 and Trunk on page 2-13 for additional  
information.  
Content Theft-Deterrent  
The security light is  
located on the instrument  
panel cluster.  
9 (Off): Press this side of the button to turn the  
lockout feature off. When the lockout feature is off, you  
can open the trunk using either the keyless entry  
transmitter or the trunk release button located near the  
headlamp switch on the instrument panel.  
If the ignition is off and any door is open, the security  
light will flash, reminding you to arm the system.  
2-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To arm the system, do the following:  
1. Open the door.  
To avoid activating the alarm by accident do  
the following:  
The vehicle should be locked with the door key or  
the manual door lock after the doors are closed if  
you do not want to arm the theft-deterrent system.  
2. Lock the door using the power door lock switch  
with the door open or the remote keyless entry  
transmitter. The security light should come on  
and stay on.  
Always unlock a door with a key or use the remote  
keyless entry transmitter system. Pressing the  
unlock button on the remote keyless entry  
3. Close all the doors. The security light should go off  
within approximately 30 seconds.  
transmitter disables the theft-deterrent system.  
Unlocking a door any other way will activate  
the alarm when a door or the trunk is opened.  
If a door or the trunk is opened without a key or a  
remote keyless entry transmitter, the horn will sound  
and the lamps will flash for about 30 seconds.  
If you activate the alarm by accident, unlock the driver’s  
door with your key. You can also turn off the alarm by  
using the unlock button on the remote keyless entry  
transmitter system, or by starting the car with a valid key.  
The theft-deterrent system will not arm if you lock the  
doors with a key or use the manual door lock. It  
activates only if you use a power door lock with the  
door open or the remote keyless entry transmitter.  
Changes or modifications made to this system by other  
than an authorized service facility could void  
authorization to use the theft system.  
2-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:  
Testing the Alarm  
1. From inside the vehicle, roll down the window, then  
get out of the vehicle, keeping the door open.  
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.  
2. This device must accept any interference  
received, including interference that may cause  
undesired operation.  
2. From outside of the vehicle, with the door open, lock  
the vehicle using the power door lock or the remote  
keyless entry system and close the door. Wait 30  
seconds until the security lamp goes off.  
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:  
3. Reach in and unlock the door using the manual  
lock and open the door. The horn will sound and  
the hazard lights will flash.  
1. This device may not cause interference.  
2. This device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired  
operation of the device.  
You can turn off the alarm by unlocking the driver’s door  
with your key, using the unlock button on the remote  
keyless entry transmitter or by starting the car with  
a valid key.  
Changes or modifications to this system by other than  
an authorized service facility could void authorization to  
use this equipment.  
PASS-Key® III+ uses a radio frequency transponder in  
the key that matches a decoder in your vehicle.  
If the alarm does not sound when it should, check to  
see if the horn works. The horn fuse may be blown. To  
replace the fuse, see Fuses and Circuit Breakers on  
page 5-93. If the fuse does not need to be replaced, you  
may need to have your vehicle serviced.  
PASS-Key® III+ Operation  
To reduce the possibility of theft, always arm the  
theft-deterrent system when leaving your vehicle.  
Your vehicle has PASS-Key® III+ (Personalized  
Automotive Security System) theft-deterrent system.  
PASS-Key® III+ is a passive theft-deterrent system. This  
means you do not have to do anything special to arm  
or disarm the system. It works when you insert or  
remove the key from the ignition or transition the key  
from run, accessory or start from the off position.  
PASS-Key® III+  
The PASS-Key® III+ system operates on a radio  
frequency subject to Federal Communications  
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.  
2-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
When the PASS-Key® III+ system senses that someone  
is using the wrong key, it prevents the vehicle from  
starting. Anyone using a trial-and-error method to start  
the vehicle will be discouraged because of the high  
number of electrical key codes.  
See your dealer or a locksmith who can service  
PASS-Key® III+ to get a new key blank that is cut  
exactly as the ignition key that operates the system.  
To program the new key do the following:  
1. Verify that the new key has a + stamped on it.  
If the engine does not start and the security light comes  
on when trying to start the vehicle, the key may have  
a damaged transponder. Turn the ignition off and  
try again.  
2. Insert the original, already programmed, key in the  
ignition and start the engine. If the engine will not  
start, see your dealer for service.  
3. After the engine has started, turn the key to OFF,  
and remove the key.  
If the engine still does not start, and the key appears to  
be undamaged, try another ignition key. At this time,  
you may also want to check the fuse, see Fuses  
and Circuit Breakers on page 5-93. If the engine still  
does not start with the other key, your vehicle needs  
service. If your vehicle does start, the first key may be  
faulty. See your dealer who can service the  
4. Insert the new key to be programmed and turn it to  
the RUN position within five seconds of removing  
the original key.  
5. The security light will turn off once the key has  
been programmed.  
PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made. In an  
emergency, contact Roadside Assistance.  
6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 if additional keys are to  
be programmed.  
It is possible for the PASS-Key® III+ decoder to “learn”  
the transponder value of a new or replacement key.  
Up to nine additional keys may be programmed for the  
vehicle. The following procedure is for programming  
additional keys only. If all the currently programmed  
keys are lost or do not operate, you must see your  
dealer or a locksmith who can service PASS-Key® III+  
to have keys made and programmed to the system.  
If you are driving and the security light comes on and  
stays on, you may be able to restart your engine.  
Your PASS-Key® III+ system, however, may not be  
working properly and must be serviced by your dealer.  
If you lose or damage your PASS-Key® III+ key,  
see your dealer or a locksmith who can service  
PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made.  
2-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ignition Positions  
Starting and Operating Your  
Vehicle  
With the ignition key in the ignition, the key can be  
turned to four different positions:  
New Vehicle Break-In  
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate  
break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if  
you follow these guidelines:  
Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast or  
slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do not  
make full-throttle starts. Avoid downshifting to  
brake, or slow, the vehicle.  
Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles  
(322 km) or so. During this time your new brake  
linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops with new  
linings can mean premature wear and earlier  
replacement. Follow this breaking-in guideline  
every time you get new brake linings.  
Notice: Using a tool to force the key from the  
ignition switch could cause damage or break the  
key. Use the correct key and turn the key only with  
your hand. Make sure the key is in all the way. If  
none of this works, then your vehicle needs service.  
Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See Towing a  
Trailer on page 4-38 for the trailer towing  
capabilities of your vehicle and more  
information.  
Following break-in, engine speed and load can be  
gradually increased.  
A (OFF): This is the only position in which the ignition  
key can be inserted or removed. This position locks  
the ignition and transaxle. It is a theft-deterrent feature.  
2-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
B (ACCESSORY): This position lets the radio and  
windshield wipers operate while the engine is off. To use  
ACCESSORY, turn the key clockwise.  
Starting the Engine  
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).  
The engine will not start in any other position — that is  
a safety feature. To restart when you are already  
moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.  
C (RUN): This position is where the key returns to after  
the vehicle is started. This position displays some of  
the warning and indicator lights.  
Notice: Shifting into PARK (P) with the vehicle  
moving could damage the transaxle. Shift into  
PARK (P) only when your vehicle is stopped.  
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the  
ignition key to START. When the engine starts,  
let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as the  
engine gets warm.  
D (START): This position starts the engine.  
A warning chime will sound and the Driver Information  
Center (DIC) will display DRIVER’S DOOR AJAR when  
the driver’s door is opened if the ignition is in OFF,  
ACCESSORY and the key is in the ignition. See DIC  
Warnings and Messages on page 3-76 for more  
information.  
Notice: Holding your key in START for longer than  
15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to  
be drained much sooner. And the excessive heat  
can damage your starter motor. Wait about  
15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining  
your battery or damaging your starter.  
2. If the engine does not start within 10 seconds, hold  
your key in START for about 10 seconds at a time  
until the engine starts. Wait about 15 seconds  
between each try.  
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)  
The following accessories on your vehicle may be used  
for up to 10 minutes after the ignition key is turned  
from RUN to OFF:  
Radio  
Power Windows  
Audio Steering Wheel Controls  
Sunroof  
Power to these accessories stops after 10 minutes or  
if a door is opened. If you want power for another  
10 minutes, close all the doors and turn the ignition  
key to RUN and then back to OFF.  
When your engine has run for about 10 seconds to  
warm up, your vehicle is ready to be driven. Do  
not race your engine when it is cold.  
If the weather is below freezing (32°F or 0°C), let  
the engine run for a few minutes to warm up.  
2-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3. If your engine still will not start, or starts but then  
stops, it could be flooded with too much gasoline. Try  
pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the  
floor and holding it there as you hold the key in  
START for about three seconds. If the vehicle starts  
briefly but then stops again, do the same thing. This  
time keep the pedal down for five or six seconds to  
clear the extra gasoline from the engine. After waiting  
about 15 seconds, repeat the normal starting  
procedure.  
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater  
1. Turn off the engine.  
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.  
The electrical cord is located on the driver’s side  
of the engine, behind the transaxle dipstick/fluid fill  
location and next to the engine.  
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.  
Notice: Your engine is designed to work with the  
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical  
parts or accessories, you could change the way the  
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,  
check with your dealer. If you do not, your engine  
might not perform properly. Any resulting damage  
would not be covered by your vehicle’s warranty.  
{CAUTION:  
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet  
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the  
wrong kind of extension cord could overheat  
and cause a fire. You could be seriously  
injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded  
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will  
not reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong  
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.  
Engine Coolant Heater  
Your vehicle may have an engine coolant heater.  
In very cold weather, 0°F (18°C) or colder, the engine  
coolant heater can help. You will get easier starting  
and better fuel economy during engine warm-up.  
Usually, the coolant heater should be plugged in a  
minimum of four hours prior to starting your vehicle. At  
temperatures above 32°F (0°C), use of the coolant  
heater is not required.  
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and  
store the cord as it was before to keep it away  
from moving engine parts. If you do not, it could be  
damaged.  
2-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged  
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the  
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead  
of trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact  
your dealer in the area where you will be parking  
your vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice  
for that particular area.  
{CAUTION:  
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the  
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the  
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.  
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is  
running unless you have to. If you have left the  
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.  
You or others could be injured. To be sure your  
vehicle will not move, even when you are on  
fairly level ground, always set your parking  
brake and move the shift lever to PARK (P). See  
Shifting Into Park (P) on page 2-30. If you are  
pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on  
page 4-38.  
Automatic Transaxle Operation  
The automatic transaxle may have a shift lever located  
either on the steering column or on the console  
between the seats.  
Ensure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before starting  
the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle shift  
lock control system. You have to fully apply your regular  
brakes before you can shift from PARK (P) while the  
ignition key is in RUN. If you cannot shift out of PARK (P),  
ease pressure on the shift lever. Push the shift lever all  
the way into PARK (P) as you maintain brake application.  
Then move the shift lever into the gear you wish. See  
There are several different positions for the shift lever.  
PARK (P): This position locks the front wheels. It is the  
best position to use when you start the engine because  
your vehicle cannot move easily.  
2-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.  
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)  
while the engine is running at high speed may  
damage the transaxle. The repairs would not be  
covered by your warranty. Be sure the engine is not  
running at high speeds when shifting your vehicle.  
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle  
is moving forward could damage the transaxle.  
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.  
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is  
stopped.  
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D): This position is for  
normal driving. If you need more power for passing, and  
you are:  
Also use this gear to rock your vehicle back and forth to  
get out of snow, ice or sand without damaging your  
or Snow on page 4-30 for additional information.  
Going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), push the  
accelerator pedal about halfway down.  
Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the  
accelerator all the way down.  
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, the engine does not  
connect with the wheels. To restart when you are  
already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use  
NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed.  
The transaxle will shift down to the next gear and have  
more power.  
Notice: Driving your vehicle if you notice that it is  
moving slowly or not shifting gears as you  
increase speed may damage the transaxle. Have  
your vehicle serviced right away. You can drive in  
SECOND (2) when you are driving less than 35 mph  
(55 km/h) and AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D) for  
higher speeds until then.  
{CAUTION:  
Shifting into a drive gear while your engine is  
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless  
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your  
vehicle could move very rapidly. You could  
lose control and hit people or objects. Do not  
shift into a drive gear while your engine is  
running at high speed.  
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D) can be used for towing.  
You may want to shift the transaxle to THIRD (3) or,  
if necessary, to a lower gear if the transaxle shifts  
too often under heavy loads and/or hilly conditions.  
See Towing a Trailer on page 4-38 for more information.  
2-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal driving,  
however, it offers more power and lower fuel economy  
than AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D). You should  
use THIRD (3) when towing a trailer, carrying a heavy  
load, driving on steep hills or winding roads.  
FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power  
than SECOND (2). You can use it on very steep hills, or  
in deep snow or mud. If the shift lever is put in  
FIRST (1), the transaxle will not shift into first gear until  
the vehicle is going slowly enough.  
Here are examples for using THIRD (3) instead of  
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D):  
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in  
one place on a hill using only the accelerator  
pedal may damage the transaxle. If you are stuck,  
do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill,  
use the brakes, or parking brake to hold the vehicle  
in place.  
When driving on hilly, winding roads.  
When towing a trailer, so there is less shifting  
between gears.  
When going down a steep hill.  
Performance Shifting  
SECOND (2): This position gives you more power than  
THIRD (3). You can use SECOND (2) on hills. It can  
help control your speed as you go down steep mountain  
roads, but then you would also want to use your  
brakes off and on.  
If your vehicle has this feature, it can detect a change in  
driving patterns. If you make an aggressive driving  
maneuver, the vehicle’s transaxle automatically shifts  
to the lowest possible gear to maximize vehicle  
performance. The vehicle will automatically return to  
normal operation when you return to normal driving  
patterns.  
Notice: Do not shift into SECOND (2) unless you  
are going slower than 65 mph (105 km/h), or you can  
damage your engine and/or transaxle.  
2-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake  
pedal down with your right foot and push the parking  
brake pedal down with your left foot. When you lift your  
left foot, the parking brake pedal will follow it to the  
released position.  
Parking Brake  
The parking brake pedal is  
located to the left of the  
regular brake pedal,  
A warning chime will sound if the parking brake is set,  
the ignition is on, and the vehicle speed is greater  
than 5 mph (8 km/h). The brake light will come on and  
stay on until the parking brake is released. See  
Brake System Warning Light on page 3-62 for more  
information.  
near the driver’s door.  
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can  
overheat the brake system and cause premature  
wear or damage to brake system parts. Verify that  
the parking brake is fully released and the brake  
warning light is off before driving.  
To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal  
down with your right foot and push the parking brake  
pedal down with your left foot.  
If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any hill,  
see Towing a Trailer on page 4-38.  
If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light on  
the instrument panel cluster should come on. If it  
does not, you need to have your vehicle serviced.  
2-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Steering Column Shift Lever  
Shifting Into Park (P)  
If your vehicle has a steering column shift lever, use the  
following procedure to shift the vehicle into PARK (P):  
{CAUTION:  
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot.  
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by pulling the  
shift lever toward you and moving it up as far as it  
will go.  
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle  
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with  
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can  
roll. If you have left the engine running, the  
vehicle can move suddenly. You or others  
could be injured. To be sure your vehicle will  
not move, even when you are on fairly level  
ground, use the steps that follow. If you are  
pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on  
page 4-38.  
3. With your right foot still holding the brake pedal  
down, set the parking brake. See Parking Brake  
on page 2-29 for more information.  
4. Turn the ignition key to OFF.  
5. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can  
leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your  
hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).  
2-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Console Shift Lever  
Leaving Your Vehicle With the  
Engine Running  
If your vehicle is equipped with a console shift lever,  
use the following procedure to shift the vehicle into  
PARK (P):  
{CAUTION:  
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot.  
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by pushing the  
lever all the way toward the front of your vehicle  
and then to the left.  
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with  
the engine running. Your vehicle could move  
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in  
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.  
And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine  
running, it could overheat and even catch fire.  
You or others could be injured. Do not leave  
your vehicle with the engine running.  
3. With your right foot still holding the brake pedal  
down, set the parking brake. See Parking Brake  
on page 2-29 for more information.  
4. Turn the ignition key to OFF.  
5. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can  
leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your  
hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).  
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine  
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and your  
parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. See  
Parking Brake on page 2-29 for more information.  
2-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Torque Lock  
Shifting Out of Park (P)  
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your  
transaxle into PARK (P) properly, the weight of  
the vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl  
in the transaxle. You may find it difficult to pull the  
shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called torque lock.  
To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and  
then shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave the  
driver’s seat. To find out how, see Shifting Into Park (P)  
on page 2-30.  
Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle shift lock  
control system. You have to fully apply your regular  
brakes before you can shift from PARK (P) when  
the ignition is RUN. See Automatic Transaxle Operation  
on page 2-26.  
The shift lock control system is designed to do the  
following:  
Prevent the ignition key from being removed unless  
the shift lever is in PARK (P).  
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have  
another vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of  
the pressure from the parking pawl in the transaxle,  
so you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).  
Prevent movement of the console shift lever out of  
PARK (P) unless the ignition is in a position other  
than OFF.  
The shift lock control system is always functional except  
in the case of a dead battery or low voltage (less  
than 9 V) battery.  
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease the pressure  
on the shift lever. Push the shift lever all the way  
into PARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Then  
move the shift lever into the gear you want.  
If you are still having a problem shifting, then have your  
vehicle serviced soon.  
2-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Parking Over Things That Burn  
Engine Exhaust  
{CAUTION:  
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas  
carbon monoxide (CO), which you cannot see  
or smell. It can cause unconsciousness and  
death.  
You might have exhaust coming in if:  
Your exhaust system sounds strange or  
different.  
Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.  
Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.  
Your vehicle was damaged when driving  
over high points on the road or over road  
debris.  
Repairs were not done correctly.  
Your vehicle or exhaust system had been  
{CAUTION:  
modified improperly.  
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into  
your vehicle:  
Drive it only with all the windows down to  
blow out any CO; and  
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust  
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Do not  
park over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other  
things that can burn.  
Have your vehicle fixed immediately.  
2-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Running the Engine While Parked  
{CAUTION:  
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you  
ever have to, here are some things to know.  
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle  
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with  
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can  
roll. Do not leave your vehicle when the engine  
is running unless you have to. If you have left  
the engine running, the vehicle can move  
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To  
be sure your vehicle will not move, even when  
you are on fairly level ground, always set your  
parking brake after you move the shift lever to  
PARK (P).  
{CAUTION:  
Idling the engine with the climate control  
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into  
your vehicle. See the earlier caution under  
Engine Exhaust on page 2-33.  
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly  
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if  
the climate control fan is at the highest setting.  
One place this can happen is a garage.  
Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily.  
NEVER park in a garage with the engine  
running.  
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will not  
move. See Shifting Into Park (P) on page 2-30.  
If you are parking on a hill and if you are pulling a  
trailer, also see Towing a Trailer on page 4-38.  
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard. See  
Winter Driving on page 4-26.  
2-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Compass Operation  
Mirrors  
AUTO 3: Press and hold the “auto highbeam” button  
for approximately three seconds to turn the compass  
on or off.  
Automatic Dimming Rearview  
Mirror with Intellibeam™, OnStar®,  
and Compass  
When the ignition and the compass feature are on, the  
compass will show two character boxes for about  
two seconds. After two seconds, the mirror will display  
the compass heading.  
Your vehicle may have an automatic dimming rearview  
mirror with OnStar® and a compass display. For  
more information, see OnStar® System on page 2-43.  
For more information on Intellibeam™, see “Intellibeam  
Intelligent High-Beam Headlamp Control System”  
under Exterior Lamps on page 3-30.  
Compass Calibration  
If after two seconds the display does not show the  
correct direction, (N for North for example), there may  
be a strong magnetic field interfering with the compass.  
Such interference may be caused by a magnetic  
antenna mount, magnetic note pad holder, or a similar  
magnetic item.  
The mirror includes an eight-point compass display in  
the upper right corner of the mirror face. When on,  
the compass automatically calibrates as the vehicle  
is driven.  
The compass can be placed in calibration mode  
manually by pressing and holding the “auto highbeam”  
button for approximately nine seconds until a C is  
shown in the compass display.  
Automatic Dimming  
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic dimming  
rearview mirror. The automatic dimming feature is  
activated whenever the vehicle is turned on and dims  
only during nighttime driving.  
The mirror can then be calibrated by driving the vehicle  
in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the display  
reads a direction.  
2-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Compass Variance  
The mirror is set to zone eight upon leaving the factory.  
It will be necessary to adjust the compass to  
compensate for compass variance if the vehicle is  
driven outside zone eight. Under certain circumstances,  
such as a long distance, cross-country trip, it will be  
necessary to adjust the compass variance.  
Compass variance is the difference between earth’s  
magnetic north and true geographic north. If the mirror  
is not adjusted to account for zone changes, the  
compass could give false readings.  
To adjust for zone changes, do the following:  
1. Find your current location and variance zone  
number on the zone map that follows.  
2. Press and hold the “auto highbeam” button  
approximately six seconds until a zone number  
appears in the display.  
3. Once the zone number appears in the display,  
press the “auto highbeam” button quickly until  
you reach the correct zone number. Stop pressing  
the button and the mirror will return to normal  
operation. If C appears in the compass window, the  
compass needs calibration. See “Compass  
Calibration” listed previously.  
2-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cleaning the Mirror  
Compass Operation  
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar  
material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray  
glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause  
the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.  
Press the on/off button once to turn the compass on  
or off.  
When the ignition and the compass feature are on, the  
compass will show two character boxes for about  
two seconds. After two seconds, the mirror will display  
the compass heading.  
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror  
with OnStar® and Compass  
Compass Calibration  
Your vehicle may have an automatic dimming rearview  
mirror with a compass display. The mirror also  
contains OnStar® controls. For more information see  
OnStar® System on page 2-43.  
If after two seconds, the display does not show a  
compass heading (for example, N for North), there may  
be a strong magnetic field interfering with the compass.  
Such interference may be caused by a magnetic antenna  
mount, magnetic note pad holder or a similar magnetic  
item. If the letter C should ever appear in the compass  
window, the compass may need calibration.  
The mirror includes an eight-point compass display in  
the upper right corner of the mirror face. When on,  
the compass automatically calibrates as the vehicle  
is driven.  
The mirror can be calibrated by driving the vehicle in  
circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the display reads  
a direction.  
Mirror Operation  
The compass can be placed in calibration mode  
manually by pressing and holding the on/off button until  
a C is shown in the compass display.  
O(On/Off): Press and hold the button, located on the  
lower left side of the mirror face, for about three seconds  
to turn the automatic dimming feature on or off. The  
indicator light will illuminate when this feature is active.  
The automatic dimming feature is active each time the  
vehicle is started.  
2-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Compass Variance  
The zone is set to zone eight upon leaving the factory.  
It will be necessary to adjust the compass to  
compensate for compass variance if you live outside  
zone eight. Under certain circumstances, as  
during a long distance cross-country trip, it will be  
necessary to adjust for compass variance. Compass  
variance is the difference between earth’s  
magnetic north and true geographic north. If not  
adjusted to account for compass variance, your  
compass could give false readings.  
To adjust for compass variance do the following:  
1. Find the current location and variance zone number  
on the following zone map.  
2. Press and hold the on/off button until a zone  
number appears in the display.  
3. Once the zone number appears in the display,  
press the on/off button quickly until the correct  
zone number appears in the display. Stop pressing  
the button and the mirror will return to normal  
operation. If C appears in the compass window, the  
compass may need calibration. See Compass  
Calibration listed previously.  
2-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cleaning the Mirror  
Compass Operation  
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar  
material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray  
glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause  
the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.  
Press the on/off button once to turn the compass  
on or off.  
When the ignition and the compass feature are on, the  
compass will show two character boxes for about  
two seconds. After two seconds, the mirror will display  
the compass heading.  
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror  
with Compass  
Compass Calibration  
Your vehicle may have an automatic dimming rearview  
mirror with a compass display.  
If after two seconds, the display does not show a  
compass heading (for example, N for North), there may  
be a strong magnetic field interfering with the compass.  
Such interference may be caused by a magnetic antenna  
mount, magnetic note pad holder or a similar magnetic  
item. If the letter C should ever appear in the compass  
window, the compass may need calibration.  
The mirror includes an eight-point compass display in  
the upper right corner of the mirror face. When on,  
the compass automatically calibrates as the vehicle  
is driven.  
Mirror Operation  
The mirror can be calibrated by driving the vehicle in  
circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the display reads a  
direction.  
O(On/Off): Press and hold the button, located on the  
lower left side of the mirror face, for about three seconds  
to turn the automatic dimming feature on or off. The  
indicator light will illuminate when this feature is active.  
The automatic dimming feature is active each time the  
vehicle is started.  
The compass can be placed in calibration mode  
manually by pressing and holding the on/off button until  
a C is shown in the compass display.  
2-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Compass Variance  
The zone is set to zone eight upon leaving the factory.  
It will be necessary to adjust the compass to  
compensate for compass variance if you live outside  
zone eight. Under certain circumstances, as  
during a long distance cross-country trip, it will be  
necessary to adjust for compass variance. Compass  
variance is the difference between earth’s  
magnetic north and true geographic north. If not  
adjusted to account for compass variance, your  
compass could give false readings.  
To adjust for compass variance do the following:  
1. Find the current location and variance zone number  
on the following zone map.  
2. Press and hold the on/off button until a zone  
number appears in the display.  
3. Once the zone number appears in the display,  
press the on/off button quickly until the correct  
zone number appears in the display. Stop pressing  
the button and the mirror will return to normal  
operation. If C appears in the compass window, the  
compass may need calibration. See Compass  
Calibration listed previously.  
2-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If your vehicle has manual fold mirrors, the mirrors can  
be manually folded inward to prevent damage when  
going through an automatic car wash. To fold, push the  
mirror toward the vehicle. To return the mirror to its  
original position, push outward. Be sure to return both  
mirrors to their original unfolded position before driving.  
Cleaning the Mirror  
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar  
material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray  
glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause  
the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.  
If your vehicle has the power foldaway mirrors feature,  
do the following:  
Press (C), to fold or unfold the driver’s side mirror.  
Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors  
Your vehicle’s mirror  
controls are located on the  
driver’s door armrest.  
Press (D) to fold or unfold the passenger’s  
side mirror.  
If the mirrors are accidentally folded/unfolded manually,  
they may shake or flutter at normal driving speeds  
and may not stay in the unfolded position. If this  
happens, you will need to reset the mirrors. See  
“Resetting the Power Foldaway Mirrors” next.  
Resetting the Power Foldaway Mirrors  
You will need to reset the power foldaway mirrors if the  
following occurs:  
They are accidentally manually folded/unfolded.  
The mirrors will not stay in the unfolded position.  
Press (A) to select the driver’s side mirror. Then  
press the arrows located on the four-way control  
pad to adjust the mirror.  
The mirrors shake and flutter at normal  
driving speeds.  
To reset the power foldaway mirrors, fold and unfold  
them at least three times using the mirror controls. This  
will reset them to their normal position.  
Press (B) to select the passenger’s side mirror.  
Then press the arrows located on the four-way  
control pad to adjust the mirror.  
2-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror  
Outside Convex Mirror  
If the vehicle is equipped with this feature, the  
driver’s side mirror will adjust for the glare of headlamps  
behind you. This feature is controlled by the on and  
off settings on the automatic dimming rearview mirror.  
{CAUTION:  
A convex mirror can make things (like other  
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.  
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you  
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your  
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder  
before changing lanes.  
Outside Curb View Assist Mirror  
If your vehicle is equipped with memory mirrors, it will  
also be capable of performing the curb view assist mirror  
feature. This feature will allow the driver’s and  
passenger’s side mirror to tilt to a factory programmed  
position when the vehicle is in REVERSE (R). This  
feature may be useful in allowing you to view the curb  
when you are parallel parking.  
The passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex  
mirror’s surface is curved so more can be seen from  
the driver’s seat. This mirror does not have a  
dimming feature.  
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (R) and a  
five-second delay has occurred, the driver’s and  
passenger’s side mirror will return to its original position.  
Outside Heated Mirrors  
If further adjustment is needed after the mirror is  
tilted, the mirror switch may be used.  
When you operate the rear window defogger, it also  
warms both outside mirrors to help clear them of fog or  
ice. See Dual Climate Control System on page 3-44  
for more information.  
This feature can be enabled/disabled through the Driver  
Information Center (DIC).  
2-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A complete OnStar® User’s Guide and the Terms and  
Conditions of the OnStar® Subscription Service  
OnStar® System  
Agreement are included in the vehicle’s glove box  
literature. For more information, visit www.onstar.com or  
www.onstar.ca. Contact OnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR  
(1-888-466-7827), or press the OnStar® button to speak  
to an OnStar® advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.  
Terms and conditions of the Subscription Service  
Agreement can be found at www.onstar.com or  
www.onstar.ca.  
OnStar® uses global positioning system (GPS) satellite  
technology, wireless communications, and live advisors  
to provide you with a wide range of safety, security,  
information, and convenience services. If your airbags  
deploy, the system is designed to make an automatic call  
to OnStar® Emergency where we can request emergency  
services be sent to your location. If you lock your keys in  
the car, call OnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can  
send a signal to unlock your doors. If you need roadside  
assistance, press the OnStar® button and they will get  
you the help you need.  
OnStar® Services  
The Directions and Connections® Plan is included on  
new vehicles for the first year from the date of purchase.  
You can extend this plan beyond the first year to  
meet your needs. For more information, press the  
OnStar® button to speak with an advisor.  
2-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Personal Calling, refer to the OnStar® User’s Guide in  
the vehicle’s glove box, visit www.onstar.com or  
www.onstar.ca, or speak to an OnStar® advisor by  
pressing the OnStar® button or calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR  
(1-888-466-7827).  
Directions and Connections® Plan  
Advanced Automatic Collision Notification  
Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment  
Emergency Services  
OnStar® Virtual Advisor  
Roadside Assistance  
Your vehicle may have Virtual Advisor. It is a feature of  
OnStar® Personal Calling that uses your minutes to  
access weather, local traffic reports and sports updates.  
By pressing the phone button and giving a few simple  
voice commands, you can browse through the  
various topics. Customize your information profile at  
www.myonstar.com. See the OnStar® user’s guide for  
more information.  
Stolen Vehicle Tracking  
AccidentAssist  
Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert  
Remote Diagnostics  
Online Concierge  
Driving Directions  
OnStar® Steering Wheel Controls  
RideAssist  
Information and Convenience Services  
OnStar® Personal Calling  
As an OnStar® subscriber, the Personal Calling  
capability allows you to make hands-free calls using a  
wireless system that is integrated into the vehicle.  
Calls can be placed nationwide using simple voice  
commands with no additional contracts and no additional  
roaming charges. To find out more about OnStar®  
g (Talk/Mute): Your vehicle may be equipped with a  
Talk/Mute button that can be used to interact with  
page 3-122 for more information.  
When calling into voice mail systems or to dial directory  
numbers, press this button once, wait for the response,  
say the number(s) to be dialed, wait for the number(s)  
to be repeated and then say “dial.”  
See the OnStar® User’s Guide for more information.  
2-44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If your vehicle is equipped with the Universal Home  
Remote Transmitter, it complies with Part 15 of the  
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following  
two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful  
interference, and (2) this device must accept any  
interference received, including interference that may  
cause undesired operation.  
Universal Home Remote  
System  
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:  
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this  
device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired  
operation of the device.  
Changes and modifications to this system by other than  
an authorized service facility could void authorization  
to use this equipment.  
The Universal Home Remote System, a combined  
universal transmitter and receiver, provides a way to  
replace up to three hand-held transmitters used to  
activate devices such as gate operators, garage door  
openers, entry door locks, security systems, and  
home lighting.  
2-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garage  
door or gate operator you are programming. When  
programming a garage door, it is advised to park outside  
of the garage.  
Universal Home Remote System  
Operation  
Do not use the Universal Home Remote with any  
garage door opener that does not have the “stop and  
reverse” feature. This includes any garage door opener  
model manufactured before April 1, 1982. If you  
have a newer garage door opener with rolling codes,  
please be sure to follow Steps 6 through 8 to complete  
the programming of your Universal Home Remote  
Transmitter.  
It is recommended that a new battery be installed in  
your hand-held transmitter for quicker and more  
accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.  
Programming Universal Home Remote  
Follow these steps to program up to three channels:  
1. Press and hold down the two outside Universal  
Home Remote buttons, releasing only when the  
Universal Home Remote indicator light begins  
to flash, after 20 seconds. Do not hold down the  
buttons for longer than 30 seconds and do not  
repeat this step to program a second and/or third  
hand-held transmitter to the remaining two Universal  
Home Remote buttons.  
Read the instructions completely before attempting to  
program the Universal Home Remote. Because of  
the steps involved, it may be helpful to have another  
person available to assist you in the programming steps.  
Keep the original hand-held transmitter for use in  
other vehicles as well as for future Universal Home  
Remote programming. It is also recommended that upon  
the sale of the vehicle, the programmed Universal  
Home Remote buttons should be erased for security  
purposes. See “Erasing Universal Home Remote  
Buttons” later in this section or, for assistance, see  
2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter  
about 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the  
Universal Home Remote buttons while keeping the  
indicator light in view.  
2-46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the desired  
Universal Home Remote button and the hand-held  
transmitter button. Do not release the buttons  
until Step 4 has been completed.  
6. Locate in the garage, the garage door opener  
receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”  
or “Smart” button. This can usually be found where  
the hanging antenna wire is attached to the  
motor-head unit.  
Some entry gates and garage door openers may  
require you to substitute Step 3 with the procedure  
noted in “Gate Operator and Canadian  
7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or “Smart”  
button. The name and color of the button may  
vary by manufacturer.  
Programming” later in this section.  
4. The indicator light will flash slowly at first and then  
rapidly after Universal Home Remote successfully  
receives the frequency signal from the hand-held  
transmitter. Release both buttons.  
You will have 30 seconds to start Step 8.  
8. Return to the vehicle. Firmly press and hold the  
programmed Universal Home Remote button for  
two seconds, then release. Repeat the  
5. Press and hold the newly-trained Universal Home  
Remote button and observe the indicator light.  
press/hold/release sequence a second time, and  
depending on the brand of the garage door opener,  
or other rolling code device, repeat this sequence  
a third time to complete the programming.  
If the indicator light stays on constantly,  
programming is complete and your device should  
activate when the Universal Home Remote button is  
pressed and released.  
The Universal Home Remote should now activate  
your rolling-code equipped device.  
To program the remaining two Universal Home  
Remote buttons, begin with Step 2 under  
“Programming Universal Home Remote.” Do not  
repeat Step 1 as this will erase all of the  
programmed channels.  
To program the remaining two Universal Home Remote  
buttons, begin with Step 2 of “Programming Universal  
Home Remote.” You do not want to repeat Step 1,  
as this will erase all previous programming from  
the Universal Home Remote buttons.  
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds  
and then turns to a constant light, continue with  
Steps 6 through 8 following to complete the  
programming of a rolling-code equipped device,  
most commonly, a garage door opener.  
2-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Gate Operator and Canadian  
Programming  
Using Universal Home Remote  
Press and hold the appropriate Universal Home Remote  
button for at least half of a second. The indicator light  
will come on while the signal is being transmitted.  
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter  
signals to time out or quit after several seconds of  
transmission. This may not be long enough for Universal  
Home Remote to pick up the signal during programming.  
Similarly, some U.S. gate operators are manufactured  
to time out in the same manner.  
Erasing Universal Home  
Remote Buttons  
To erase programming from the three Universal Home  
Remote buttons do the following:  
If you live in Canada, or you are having difficulty  
programming a gate operator or garage door opener by  
using the “Programming Universal Home Remote”  
procedures, regardless of where you live, replace  
Step 3 under “Programming Universal Home Remote”  
with the following:  
1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons until  
the indicator light begins to flash, after 20 seconds.  
Do not hold the two outside buttons for longer  
than 30 seconds.  
2. Release both buttons.  
Continue to press and hold the Universal Home Remote  
button while you press and release every two seconds  
(cycle) the hand-held transmitter button until the  
frequency signal has been successfully accepted by the  
Universal Home Remote. The Universal Home Remote  
indicator light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly.  
Proceed with Step 4 under “Programming Universal  
Home Remote” to complete.  
The Universal Home Remote is now in the train  
(learning) mode and can be programmed at any time  
beginning with Step 2 under “Programming Universal  
Home Remote” shown earlier in this section.  
Individual buttons cannot be erased, but they can be  
reprogrammed. See “Reprogramming a Single Universal  
Home Remote Button” following this section.  
2-48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reprogramming a Single Universal  
Home Remote Button  
Cupholder(s)  
There are cupholders located in the full floor console, or  
in the front of the center seat console. In addition to  
this, cup holders are located in the rear armrest.  
To access the full floor console cupholder slide the  
cover back. To access the center seat console  
cupholder, turn the front portion of console.  
To program a device to Universal Home Remote using  
a Universal Home Remote button previously trained,  
follow these steps:  
1. Press and hold the desired Universal Home  
Remote button. Do not release the button.  
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after  
20 seconds. While still holding the Universal Home  
Remote button, proceed with Step 2 under  
“Programming Universal Home Remote” shown  
earlier in this section.  
Coinholder(s)  
Your vehicle may be equipped with a coinholder.  
Center Console Storage Area  
For additional information on Universal Home Remote,  
see Customer Assistance Offices on page 7-4.  
If your vehicle has a full floor console it has two storage  
areas. To access the upper tray storage, lift the left  
lever located in the front of the armrest lid. To access  
the lower storage area, lift the right lever. If your vehicle  
has a center seat console it will have two storage  
areas. To access the upper storage area, press the  
button located on the front of the armrest and lift  
the armrest lid. To access the lower storage area, pull  
the strap located behind the cup holder.  
Storage Areas  
Glove Box  
To open the glove box, lift up on the lever. The glove  
box has a light inside. Use the key to lock and unlock.  
2-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Center Flex Storage Unit  
Sunroof  
The vehicle may have a power sunroof.  
Your vehicle may be equipped with a center flex storage  
unit that includes a front center seat with a lap belt  
and an underseat storage compartment. The center  
seatback can also be used as a fold down armrest.  
Cupholders are also located at the front edge of  
the storage unit and can be accessed by folding the  
compartment forward.  
The switches that operate  
the sunroof are located on  
the overhead console.  
When not being used, the center seat lap belt can be  
stored in the underseat storage compartment as shown.  
Rear Seat Armrest  
Your vehicle may be equipped with a rear seat center  
console and armrest. To open the console, push  
the button and lift the lid. Inside the console are  
two cupholders that can be pulled out when in use.  
To open or close the sunroof, the ignition must be ON  
or Retained Accessory Power (RAP) must be active.  
Convenience Net  
Express Open: The express open feature will operate  
from the closed or partially open position. To express  
open the power sunroof, fully press the driver’s  
side switch rearward once. To stop the sunroof glass in  
a desired position other than to the express-open  
position, press the switch again, in either direction, to  
stop the movement. If the sunshade is in the closed  
position, it will open with the sunroof, or it can be  
opened manually.  
Your vehicle may be equipped with a convenience net.  
The convenience net attaches to the floor of the  
trunk. Put small loads, like grocery bags, behind the net.  
The net is not for larger, heavier loads. Store them in  
the trunk as far forward as you can. When not using the  
net, hook the net to the tabs securing it to the sill plate.  
2-50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Vent Open: From the closed position, press and hold  
the passenger’s side switch forward to vent the  
sunroof. The rear of the sunroof panel will tilt upward  
to the full vent position. The sunshade must be  
opened manually.  
Memory Seat, Mirrors and  
Steering Wheel  
Your vehicle may have the memory package.  
Close: To close the sunroof, operate the controls  
according to one of the following:  
From the open position, press and hold the driver’s  
side sunroof switch forward. The sunshade must be  
closed manually.  
From the vent position, press and hold the  
passenger’s side sunroof switch rearward.  
The controls for this feature are located on the driver’s  
door panel, and are used to program and recall  
memory settings for the driver’s seat, outside mirror,  
and the steering wheel position if the vehicle has  
the power tilt wheel and telescopic steering feature.  
Anti-Pinch: If an object is in the path of the sunroof  
while it is closing, the anti-pinch feature will detect the  
object and stop the sunroof from closing at the point  
of the obstruction. The sunroof will then return to  
the full-open or vent position. To close the sunroof once  
it has re-opened, refer to the two options previously  
described under the “Close” feature instructions.  
To save your positions in memory, do the following:  
1. Adjust the driver’s seat, including the seatback  
recliner and lumbar, both outside mirrors, and  
the steering wheel to a comfortable position.  
Vehicle Personalization  
In addition to the following features, your vehicle may  
also have features that can be programmed through the  
Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Vehicle  
Customization on page 3-88 for more information.  
2. Press and hold button 1 until two beeps sound  
through the driver’s side front speaker to let you  
know that the position has been stored.  
A second seating, mirror, and steering wheel position  
can be programmed by repeating the above steps  
and pressing button 2 for a second driver.  
2-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To recall your memory positions, the vehicle must be in  
PARK (P). Press and release either button 1 or  
button 2 corresponding to the desired driving position.  
The seat, outside mirrors, and steering wheel will move  
to the position previously stored for the identified  
driver. You will hear a single beep.  
Easy Exit Seat  
The control for this feature is located on the driver’s  
door panel between buttons 1 and 2.  
With the vehicle in PARK (P), the exit position can be  
recalled by pressing the exit button. You will hear  
a single beep. The driver’s seat will move back, and if  
the vehicle has the power tilt wheel and telescopic  
steering feature, the power telescopic steering column  
will move up and forward.  
If you use the remote keyless entry transmitter to enter  
your vehicle and the remote recall memory feature  
is on, automatic seat and mirror movement will occur.  
See “MEMORY SEAT RECALL” under DIC Vehicle  
Customization on page 3-88 for more information.  
If the easy exit seat feature is on in the DIC, automatic  
seat and power telescopic steering column movement  
will occur when the key is removed from the ignition.  
See “EASY EXIT SEAT” under DIC Vehicle  
To stop recall movement of the memory feature at any  
time, press one of the power seat controls, memory  
buttons, power tilt wheel control, or power mirror  
buttons.  
Customization on page 3-88 for more information.  
Further programming for automatic seat and steering  
wheel movement can be done using the Driver  
Information Center (DIC). You can select or not select  
the following:  
If something has blocked the driver’s seat and/or the  
steering column while recalling a memory position, the  
driver’s seat and/or the steering column recall may  
stop working. If this happens, press the appropriate  
control for the area that is not recalling for two seconds,  
after the obstruction is removed. Then try recalling  
the memory position again by pressing the appropriate  
memory button. If the memory position is still not  
recalling, see your GM dealer for service.  
The easy exit seat feature  
The memory seat recall feature  
For programming information, see DIC Vehicle  
Customization on page 3-88.  
2-52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 3  
Instrument Panel  
3-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Section 3  
Instrument Panel  
StabiliTrak® Indicator Light ..............................3-64  
3-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NOTES  
3-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instrument Panel Overview  
Column-Shift Model shown, Console-Shift Model similar  
3-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The main components of the instrument panel are the following:  
A. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment on page 3-50.  
J. Analog Clock. See Analog Clock on page 3-44.  
B. Driver Information Center (DIC) Buttons. See Driver  
K. Hazard Warning Flashers Button. See Hazard  
Warning Flashers on page 3-6.  
C. Exterior Lamp Controls. See Exterior Lamps on  
page 3-30.  
L. Radio. See Audio System(s) on page 3-97.  
M. Trunk Release Button. See Trunk on page 2-13.  
D. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument Panel  
Cluster on page 3-56.  
N. Instrument Panel Brightness Control. See Instrument  
Panel Brightness on page 3-36.  
E. Horn. See Horn on page 3-6.  
O. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See Turn  
F. Audio Steering Wheel Controls. See Audio Steering  
Wheel Controls on page 3-122.  
P. Hood Release. See Hood Release on page 5-11.  
Q. Parking Brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-29.  
G. Shift Lever. See Automatic Transaxle Operation on  
page 2-26.  
R. Heated Steering Wheel Button (If Equipped).  
H. Traction Control System Button (Column-Shift  
Vehicles). See Traction Control System (TCS) on  
page 4-9.  
See Heated Steering Wheel on page 3-7.  
S. Cruise Control or Adaptive Cruise Control. See  
Control on page 3-19.  
I. Ultrasonic Front and Rear Parking Assist and  
Adaptive Cruise Control Display (if equipped). See  
on page 3-38 and Adaptive Cruise Control on  
page 3-19.  
T. Climate Controls. See Dual Climate Control System  
on page 3-44.  
U. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 2-49.  
3-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Hazard Warning Flashers  
Horn  
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They  
also let police know you have a problem. Your front  
and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.  
Press near or on the horn symbols on your steering  
wheel pad to sound the horn.  
Tilt Wheel  
The hazard warning  
flasher button is located in  
the center of the  
A tilt wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheel  
before you drive. You can raise the steering wheel to  
the highest level to give your legs more room when you  
enter and exit the vehicle.  
instrument panel.  
The lever that allows you to tilt the steering wheel is  
located on the left side of the steering column.  
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what  
position your key is in, and even if the key is not in.  
To tilt the wheel, hold the  
wheel and pull the lever.  
Then move the wheel  
to a comfortable position  
and release the lever  
Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal  
lamps flash on and off. Press the button again to  
turn the flashers off.  
to lock the wheel in place.  
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn  
signals will not work.  
Other Warning Devices  
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set them up at  
the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind  
your vehicle.  
3-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Power Tilt Wheel and Telescopic  
Steering Column  
Heated Steering Wheel  
Your vehicle may have a heated steering wheel.  
The button for this  
feature is located on  
the steering wheel.  
If your vehicle has this  
feature, the power tilt  
wheel control is located on  
the outboard side of the  
steering column.  
Press the button to turn the heated steering wheel on  
or off. A light on the button will display while the feature  
is on.  
The steering wheel will take about three minutes to  
start heating.  
To operate the power tilt feature, push the control up  
and the steering wheel will tilt up. Push the control down  
and the steering wheel will go down.  
Push the control forward and the steering wheel moves  
toward the front of the vehicle. Push the control  
rearward and the steering wheel moves toward the rear  
of the vehicle. To set the memory position, see DIC  
3-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever  
Turn and Lane-Change Signals  
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down.  
The lever returns automatically when the turn is  
complete. If you momentarily press and release the  
lever, the turn signal will flash 3 times.  
An arrow on the instrument  
panel cluster and in the  
outside rearview mirror will  
flash in the direction of  
the turn or lane change.  
The lever on the left side of the steering column  
includes the following:  
Raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash to  
signal a lane change. Hold it there until the lane change is  
complete. The lever returns when it is released.  
G Turn and Lane-Change Signals. See Turn and  
Lane-Change Signals on page 3-8  
If the turn signal is left on, a warning chime will sound  
and the Driver Information Center (DIC) will display  
TURN SIGNAL ON after driving about a mile to remind  
you to turn it off.  
3 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer. See  
Flash-To-Pass Feature  
Arrows that flash rapidly when signaling for a turn or  
lane change may be caused by a burned out signal bulb.  
Other drivers will not see the turn signal.  
N Windshield Wipers. See Windshield Wipers on  
page 3-13.  
L Windshield Washer. See Windshield Washer  
on page 3-15.  
Replace burned-out bulbs to help avoid possible  
accidents. Check the fuse and for burned-out bulbs if  
the arrow fails to work when signaling a turn. See Rear  
Underseat Fuse Block on page 5-96.  
_ Heated Washer Fluid. See Windshield Washer  
on page 3-15.  
3-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:  
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer  
Push forward to change the headlamps from low  
beam to high. Pull the lever back and then release it to  
change from high beam to low.  
1. This device may not cause interference.  
2. This device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired  
operation of the device.  
This light on the  
instrument panel cluster  
will be on, indicating  
high-beam usage.  
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:  
1. This device may not cause interference.  
2. This device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired  
operation of the device.  
Changes or modifications to this system by other than  
an authorized service facility could void authorization to  
use this equipment.  
Forward Collision Alert (FCA)  
System  
If your vehicle has this feature, be sure to read this  
entire section before using it.  
The system operates on a radio frequency subject to  
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and  
with Industry Canada.  
3-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The Forward Collision Alert (FCA) system provides an  
audible and visual alert if you approach a vehicle  
too quickly that is directly ahead. FCA also provides a  
visual alert with no audible alert if you are following  
another vehicle much too closely. The FCA alert symbol  
is located on top of the instrument panel to the right  
of the driver. FCA uses the Adaptive Cruise Control  
radar to detect a vehicle directly ahead, in your path,  
within a distance of 328 ft (100 m) and operates at  
speeds above 20 mph (32 km/h).  
The FCA control is located  
on the steering wheel.  
{CAUTION:  
To enable or disable FCA, press the Adaptive Cruise  
Control button. See Adaptive Cruise Control on  
page 3-19.  
FCA is only a warning system and does not  
apply the brakes. When you are approaching a  
vehicle or object too rapidly or when you are  
following a vehicle too closely that is ahead of  
you, FCA may not provide you with enough  
time to avoid a collision. FCA is not designed  
to warn the driver of pedestrians or animals.  
Your complete attention is always required  
while driving and you should be ready to take  
action and apply the brakes. For more  
FCA is enabled when the green light on the button is lit.  
FCA is disabled when the green light is off.  
information, see Defensive Driving on page 4-2.  
3-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alerting the Driver  
{CAUTION:  
The FCA alert symbol will  
flash and a warning beep  
will sound when driver  
action may be required.  
On winding roads, FCA may not detect a  
vehicle ahead. You could crash into a  
vehicle ahead of you. Do not rely on FCA  
on winding roads.  
When weather limits visibility, such as in  
fog, rain, or snow, FCA performance is  
limited. There may not be enough warning  
distance to the vehicle in front of you. Do  
not rely on FCA in low visibility conditions.  
The alert symbol will flash when:  
Your vehicle is approaching another vehicle  
too quickly.  
Your vehicle is following a vehicle ahead of you  
much too closely.  
{CAUTION:  
See Defensive Driving on page 4-2 for more information.  
When FCA is enabled, the Adaptive Cruise  
Control switch is on. If you press another  
Adaptive Cruise Control button, you might go  
into cruise when you do not want to. You  
could be startled and even lose control. Be  
careful not to press adaptive cruise buttons  
unless you want to use cruise control.  
3-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Detecting the Vehicle Ahead  
The vehicle ahead symbol, located next to the FCA  
symbol, will only appear when a vehicle ahead of you is  
detected in your path. If this symbol does not appear,  
or disappears briefly, FCA will not respond to vehicles  
you may see ahead. The symbol may disappear on  
curves, highway exit ramps, or hills. Also, when another  
vehicle enters the same lane as you, the FCA system  
will not detect the vehicle until it is completely in  
your driving lane.  
{CAUTION:  
FCA may not detect and warn soon enough to  
stationary or slow-moving vehicles or other  
objects ahead of you. You could crash into an  
object ahead of you. Do not rely on FCA when  
approaching stationary or slow-moving  
vehicles or other objects.  
Unnecessary Alerts  
{CAUTION:  
FCA may occasionally provide alerts that you consider  
unnecessary. It could respond to a turning vehicle  
ahead of you, guard rails, signs, and other stationary  
objects. This is normal operation, your vehicle does not  
need service.  
When the Adaptive Cruise Control radar is  
blocked by snow, ice, or dirt, it may not detect  
a vehicle ahead. FCA may not help you avoid a  
collision under these conditions. Do not use  
FCA when the radar is blocked by snow, ice,  
or dirt. Keep your radar clean. See “Cleaning  
the System” under Adaptive Cruise Control on  
page 3-19.  
Other Messages  
There are three messages that may appear on the  
Driver Information Center (DIC). They are CLEAN  
RADAR, RADAR CRUISE NOT READY and SERVICE  
on page 3-76.  
3-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cleaning the System  
N(Delay): You can set the wiper speed for a long or  
short delay between wipes. This can be very useful  
in light rain or snow. Turn the band to choose the delay  
time. The closer to the top of the lever, the shorter  
the delay.  
The radar can become blocked by snow, ice, or dirt. If  
so, you may need to turn off the engine and clean  
the lens. See “Cleaning the System” under Adaptive  
Cruise Control on page 3-19.  
6 (Low Speed): For steady wiping at low speed,  
turn the band away from you to the first solid band past  
the delay settings. For high-speed wiping, turn the  
band further, to the second solid band past the delay  
settings. To stop the wipers, move the band to off.  
Flash-to-Pass  
This feature lets you use the high-beam headlamps to  
signal the driver in front of you that you want to pass.  
Pull and hold the turn signal lever toward you to  
use. When you do, the following will occur:  
1 (High Speed): For high-speed wiping, turn  
the band further, to the second solid band past the  
delay settings.  
If the headlamps are either off or in the Daytime  
Running Lamps (DRL) mode, the high-beam  
headlamps will turn on. They will stay on as long as  
you hold the lever there. Release the lever to  
turn them off.  
If the headlamps are on high beam, they will switch  
to low beam. To return to high beam, push the  
lever away from you.  
9(Off): To stop the wipers, move the band to off.  
Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades  
before using them. If they are frozen to the windshield,  
carefully loosen or thaw them. If your blades do become  
worn or damaged, get new blades or blade inserts.  
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor. A  
circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools.  
Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload.  
Windshield Wipers  
You control the windshield wipers by turning the band  
with the wiper symbol on it.  
Your vehicle is equipped with wiper-activated  
headlamps. After the windshield wipers have been on  
for approximately six seconds, the headlamps will  
automatically turn on. See Wiper Activated Headlamps  
on page 3-34 for more information.  
8(Mist): For a single wiping cycle, turn the band to  
mist. Hold it there until the wipers start. Then let go. The  
wipers will stop after one wipe. If you want more  
wipes, hold the band on mist longer.  
3-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Turning the wiper band away from you to higher  
Rainsense™ II Wipers  
sensitivity levels increases the sensitivity of the system  
and frequency of wipes. The highest sensitivity setting,  
level five is closest to low. A single wipe will occur each  
time you turn the wiper stalk to a higher sensitivity level to  
indicate that the sensitivity level has been increased.  
If your vehicle has this feature, the moisture sensor is  
mounted on the interior side of the windshield behind the  
rearview mirror. It is used to automatically operate the  
wipers by monitoring the amount of moisture build-up on  
the windshield. Wipes occur as needed to clear the  
windshield depending on driving conditions and  
the sensitivity setting. In light rain or snow, fewer wipes  
will occur. In heavy rain or snow, wipes will occur  
more frequently. The Rainsense™ II wipers operate in a  
delay mode as well as a continuous low or high speed  
as needed. If the system is left on for long periods  
of time, occasional wipes may occur without any  
moisture on the windshield. This is normal and indicates  
that the Rainsense™ II system is activated.  
Notice: Going through an automatic car wash with  
the wipers on can damage them. Turn the wipers  
off when going through an automatic car wash.  
The mist and wash cycles operate as normal and are  
not affected by the Rainsense™ II function. The  
Rainsense™ II system can be overridden at any time by  
manually turning the wiper band to low or high speed.  
When Rainsense™ II is active, the headlamps will  
turn on automatically. The headlamps will turn off again  
once the wipers turn off if it is light enough outside. If  
it is dark, they will remain on. See Wiper Activated  
Headlamps on page 3-34 for more information.  
The Rainsense™ II system can be activated by turning  
the wiper band to one of the five sensitivity levels  
indicated on the wiper stalk. The position closest to off is  
the lowest sensitivity setting, level one. This allows more  
rain or snow to collect on the windshield between wipes.  
Notice: Do not place stickers or other items on the  
exterior glass surface directly in front of the  
moisture sensor. Doing this could cause the  
moisture sensor to malfunction.  
3-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
_ Heated Washer Fluid: If your vehicle is equipped,  
the heated windshield washer fluid system may be  
used to help clear ice, snow, tree sap, or bugs from your  
windshield. Sliding the switch on the signal/multifunction  
lever to this position and then releasing it will activate  
the heated windshield washer fluid system. This  
activation will initiate four heated wash/wipe cycles. The  
first heated wash/wipe cycle may take up to 40 seconds  
to occur, depending on outside temperature. After  
the first wash/wipe cycle, it may take up to 20 seconds  
for each of the remaining cycles. The heated  
Windshield Washer  
{CAUTION:  
In freezing weather, do not use your washer  
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the  
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,  
blocking your vision.  
windshield washer fluid system may be turned off at any  
time by sliding the switch on the signal/multifunction  
lever to this position again.  
J Washer Fluid: Press and release this paddle,  
located at the top of the turn signal/multifunction lever,  
to spray washer fluid on the windshield. The wipers  
will clear the windshield and either stop or return to your  
preset speed. For more washer cycles, press and  
hold the paddle.  
When the heated windshield washer fluid system is  
activated under certain outside temperature conditions,  
steam may flow out of the washer nozzles for a short  
period of time before washer fluid is sprayed. This is a  
normal condition.  
A message will be displayed on the Driver Information  
Center (DIC) when the washer fluid is low. See DIC  
Warnings and Messages on page 3-76.  
3-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the traction  
control system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise  
control will automatically disengage. See Traction  
Control System (TCS) on page 4-9. When road  
conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may  
turn the cruise control back on.  
Cruise Control  
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of  
approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) or more without  
keeping your foot on the accelerator. This is helpful on  
long trips. Cruise control does not work at speeds  
below about 25 mph (40 km/h). When cruise control is  
on, you will see a cruise light on the instrument  
panel cluster.  
Setting Cruise Control  
When you apply your brakes, the cruise control  
shuts off.  
{CAUTION:  
If you leave your cruise control on when you  
are not using cruise, you might hit a button  
and go into cruise when you do not want to.  
You could be startled and even lose control.  
Keep the cruise control switch off until you  
want to use cruise control.  
{CAUTION:  
Cruise control can be dangerous where you  
cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do  
not use your cruise control on winding roads  
or in heavy traffic.  
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery  
roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire  
traction can cause needless wheel spinning,  
and you could lose control. Do not use cruise  
control on slippery roads.  
3-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The cruise control buttons  
are located on left side of  
the steering wheel.  
The cruise light on the instrument panel cluster will  
come on after the cruise control has been set to  
the desired speed.  
1. Press the cruise control button.  
2. Get up to the speed you want.  
3. Press the SET button located on the steering wheel  
and release it.  
4. Take your foot off the accelerator.  
Resuming a Set Speed  
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed  
and then you apply the brake. This shuts off the  
cruise control. But you do not need to reset it.  
I (On): This position activates the system.  
Once the vehicle is traveling approximately 25 mph  
(40 km/h) or more, you can press the RES  
(resume/accelerate) button to return to your desired  
preset speed. The cruise light will be displayed again.  
+ RES (Resume/Accelerate): Press this button to  
make the vehicle accelerate or resume to a previously  
set speed.  
–SET (Set): Press this button to set the speed.  
The vehicle will return to and stay at your preset speed.  
If you press and hold the RES button, the vehicle  
speed will increase until you release the button or apply  
the brake. Unless you want to go faster, do not press  
and hold the RES button.  
[ (Cancel): Press this button to cancel cruise control.  
Cruise control will not work if your parking brake is  
set, or if the master cylinder brake fluid level is low.  
If you apply your brakes, the cruise control will shut off.  
3-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise  
Control  
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise  
Control  
There are two ways to go to a higher speed:  
There are two ways to reduce your speed while using  
cruise control:  
Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher  
speed. Press the SET button, then release the  
button and the accelerator pedal. You will  
now cruise at the higher speed.  
Press the SET button until you reach the lower  
speed you want, then release it.  
To slow down in very small amounts, push the SET  
button briefly. Each time you do this, the vehicle will  
slow down approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h).  
Press the RES button. Hold it there until you get up  
to the speed that you want, and then release the  
button. To increase your speed in very small  
amounts, briefly press the RES button and then  
release it. Each time you do this, your vehicle will  
speed up approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h).  
Passing Another Vehicle While Using  
Cruise Control  
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.  
When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will  
slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.  
The accelerate feature will only work after you have set  
the cruise control speed by pressing the SET button.  
3-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Cruise Control on Hills  
Adaptive Cruise Control  
How well your cruise control will work on hills depends  
upon your speed, load and the steepness of the  
hills. When going up steep hills, you may have to step  
on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed.  
When going downhill, you may have to brake or shift to  
a lower gear to keep your speed down. Applying the  
brake or shifting into a lower gear will take you out  
of cruise control. If you need to apply the brake or shift  
to a lower gear due to the grade of the downhill  
slope, you may not want to attempt to use your cruise  
control feature.  
If your vehicle has this feature, be sure to read this  
entire section before using it.  
The system operates on a radio frequency subject to  
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and  
with Industry Canada.  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:  
1. This device may not cause interference.  
2. This device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired  
operation of the device.  
Ending Cruise Control  
To turn off the cruise control, step lightly on the brake  
pedal, or press the cancel button on the steering wheel.  
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:  
1. This device may not cause interference.  
Erasing Speed Memory  
2. This device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired  
operation of the device.  
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition, your  
cruise control set speed memory is erased.  
Changes or modifications to this system by other than  
an authorized service facility could void authorization to  
use this equipment.  
3-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Adaptive Cruise Control is an enhancement to traditional  
cruise control. It allows you to keep cruise control  
engaged in moderate traffic conditions without having to  
constantly reset your cruise control. Adaptive Cruise  
Control uses radar to detect a vehicle directly ahead in  
your path, within a distance of 330 ft (100 m), and  
operates at speeds above 25 mph (40 km/h). When it is  
engaged by the driver, the system can apply limited  
braking or acceleration of the vehicle automatically to  
maintain a selected follow distance to the vehicle ahead.  
Braking is limited to 0.25 g’s (2.45 m/sec2) of  
deceleration, which is comparable to moderate  
application of the vehicle’s brakes. To disengage  
Adaptive Cruise Control, apply the brake. If no vehicle is  
in your path, your vehicle will react like traditional  
cruise control.  
{CAUTION:  
Adaptive Cruise Control will not apply hard  
braking or bring the vehicle to a complete  
stop. It will not respond to stopped vehicles,  
pedestrians or animals. When you are  
approaching a vehicle or object, Adaptive  
Cruise Control may not have time to slow your  
vehicle enough to avoid a collision. Your  
complete attention is always required while  
driving and you should be ready to take action  
and apply the brakes. For more information,  
see Defensive Driving on page 4-2.  
3-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
{CAUTION:  
When weather limits visibility, such as  
when in fog, rain, or snow conditions,  
Adaptive Cruise Control performance is  
limited. There may not be enough distance  
to adapt to the changing traffic conditions.  
Do not use cruise control when visibility  
is low.  
On winding roads, Adaptive Cruise  
Control may not detect a vehicle ahead.  
You could crash into a vehicle ahead of  
you. Do not use Adaptive Cruise Control  
on winding roads.  
Adaptive Cruise Control may not have time  
to slow your vehicle enough to avoid a  
crash when you are driving in conditions  
where vehicles may suddenly slow or stop  
ahead of you, enter your lane, or cross  
your vehicle’s path. If you are driving in  
these conditions, do not use Adaptive  
Cruise Control. The warning beep and alert  
symbol may indicate that you are driving  
in conditions where Adaptive Cruise  
Control should not be used. See “Alerting  
the Driver” in this section.  
The Adaptive Cruise  
controls are located on the  
steering wheel.  
On slippery roads, fast changes in tire  
traction can cause needless wheel  
spinning, and you could lose control. Do  
not use cruise control on slippery roads.  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
The cruise control buttons are located on left side of the  
steering wheel.  
3-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Engaging Adaptive Cruise Control With  
the Set Button  
] (On): This position activates the system.  
+ Resume (Resume/Accelerate): Push this button to  
make the vehicle resume to a previously set speed  
or to increase the set speed when Adaptive Cruise  
Control is already active.  
{CAUTION:  
Set: Press this button to set the speed or to  
decrease the set speed when Adaptive Cruise  
Control is already active.  
If you leave your Adaptive Cruise Control  
switch on when you are not using cruise, you  
might hit a button and go into cruise when you  
do not want to. You could be startled and even  
lose control. Keep the Adaptive Cruise Control  
switch off until you want to use cruise control.  
[ (Cancel): Press this button to cancel adaptive  
cruise control.  
+ (Increase Following Distance): Press this button  
to increase the distance between your vehicle and  
other vehicles.  
The set speed is selected by the driver. This is the  
speed you will travel if there is no vehicle detected in  
your path.  
(Decrease Following Distance): Press this button to  
decrease the distance between your vehicle and  
other vehicles.  
Adaptive cruise control will not work if the master  
cylinder brake fluid level is low.  
3-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To set Adaptive Cruise Control, do the following:  
Increasing Set Speed While Using Adaptive  
Cruise Control  
1. Press the ] (On) button.  
There are two ways to increase the set speed:  
2. Get up to the speed you want.  
Use the accelerator to get to the higher speed.  
Press the SET button and then release the  
button and the accelerator pedal. You will now  
cruise at the higher speed.  
3. Press in the SET button and release it.  
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.  
Once Adaptive Cruise Control is set, it may immediately  
apply the brakes if it detects a vehicle ahead is too  
close or moving slower than your vehicle.  
Press the RES button. Hold it there until the desired  
set speed is displayed on the Driver Information  
Center (DIC), then release the switch. To increase  
your set speed in very small amounts, move the  
switch briefly to RES. Each time you do this,  
your vehicle set speed will increase by  
The on symbol is located on the display at the top of  
the instrument panel to the right of the driver. When the  
on symbol is lit on the display, it indicates that  
Adaptive Cruise Control is active.  
1 mph (1 km/h).  
A message on the DIC will also display when Adaptive  
Cruise Control is set. See DIC Warnings and  
Messages on page 3-76.  
Your vehicle will not reach the set speed until the  
system determines there is not a vehicle in front of you.  
At that point, your vehicle speed will increase to the  
set speed.  
Keep in mind speed limits, surrounding traffic speeds,  
and weather conditions when adjusting your set speed.  
If your vehicle is in Adaptive Cruise Control when  
the traction control system begins to limit wheel spin,  
the Adaptive Cruise Control will automatically disengage.  
See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-9 and  
StabiliTrak® System on page 4-10. When road  
conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may turn  
the Adaptive Cruise Control back on.  
3-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Use the plus and minus buttons on the steering wheel  
to adjust the follow distance.  
Decreasing Set Speed While Using  
Adaptive Cruise Control  
Press the plus button to increase the distance or the  
minust button to decrease the distance. The first button  
press will show you the current follow distance setting  
on the DIC. Your current follow distance setting will  
be maintained until you change it.  
Press the SET button until you reach the lower speed  
you want, then release it.  
To slow down in very small amounts, briefly press the  
SET button. Each time you do this, your set speed  
will decrease by 1 mph (1 km/h) slower.  
There are six follow distances to choose from. The  
follow distance selection ranges from near to far  
(one second to two seconds follow time). The distance  
maintained for a selected follow distance will vary  
based on vehicle speed. The faster the vehicle speed  
the further back your vehicle will follow. Consider  
traffic and weather conditions when selecting the follow  
distance. The range of selectable distances may not  
be appropriate for all drivers and driving conditions. If  
you prefer to travel at a follow distance farther than  
Adaptive Cruise Control allows, disengage the system  
and drive manually.  
Resuming a Set Speed  
Suppose you set your Adaptive Cruise Control at a  
desired speed and then you apply the brake. This will  
disengage the Adaptive Cruise Control. But you do  
not need to reset it.  
Once you are going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more,  
press the RES button. Adaptive Cruise Control will  
be engaged with the previously chosen set speed.  
Selecting the Follow Distance (GAP)  
When the system detects a slower moving vehicle, it will  
adjust your vehicle’s speed and maintain the follow  
distance (gap) you select.  
3-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Alerting the Driver  
{CAUTION:  
The Adaptive Cruise  
Control alert symbol is  
located on the display at  
the top of the instrument  
panel to the right of  
the driver.  
Adaptive Cruise Control has only limited  
braking ability to slow your vehicle. In some  
cases, Adaptive Cruise Control may not have  
time to slow your vehicle enough to avoid a  
collision. Be ready to take action and apply the  
brakes yourself. See Defensive Driving on  
page 4-2.  
The alert symbol will flash and a warning beep will  
sound when driver action may be required. If Adaptive  
Cruise Control is engaged, the alert symbol will  
flash when:  
Approaching and Following a Vehicle  
Adaptive Cruise Control cannot apply sufficient  
braking because you are approaching a vehicle  
too rapidly.  
The vehicle speed drops below about  
20 mph (32 km/h).  
A temporary condition prohibits Adaptive Cruise  
Control from operating. See DIC Warnings and  
Messages on page 3-76 for more information.  
The Vehicle Ahead symbol is located on the top of the  
instrument panel to the right of the driver.  
A malfunction is detected in the system. See DIC  
Warnings and Messages on page 3-76 for more  
information.  
The Vehicle Ahead symbol will only appear when a  
vehicle is detected in your path.  
See Defensive Driving on page 4-2.  
3-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If this symbol does not appear, or disappears briefly,  
Adaptive Cruise Control will not respond to vehicles you  
may see ahead.  
Stationary or Very Slow-Moving Objects  
{CAUTION:  
{CAUTION:  
Adaptive Cruise Control may not detect  
and react to stationary or slow-moving  
vehicles or other objects ahead of you. You  
could crash into an object ahead of you. Do  
not use Adaptive Cruise Control when  
approaching stationary or slow-moving  
vehicles or other objects.  
When the Adaptive Cruise Control radar is  
blocked by snow, ice, or dirt, it may not detect  
a vehicle ahead. Adaptive Cruise Control may  
not have time to slow your vehicle enough to  
avoid a collision. Do not use Adaptive Cruise  
Control when the radar is blocked by snow,  
ice, or dirt. Keep your radar clean. See  
“Cleaning the System” later in this section.  
{CAUTION:  
Adaptive Cruise Control will automatically slow your  
vehicle down when approaching a slower moving  
vehicle. It will then adjust your speed to follow the  
vehicle in front at the selected follow distance. Your  
speed will increase or decrease to follow the vehicle in  
front of you but will not exceed the set speed. It  
may apply limited braking, if necessary. When braking is  
active, your brake lights will come on. Braking may  
feel or sound different than if you were applying  
the brakes yourself. This is normal.  
Adaptive Cruise Control may not detect and  
react to stationary or slow-moving vehicles or  
other objects ahead of you. Your vehicle may  
accelerate toward objects, such as a stopped  
vehicle that suddenly appears after the lead  
vehicle changes lanes. Your complete attention  
is always required while driving and you should  
be ready to take action and apply the brakes.  
3-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Low-Speed Deactivation  
Curves in the Road  
If your speed falls below 20 mph (32 km/h) while  
following a vehicle ahead, Adaptive Cruise Control will  
begin to disengage. The Driver Alert symbol will  
flash and the warning beep will sound. The driver must  
take action since Adaptive Cruise Control will not  
slow the vehicle to a stop.  
{CAUTION:  
Due to Adaptive Cruise Control limitations in  
curves, it may respond to a vehicle in another  
lane, or may not have time to react to a vehicle  
in your lane. You could crash into a vehicle  
ahead of you, or lose control of your vehicle.  
Give extra attention in curves and be ready to  
use the brakes if necessary. Select an  
Passing a Vehicle/Adaptive Cruise  
Control Override  
If you need to increase speed to pass a vehicle, use the  
accelerator pedal. While you are doing this, the  
system will not automatically apply the brakes. A  
message will appear on the DIC. See DIC Warnings  
and Messages on page 3-76. Once you remove  
your foot from the accelerator pedal, Adaptive Cruise  
Control will return to normal operation and be able  
to apply the brakes, if needed.  
appropriate speed while driving in curves.  
Adaptive Cruise Control may operate differently in a  
sharp curve. It may reduce your speed if the curve is  
too sharp.  
{CAUTION:  
If you rest your foot on the accelerator pedal,  
the system will not automatically apply the  
brakes. You could crash into a vehicle ahead  
of you. Do not rest your foot on the accelerator  
pedal when using Adaptive Cruise Control.  
3-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When following a vehicle and entering a curve, Adaptive  
Cruise Control could lose track of the vehicle in your  
lane and accelerate your vehicle. When this happens the  
Vehicle Ahead symbol will not appear.  
Adaptive Cruise Control may detect a vehicle that is not  
in your lane and apply the brakes.  
Adaptive Cruise Control may, occasionally, provide a  
driver alert and/or braking that you consider  
unnecessary. It could respond to signs, guardrails, and  
other stationary objects when entering or exiting a  
curve. This is normal operation. Your vehicle does not  
need service.  
3-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Highway Exit Ramps  
Using Adaptive Cruise Control on Hills  
and When Towing a Trailer  
{CAUTION:  
Adaptive Cruise Control may lose track of the  
vehicle ahead and accelerate up to your set  
speed while entering or on highway exit ramps.  
You could be startled by this acceleration and  
even lose control of the vehicle. Disengage  
Adaptive Cruise Control before entering a  
highway exit ramp. Do not use Adaptive Cruise  
Control while entering or on exit ramps.  
How well Adaptive Cruise Control will work on hills and  
when towing a trailer depends on your speed, vehicle  
load, traffic conditions and the steepness of the hills. It  
may not detect a vehicle in your lane while driving  
on hills. When going up steep hills, you may want to  
use the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed. When  
going downhill, especially when towing a trailer, you  
may want to brake to keep your speed down. Applying  
the brake disengages the system. You may choose  
not to use Adaptive Cruise Control on steep hills,  
especially when towing a trailer.  
Other Vehicle Lane Changes  
If another vehicle enters the same lane as you, Adaptive  
Cruise Control will not detect the vehicle until it is  
completely in the lane. Be ready to take action and apply  
the brakes yourself.  
3-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Disengaging Adaptive Cruise Control  
Exterior Lamps  
To disengage the system, apply the brake pedal, press  
the cancel button, or press the Adaptive Cruise  
Control button.  
The exterior lamps control  
is located on the  
instrument panel to the left  
of the steering wheel.  
Erasing Set Speed Memory  
When you press the Adaptive Cruise Control button or  
turn the ignition off, the set speed memory is erased.  
Other Messages  
There are three additional messages that may appear  
on the DIC. They are SERVICE RADAR CRUISE,  
RADAR CRUISE NOT READY and CLEAN RADAR.  
These messages will appear to indicate a problem with  
the Adaptive Cruise Control. See DIC Warnings and  
Messages on page 3-76 for more information.  
It controls the following systems:  
Headlamps  
Taillamps  
Parking Lamps  
License Plate Lamps  
Instrument Panel Lights  
Fog Lamps  
Cleaning the System  
The radar can become blocked by snow, ice, or dirt. If  
so, you may need to turn off the engine and clean  
the lens. Remember, do not use Adaptive Cruise Control  
in icy conditions, or when visibility is low, such as in  
fog, rain or snow.  
The exterior lamps control has four positions:  
9(Off): Turn the control to this position to turn off the  
exterior lamps except for Daytime Running Lamps (DRL).  
The emblem/lens is located in the center of the grille.  
To clean the emblem/lens, wipe the surface with a  
soft cloth. After cleaning the emblem/lens, try to engage  
the Adaptive Cruise Control. If you are unable to do  
so, see your dealer.  
3-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AUTO (Automatic): Turn the control to this position to  
automatically turn on the headlamps at normal  
brightness, together with the following:  
Intellibeam™ Intelligent High-Beam  
Headlamp Control System  
If your vehicle has this feature, be sure to read this  
entire section before using it.  
Parking Lamps  
Instrument Panel Lights  
Intellibeam™  
Intellibeam™ is an enhancement to your vehicle’s  
headlamp system. Using a digital light sensor on your  
rearview mirror, this system will turn the vehicle’s  
high-beam headlamps on and off according to  
surrounding traffic conditions.  
;(Parking Lamps): Turn the control to this position  
to turn on the parking lamps together with the  
following:  
The Intellibeam™ system will turn your high-beam  
headlamps on when it is dark enough, there is no other  
traffic present, and the Intellibeam system is enabled.  
Instrument Panel Lights  
License Plate Lamps  
Tail Lamps  
Turning On and Enabling Intellibeam™  
Press and release the Intellibeam™ button on the inside  
rear view mirror. The Intellibeam™ indicator on the  
mirror will turn on to let you know the system has been  
turned on. Once the system has been turned on, it  
will remain on each time the vehicle is started.  
Side Marker Lamps  
The parking brake indicator light will come on and stay  
on while the parking lamps are on with the engine  
off and the ignition in ACCESSORY or RUN.  
Additionally, the intellibeam system must be enabled.  
2(Headlamps): Turn the control to this position to  
turn on the headlamps together with the previously listed  
lamps. A warning chime will sound if you open the  
driver’s door when the ignition switch is off and  
the headlamps are on.  
To enable the Intellibeam™ system, turn the exterior  
lamp control to AUTO, with the turn signal/multifunction  
lever in its neutral position. The High-Beam On Light  
will appear on the instrument panel cluster when  
the high-beams are on. See Highbeam On Light on  
page 3-70.  
- (Fog Lamps): Press the exterior lamps control to  
turn on the fog lamps. See Fog Lamps on page 3-35.  
3-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving with Intellibeam™  
The exterior lamp control is turned to any setting  
except AUTO.  
Intellibeam™ will only activate your high-beams when  
driving over 20 mph (32 km/h).  
When this occurs, Intellibeam™ will be disabled  
until the control is turned back to the AUTO position.  
The high-beam headlamps will remain on, under the  
automatic control of Intellibeam™, until any of the  
following situations occur:  
The Intellibeam™ system is turned off at the inside  
rearview mirror.  
Intellibeam™ may not turn off the high-beams if the  
system cannot detect other vehicle’s lamps because of  
any of the following:  
The system detects an approaching vehicle’s  
headlamps.  
The system detects a preceding vehicle’s taillamps.  
The others vehicle’s lamp(s) are missing, damaged,  
obstructed from view or otherwise undetected.  
The outside light is bright enough that high-beam  
headlamps are not required.  
The other vehicle’s lamp(s) are covered with dirt,  
snow and/or road spray.  
The vehicle’s speed drops below 15 mph (24 km/h).  
The headlamp stalk is moved forward to the  
high-beam position or the flash-to-pass feature is  
on page 3-9 and Flash-to-Pass on page 3-13.  
The other vehicle’s lamp(s) cannot be detected due  
to dense exhaust, smoke, fog, snow, road spray,  
mist or other airborne obstructions.  
Your vehicle’s windshield is dirty, cracked or  
obstructed by something that blocks the view of the  
Intellibeam light sensor.  
When either of these conditions occur, the  
Intellibeam™ feature will be disabled and the  
Intellibeam™ light in the mirror will turn off until the  
high-beam stalk is returned to the neutral position.  
Your vehicle’s windshield is covered with ice, dirt,  
haze or other obstructions.  
If Intellibeam™ was using low-beams prior to this  
action, the Intellibeam™ feature will be temporarily  
disabled until the stalk is returned to the neutral  
position.  
3-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A different sensitivity setting is available for dealer  
diagnostics. This is done by pushing and holding this  
button for 20 seconds until the Intellibeam™ indicator  
light flashes three times. If you accidentally activate this,  
the vehicle’s setting will automatically be reset each  
time the ignition is turned off and then on again.  
Your vehicle is loaded such that the front end of the  
vehicle points upward, causing the Intellibeam  
sensor to aim high and not detect headlamps and  
taillamps.  
You are driving on winding or hilly roads.  
You may need to manually disable or cancel the  
high-beam headlamps by turning the low-beam  
headlamps on, if any of the above conditions exist.  
Cleaning the Intellibeam™ Light Sensor  
The light sensor is located  
on the inside of the vehicle  
in front of the inside  
Disabling and Resetting Intellibeam™  
at the Rearview Mirror  
rearview mirror.  
Intellibeam™ can be disabled by using the controls on  
the inside rearview mirror.  
AUTO 3 (On/Off): To disable the system, press this  
button on the inside rearview mirror. The Intellibeam™  
indicator will turn off and the will not come back on until  
the Intellibeam™ button is pressed again.  
(Stalk Disable): When Intellibeam™ has turned on the  
high-beams, pull or push the high-beam stalk. This  
will disable Intellibeam™. The Intellibeam™ indicator on  
the mirror will turn off. To re-enable Intellibeam™,  
press the Intellibeam™ button on the mirror.  
Clean the light sensor window, periodically, using  
glass cleaner on a soft cloth. Gently wipe the sensor  
window. Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the  
surface of the sensor window.  
3-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The DRL system will make the turn signal lamps come  
on when the following conditions are met:  
Wiper Activated Headlamps  
This feature activates the headlamps and parking lamps  
after the windshield wipers have been in use for  
approximately six seconds.  
It is still daylight and the ignition is on.  
The exterior lamp control is in the off position.  
The transaxle is not in PARK (P) (United  
When the ignition is turned to OFF, the wiper-activated  
headlamps will immediately turn off. The wiper-activated  
headlamps will also turn off if the windshield wipers  
are turned off.  
States only).  
When DRL are on, no other exterior lamps such as the  
parking lamps, taillamps, etc. will be on when the  
DRL are being used. Your instrument panel will not be  
lit up either.  
Headlamps on Reminder  
When automatic lighting is on and it is dark enough  
outside, the turn signal lamps will turn off and normal  
low-beam headlamp operation will occur.  
A warning chime will sound if the exterior lamp control  
is left on in either the headlamp or parking lamp position  
and the driver’s door is opened with the ignition off.  
When automatic lighting is on and it is bright enough  
outside, the regular lamps will go off, and the DRL  
will take over. If you start your vehicle in a dark garage,  
the automatic headlamp system will come on  
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)  
immediately. Once you leave the garage, it will take  
approximately one minute for the automatic headlamp  
system to change to DRL if there is light outside. During  
that delay, your instrument panel cluster may not be  
as bright as usual. Make sure your instrument  
panel brightness knob is in the full bright position. See  
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for  
others to see the front of your vehicle during the  
day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving  
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the short  
periods after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional  
daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles  
first sold in Canada.  
Turning on automatic lighting or the headlamps will  
deactivate the DRL. If the parking lamps or the fog lamps  
were turned on instead, the DRL will still deactivate.  
3-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To idle your vehicle with the DRL off at night, turn off  
automatic lighting and shift the transaxle into PARK (P).  
Placing your vehicle in PARK (P) disables the DRL.  
The DRL will stay off until you shift out of PARK (P).  
When automatic lighting is on and the fog lamps are  
turned on, the fog lamps, headlamps and parking lamps  
will remain on.  
The ignition must be on for the fog lamps to operate.  
To drive your vehicle with the DRL off, turn off automatic  
lighting and manually turn on the parking lamps or fog  
lamps (if equipped).  
Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to  
be on along with the fog lamps.  
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular  
headlamp system when you need it.  
Cornering Lamps  
The cornering lamps come on when the headlamps or  
parking lamps are on and you signal a turn with the  
multifunction lever. They provide more light for  
cornering.  
Fog Lamps  
Use the fog lamps for better vision in foggy or misty  
conditions.  
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver  
- (Fog Lamps): Your vehicle is equipped with fog  
lamps. It is located on the exterior lamps control.  
The exterior lamps control is located on the instrument  
panel to the left of the steering column.  
If the manual parking lamps or headlamps have been  
left on, the exterior lamps will turn off approximately  
10 minutes after the ignition is turned to OFF. This  
protects against draining the battery in case you have  
accidentally left the headlamps or parking lamps on.  
The battery saver does not work if the headlamps are  
turned on after the ignition switch is turned to OFF.  
When you press the exterior lamps control, the fog lamp  
light on the instrument panel cluster will come on to  
indicate that the fog lamps and the parking lamps are on.  
Press the button again to turn them off.  
If you need to leave the lamps on for more than  
10 minutes, use the exterior lamp control to turn the  
lamps back on.  
If you turn on the high-beam headlamps, the fog lamps  
will turn off. They will turn back on again when you  
switch to low-beam headlamps.  
3-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Instrument Panel Brightness  
Entry Lighting  
This feature turns on the courtesy lamps and the  
backlighting to the door switches and to the exterior  
lamp control when a door is opened or if you press the  
remote keyless entry transmitter unlock button. If  
activated due to the transmitter, the lighting will remain  
active for about 40 seconds. Since the entry lighting  
system uses the light sensor, it must be dark outside in  
order for the courtesy lamps to turn on. The courtesy  
lamps turn off approximately 25 seconds after the  
last door is closed. They will dim to off if the ignition key  
is turned to RUN, or immediately deactivate if the  
power locks are activated.  
D (Instrument Panel Brightness): This feature  
controls the brightness of the instrument panel lights.  
The button for this control is located below the exterior  
lamps control.  
Push the button in and release to extend the button.  
Turn the button clockwise for brightness of the  
instrument panel lights and counter clockwise to turn the  
brightness down.  
Courtesy Lamps  
The courtesy lamps are located on the headliner above  
the rear seat. These lamps come on by turning the  
instrument panel brightness knob fully clockwise or when  
any door is opened and it is dark outside. Puddle  
lamps are located on the bottom of the front and rear  
door trim.  
Parade Dimming  
This feature prohibits dimming of the digital displays and  
backlighting during daylight hours when the key is in  
the ignition and the headlamps are on. This feature is  
fully automatic. When the light sensor reads darkness  
outside and the parking lamps are active, the digital  
displays can be adjusted by turning the instrument panel  
brightness knob counterclockwise to dim and clockwise  
to brighten lighting.  
Professional vehicles have an additional dome lamp and  
also opera lamps.  
3-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If the battery continues to discharge, even with the  
engine idling at a higher rpm setting, some electrical  
loads will automatically be reduced. When this occurs,  
the rear window defogger may take slightly longer  
to clear the glass, the heated seats may not get as warm  
as they usually do and the climate control fan may cut  
back to a lower speed. For more battery saving  
information, see “Battery Saver Active Message” under  
Reading Lamps  
The reading lamps are located on the overhead console  
on the headliner and in the rear door opening. These  
lamps come on automatically when any door is opened  
and it is dark outside.  
For manual operation, press the button to turn them on.  
Press it again to turn them off.  
If the reading lamps are left on, they automatically shut  
off 10 minutes after the ignition has been turned off.  
Inadvertent Power Battery Saver  
This feature is designed to protect your vehicle’s battery  
against drainage from the interior lamps, trunk lamp,  
glove box lamp, or the garage door opener. When the  
ignition is turned off, the power to these features will  
automatically turn off after 10 minutes (three minutes if  
a new car has 15 miles (24 km) or less). Power will  
be restored for an additional 10 minutes if any door is  
opened, the trunk is opened or the courtesy lamp switch  
is turned on.  
Battery Load Management  
The battery load management feature is designed to  
monitor the vehicle’s electrical load and determine when  
the battery is in a heavy discharge condition. During  
times of high electrical loading, the engine may idle  
at a higher revolutions per minute (rpm) setting  
than normal to make sure the battery charges. High  
electrical loads may occur when several of the following  
are on: headlamps, high beams, fog lamps, rear  
window defogger, the climate control fan at high speeds,  
heated seats and engine cooling fans.  
3-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Ultrasonic Front and Rear Parking  
Assist (UFRPA)  
{CAUTION:  
If your vehicle is equipped, the Ultrasonic Front and  
Rear Parking Assist (UFRPA) system is designed  
to help you park. It operates only at speeds less than  
5 mph (8km/h). UFRPA helps make parking easier and  
helps you avoid colliding with objects such as parked  
vehicles. The UFRPA system detects objects that  
are close to the vehicle which are at least 10 inches  
(25.4 cm) off the ground and below hood or trunk level.  
The system detects objects up to 4 feet (1.2 m) in  
front of the vehicle and up to 8 feet (2.5 m) behind your  
vehicle. UFRPA determines how close these objects  
are from your bumpers within this area. Four ultrasonic  
sensors on the front and rear bumpers are used to  
detect the distance to the object.  
Even with the Ultrasonic Front and Rear Park  
Assist system, the driver must check carefully  
before backing up or moving forward while  
parking. The system does not operate above  
speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h). The system does  
not detect objects that are more than 4 feet  
(1.2 meters) in front of the vehicle and more  
than 8 feet (2.5 meters) behind the vehicle.  
Also, the system does not detect objects that  
are below your bumper, underneath your  
vehicle, or some objects very close to the  
vehicle. The system is not designed to detect  
children, pedestrians, bicyclists, or pets.  
So, unless you check carefully behind and in  
front of your vehicle while you are parking  
they could be injured or killed.  
Whether or not you are using front and rear  
park assist, always check carefully in front and  
behind your vehicle before moving forward or  
backing up and then watch closely as you do.  
3-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The UFRPA lights are used to provide distance and  
system information, along with beeps played out either  
the front or rear speakers. For objects detected near the  
front bumper, high-toned beeps will be played out the  
front speakers. For objects detected near the rear  
bumper, low-toned beeps will be played out the  
rear speakers.  
How the System Works  
When the vehicle is started, the front display will  
briefly illuminate to let you know the display is  
operating correctly. When the shift lever is moved into  
REVERSE (R), the rear display will briefly illuminate  
to let you know the display is operating correctly.  
UFRPA comes on automatically when the shift lever is  
moved out of PARK (P). The system does not work  
at a forward speed greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), so the  
front display indicators are turned off. The system  
also does not work at a reverse speed greater than  
5 mph (8 km/h). To remind you of this, the red light on  
the rear display will flash.  
Front Parking Assist  
Display  
Rear Parking Assist  
Display  
The front display is located on top of the instrument  
panel to the right of the driver. The rear display is  
located near the rear window and can be seen by  
looking over your right shoulder. The rear display has  
three color-coded lights. The front display will have either  
three or six lights depending on whether your vehicle is  
equipped with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC). If your  
vehicle has ACC, it will have three lights along with the  
ACC lights. If your vehicle does not have ACC, it will have  
six UFRPA lights.  
The system can be disabled using the Driver Information  
Center (DIC). See DIC Controls and Displays on  
page 3-72.  
3-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
How the System Works when  
Moving Forward  
When moving forward, the system detects objects only  
near the front bumper.  
How the System Works when Backing  
When backing, UFRPA detects objects close to the  
front and rear bumpers. The first time an object  
is detected a single chime will sound. If an object is  
detected at a REVERSE (R) speed of less than 5 mph  
(8 km/h), or if you are already within an 8 ft (2.5 m)  
distance to a detected object when the system  
first comes on, the following describes what will occur  
according to your distance from an object located behind  
the vehicle:  
If an object is detected at a forward speed of less than  
5 mph (8 km/h), or if you are already within a 4 ft  
(1.2 m) distance to a detected object when UFRPA first  
comes on, the following describes what will occur  
according to your distance from an object located in  
front of the vehicle:  
At distances between 40 inches (1 m) and  
8 ft (2.5 m), a single amber light will be lit.  
At distances between 40 inches (1 m) and  
4 ft (1.2 m), two amber lights will be lit. If you have  
Adaptive Cruise Control, a single amber light  
will be lit.  
At distances between 23 inches (0.6 m) and  
40 inches (1 m ), four amber lights will be lit. If you  
have Adaptive Cruise Control, two amber lights will  
be lit.  
At distances between 23 inches (0.6 m) and  
40 inches (1 m), both amber lights will be lit.  
At distances between 12 inches (0.3 m) and  
23 inches (0.6 m), all three lights (amber/amber/red)  
will be lit.  
At distances less than 12 inches (0.3 m), a chime  
will sound for a short time and all three lights  
(amber/amber/red) will be lit and flashing.  
At distances between 12 inches (0.3 m) and  
23 inches (0.6 m), all six lights (four amber lights/  
two red lights) will be lit. If you have Adaptive Cruise  
Control, all three lights (amber/amber/red) will be lit.  
At distances less than 12 inches (0.3 m), a chime will  
sound for a short time and all six lights (four amber  
lights/two red lights) will be lit and flashing. If you  
have Adaptive Cruise Control, a chime will sound for  
a short time and all three lights (two amber lights/  
one red light) will be lit and flashing.  
3-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When you are backing the vehicle and objects are  
detected at the same time near both the front and rear  
bumpers, both color-coded light displays will notify  
you of objects close to each bumper. If there are objects  
detected near both bumpers, the beeps will only be  
sounded to notify that objects are close to the rear  
bumper. However, if while you are backing and an object  
comes within 1 ft (0.3 m) of the front bumper, and at  
the same time there is another object further than  
1 ft (0.3 m) from the rear bumper, then the beeps will  
only be sounded to notify you of the closer object that is  
near the front bumper.  
A trailer was attached to your vehicle, or a bicycle  
or an object was hanging out of your trunk during  
your last drive when you turned off the vehicle. If the  
attached objects are removed from your vehicle  
before the start of your next drive, the system will  
return to normal operation unless an object is  
detected when the vehicle is shifted out of park. If  
this occurs, you will have to wait until the vehicle is  
driven forward above 15 mph (25 km/h) before  
UFRPA will return to normal operation.  
A bicycle or an object is attached to the front  
bumper during your last drive when you turned off  
the vehicle. If the attached objects are removed  
from your vehicle before the start of your next drive,  
the system will return to normal unless an object  
is detected when the vehicle is shifted out of park.  
If this occurs, UFRPA will return to normal  
operation when the vehicle is driven forward  
above 15 mph (25 km/h).  
When the System Does Not Seem to  
Work Properly  
If the UFRPA system will not activate due to a temporary  
condition, the message PARKING ASSIST OFF will  
be displayed on the DIC and a red light will be shown on  
the rear UFRPA display when the shift lever is moved  
into REVERSE (R). This occurs under the following  
conditions:  
The ultrasonic sensors are not kept clean. So be  
sure to keep your vehicle’s front and rear bumpers  
free of mud, dirt, snow, ice and slush. For  
The driver disables the system. See DIC Controls  
and Displays on page 3-72.  
cleaning instructions, see Washing Your Vehicle on  
page 5-86. If after cleaning the front and rear  
bumpers and driving forward at a speed of at least  
15 mph (25 km/h), the DIC displays the PARKING  
ASSIST OFF message, see your dealer.  
The parking brake pedal is depressed.  
3-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other conditions that may affect system  
performance include vibrations from a jackhammer  
or the compression of air brakes on a very large  
truck or other mechanical devices that interfere with  
UFRPA performance.  
Accessory Power Outlet(s)  
Your vehicle is equipped with accessory power outlets.  
The outlets can be used to plug in electrical equipment  
such as a cellular telephone, CB radio, etc.  
If your vehicle has a stationary center console, the  
power outlet is located inside the lower storage area.  
There are outlets also on the right front lower part of the  
driver’s seat and in the lower storage bin. See Center  
Console Storage Area on page 2-49.  
When UFRPA is disabled without driver action and  
the driver attempts to turn UFRPA back on using  
the Driver Information Center (DIC), the PARKING  
ASSIST ON option will not be selectable if the  
necessary conditions stated above for normal  
system operation are not met.  
There are two accessory power outlets in the rear seat  
area located on the door armrests next to the ashtrays.  
As always, drivers should use care when backing up a  
vehicle. Always look behind you, being sure to check  
for other vehicles, obstructions and blind spots.  
Your vehicle may have a small cap that must be  
removed to access the accessory power outlet. If it  
does, when not using the outlet be sure to cover it with  
the protective cap.  
For Driver Information Center messages related to  
page 3-76.  
The accessory power outlet can be used at any time.  
If the bumper is damaged, your UFRPA system may not  
work properly. Take the vehicle to your dealer to  
repair the system.  
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on for  
extended periods will drain the battery. Always turn  
off electrical equipment when not in use and do  
not plug in equipment that exceeds the maximum  
amperage rating.  
3-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Certain accessory power plugs may not be compatible  
to the accessory power outlet and could result in  
blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a  
problem see your dealer for additional information on the  
accessory power outlets.  
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter  
Notice: If you put papers, pins, or other flammable  
items in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other  
smoking materials could ignite them and possibly  
damage your vehicle. Never put flammable items in  
the ashtray.  
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to your  
vehicle may damage it or keep other components  
from working as they should. The repairs would not  
be covered by your warranty. Do not use equipment  
exceeding maximum amperage rating. Check  
Front Ashtray  
With the full floor console, the ashtray is located below  
the climate control system. To open, push down and  
then release the cover. To clean the ashtray, push the  
lip of the ashtray to remove it. Push the opposite  
side of the ashtray’s lip to install.  
with your dealer before adding electrical equipment.  
Follow the proper installation instructions that are  
included with any electrical equipment you install.  
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause  
damage not covered by your warranty. Do not  
hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket  
from the plug because the power outlets are  
designed for accessory power plugs only.  
For vehicles without the floor console, pull the tray  
located below the climate controls to reveal the ashtray.  
The ashtray can be removed by pulling on the ledge  
located at the top of the ashtray.  
Rear Ashtray  
The ashtrays are located on the door armrests. To use  
an ashtray, lift the lid.  
3-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Cigarette Lighter  
Climate Controls  
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is  
heating will not allow the lighter to back away from  
the heating element when it is hot. Damage from  
overheating may occur to the lighter or heating  
element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold a  
cigarette lighter in while it is heating.  
Dual Climate Control System  
With this system you can control the heating, cooling  
and ventilation for your vehicle. To avoid window fogging  
on rainy and humid days at temperatures above  
freezing, run the air conditioning compressor. Also, it is  
best to avoid the use of recirculation mode except  
when maximum air-conditioning performance is needed  
for a short amount of time to avoid exterior odors  
and fogging.  
The cigarette lighter is located near the front ashtray.  
Press the lighter all the way in and release it. It will pop  
back out by itself once the element has heated for use.  
Cigarette lighters can be used to provide electrical  
power to accessories. See Accessory Power Outlet(s)  
on page 3-42 for more information.  
Analog Clock  
The clock is located on the instrument panel above the  
radio. To adjust the clock, do the following:  
1. Locate the adjustment button directly below the  
clock face.  
2. Push and hold the adjustment button to advance  
the clock hands. Holding the button down will  
cause the clock to advance faster. Release the  
button before you get to the desired time.  
Climate Control Panel for Vehicles with Rear  
Climate Control  
3. Push and release the button to increase the time  
by one minute increments until the desired time  
is reached.  
3-44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Do not cover the solar sensor located in the center of  
the instrument panel near the windshield. For more  
information on the solar sensor, see “Sensors” later in  
this section.  
Automatic Operation  
AUTO 9 (Automatic Fan): When this position is  
selected on the fan control, the system will adjust the fan  
speed. If the OnStar® system is activated when this  
position is selected, the climate control fan speed  
will lower.  
After your vehicle is started, the display will show  
the interior temperature settings and the outside  
temperature.  
AUTO (Automatic Mode):  
If the AUTO position is selected on the fan or mode  
control, the system will automatically control the  
air conditioning compressor. The A/C compressor will  
run automatically even at cool outside temperatures  
in order to dehumidify the air. The A/C indicator light will  
be lit when the system is operating automatically,  
even at near freezing outside temperatures. Press the  
A/C button on the fan control to turn off the A/C.  
For improved window clearing performance in defog or  
defrost modes, the A/C compressor will run  
1. Turn the fan control to the AUTO position.  
2. Turn the mode control to the AUTO position.  
3. Adjust the temperature to a comfortable setting  
between 68°F (21°C) and 78°F (26°C).  
Choosing the coldest or warmest temperature  
setting will not cause the system to heat or cool any  
faster. In cold weather, the system will start at  
reduced fan speeds to avoid blowing cold air into  
your vehicle until warmer air is available. The  
system will start out blowing air at the floor but may  
change modes automatically as the vehicle  
warms up to maintain the chosen temperature  
setting. The length of time needed to warm  
the interior will depend on the outside temperature  
and temperature of the vehicle.  
automatically in damp cool conditions.  
4. Wait 20 to 30 minutes for the system to stabilize in  
order for the system to regulate automatically. Then  
adjust the temperature as necessary to find your  
comfort setting.  
3-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
h (AUTO RECIRCULATION): If the AUTO position  
is selected on either the fan or mode control, the system  
will automatically control the air inlet to supply fresh  
outside air or recirculate the interior air to cool the car  
faster. The indicator light on the recirculation button will  
light whenever the system switches to recirculation. You  
may force outside air by pressing the button when the  
light is lit. The next time AUTO fan or mode is selected,  
the air inlet will reset back to AUTO operation.  
9 (Off): Turn the left control to this position to turn  
the entire climate control system off.  
To change the current mode, select one of the following  
positions using the right control:  
AUTO: Turn the control to this position to turn on the  
automatic delivery mode operation.  
F (Vent): Turn the control to this mode to direct air to  
the instrument panel outlets.  
Manual Operation  
* (Bi-Level): Turn the control to this mode to direct  
approximately half of the air to the instrument panel  
outlets and most of the remaining air to the floor outlets.  
In automatic operation, cooler air is directed to the  
upper outlets and warmer air to the floor outlets.  
9 (Fan): Turn the left knob either to the left or right to  
adjust the fan speed. Turning this control completely  
counterclockwise will turn on the automatic fan  
operation. Turning this control to the “O” position will  
turn the climate control system off. If the airflow seems  
low when the fan speed is at the highest setting, the  
passenger compartment air filter may need to be  
page 3-53.  
7 (Floor): Turn the control to this mode to direct most  
of the air to the floor outlets with some air directed to  
the side window outlets and the windshield.  
The mode control can also be used to select the  
floor/defog mode. Information on defogging and  
defrosting can be found later in this section.  
3-46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If the PASS button is pressed to turn the Passenger  
temperature setting off, the driver’s temperature  
knob will control the temperature for the entire vehicle.  
? (Recirculation): Press this button to keep outside  
air from coming in the vehicle. It can be used to  
prevent outside air and odors from entering your vehicle  
or to help cool the air inside your vehicle more quickly.  
Press this button to turn the recirculation mode on or off.  
When the button is pressed, an indicator light will  
come on.  
AUX: Press this button to turn the rear climate  
control fan on for automatic operation. After the AUX  
button is pressed, the indicator light will come on. Press  
the button again to turn the auxiliary fan off.  
«ª (Driver’s Temperature Controls): Press these  
buttons next to the fan control to manually increase  
or decrease the temperature inside your vehicle.  
# (Air Conditioning): Press this button to override  
the automatic system and turn the air-conditioning  
system on or off. When in AUTO, the air-conditioning  
compressor will come on automatically, as necessary.  
«ª (Passenger’s Temperature Controls): Press  
these buttons next to the mode control to manually  
increase or decrease the temperature for the front  
passenger. If the passenger’s climate control system is  
off, pressing one of these buttons will turn it on.  
The air-conditioning system removes moisture from  
the air, so you may notice a small amount of water  
dripping underneath your vehicle while idling or after  
turning off the engine. This is normal.  
PASS (Passenger’s Climate Control): Press this  
button to turn the passenger’s climate control systems  
on or off. The temperature selected by the front  
passenger will also control the rear system air  
temperature unless the rear seat passengers select  
their own comfort setting.  
3-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sensors  
There is also an interior temperature sensor located  
next to the steering wheel that measures the  
temperature of the air inside your vehicle.  
The solar sensor, located in the defrost grille, middle of  
the instrument panel, monitors the solar radiation.  
Do not cover the solar sensor or the system will not  
work properly.  
There is also an exterior temperature sensor located  
behind the front grille. This sensor reads the outside air  
temperature and helps maintain the temperature inside  
the vehicle. Any cover on the front of the vehicle could  
cause a false reading in the displayed temperature.  
3-48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In order to prevent false temperature readings at  
startup, the displayed temperature will not change until  
the following occurs:  
W (Floor/Defog): Turning the control to this mode  
directs approximately half of the air to the floor outlets  
and the remaining air is directed to the side window  
outlets and to the windshield. When you select  
this mode, the system turns off recirculation and runs  
the air-conditioning compressor unless the outside  
temperature is at or below freezing. The recirculation  
mode cannot be selected while in the floor/defog mode.  
Vehicle speed is above 10 mph (16 kmh) for  
5 minutes.  
Vehicle speed is above 32 mph (51 kmh) for  
2 and a half minutes.  
The climate control system uses the information from  
these sensors to maintain your comfort setting by  
adjusting the outlet temperature, fan speed, and the air  
delivery mode. The system may also supply cooler  
air to the side of the vehicle facing the sun. The  
recirculation mode will also be used as needed to  
maintain cool outlet temperatures.  
0 (Defrost): Turning the control to this mode  
directs most of the air to the windshield and the  
side window outlets. In this mode, the system will  
automatically turn off recirculation and run the  
air-conditioning compressor, unless the outside  
temperature is at or below freezing. Recirculation  
cannot be selected while in the defrost mode. Do not  
drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.  
Defogging and Defrosting  
Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high humidity  
(moisture) condensing on the cool window glass. This  
can be minimized if the climate control system is  
used properly. There are two modes to clear fog from  
your windshield. Use the floor/defog mode to clear  
the windows of fog or moisture and warm the  
passengers. Use the defrost mode to remove fog or  
frost from the windshield more quickly.  
For professional vehicles, air will be allowed to flow  
through the rear outlets. For quicker defrost, press the  
AUX button on the front climate control system so  
that the light is not lit.  
3-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Rear Window Defogger  
Outlet Adjustment  
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to  
remove fog or frost from the rear window.  
For the front outlets, use the thumbwheel located below  
each outlet to change the direction of the airflow. Use the  
thumbwheel located next to the outlets to shut the airflow  
or to open the outlets and re-direct the air.  
< (Rear Defogger): Press the center of the control  
to turn the rear window defogger on or off. Be sure  
to clear as much snow from the rear window as possible.  
The rear window defogger will turn off approximately  
20 minutes after the button is pressed if your vehicle is  
moving at slower vehicle speeds. At higher vehicle  
speeds, the rear defogger may stay on continuously.  
Each additional press will run the defogger for  
approximately 10 minutes.  
For the rear outlets, slide the lever left or right and up or  
down to change the direction of the airflow.  
Operation Tips  
Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the air  
inlets at the base of the windshield that may  
block the flow of air into your vehicle.  
Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may  
adversely affect the performance of the system.  
The heated outside rearview mirrors will heat to help  
clear fog or frost from the surface of the mirror when the  
rear window defogger is on.  
Keep the path under the front seats clear of  
objects to help circulate the air inside of your  
vehicle more effectively.  
Notice: Do not use a razor blade or sharp object to  
clear the inside rear window. Do not adhere  
anything to the defogger grid lines in the rear glass.  
These actions may damage the rear defogger.  
Repairs would not be covered by your warranty.  
3-50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The control panel for this system is located on the back  
of the center console.  
Rear Climate Control System  
If the AUX button located on the front climate control  
panel is pressed, the rear climate control system will be  
turned on. The rear system will operate in automatic  
mode and the temperature settings selected for the  
front climate control panel will also be selected for the  
rear passengers.  
If the rear passenger would like to adjust the rear  
climate control system, they can select a different  
temperature and a different mode or fan speed.  
Whenever the rear passengers have adjusted settings  
on the rear climate control system, the AUX light is lit on  
the front climate control system. The driver can turn  
off the auxiliary fan by pressing the AUX button.  
When the front climate control system is turned off or in  
defrost mode, the rear climate control system is  
turned off. The rear system will turn back on once  
another front mode is selected.  
If your vehicle has a rear climate-control system, the  
rear-seat passengers can use it to adjust the direction of  
the airflow, the fan speed and the temperature for the  
rear-seating area. This system also works with the main  
climate-control system in your vehicle.  
For more information on how to use the climate control  
page 3-44. For more information on the air outlets, see  
Outlet Adjustment on page 3-50.  
3-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Automatic Operation  
«N ª (Mode): Press these buttons to change the  
air delivery mode. If in AUTO air delivery mode, pressing  
the up arrow button will cancel automatic operation  
and place the system in manual mode. To change the  
current mode, select one of the following:  
«A ª (Fan): Press this button until AUTO appears  
on the display to place the system in automatic mode.  
When automatic operation is active, the system will  
automatically control the fan speed. If in auto fan mode,  
pressing the up arrow button will cancel automatic  
operation and places the system in manual mode. If in  
auto mode, pressing the down arrow will turn the  
rear climate control system off.  
Y (Vent): This mode directs air to the upper outlets.  
% (Bi-Level): This mode directs half the air to  
the upper outlets, and the other half to the floor outlets.  
«N ª (Mode): Press the this button until AUTO  
appears on the display to place the system in automatic  
mode. When automatic operation is active, the system  
will automatically control the air delivery mode.  
[ (Floor): This mode directs the air to the  
floor outlets.  
For more information on how to use the front climate  
control system, see Dual Climate Control System  
on page 3-44.  
Manual Operation  
For more information on the air outlets, see Outlet  
Adjustment on page 3-50. Be sure to keep the area  
under the front seats clear of any objects so that the air  
inside of your vehicle can circulate effectively.  
«A ª (Fan): Press these up or down arrow  
buttons to increase or decrease the fan speed.  
«b ª (Temperature): Press these up or down  
arrow buttons to increase or decrease the temperature  
for the rear seat passengers. Once the rear setting  
temperature is altered from following the front setting  
temperature, it will no longer follow changes to the front  
setting temperature until the front climate control  
AUX button resets it.  
3-52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Passenger Compartment Air Filter  
The passenger compartment air filter traps most of the  
pollen from the air entering your vehicle. Like your  
vehicle’s engine air cleaner/filter, it may need to  
be changed periodically. For how often to change the  
passenger compartment air filter, see Scheduled  
Maintenance on page 6-4.  
To access the passenger compartment air filter, do the  
following:  
1. Use a tool to gently pry the cover up. If your vehicle  
has tabs that allow you to unlatch the cover with  
your fingers, you will not need a tool for this step.  
The access panel for the passenger compartment air  
filter is located under the hood near the windshield,  
on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.  
3-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2. Then, insert a tool behind the push pin located on  
the inboard side of the air filter compartment to  
carefully pry the pin out.  
3. To remove the air filter, insert a tool between the air  
filter and the compartment wall on the outboard  
side of the vehicle. Then, push in to flatten the pin  
holding the air filter in place. Gently remove the  
air filter and any loose debris that may be inside the  
air filter compartment.  
4. Insert the new air filter by pushing until you hear a  
click. Then, reinstall the push pin and snap the  
cover into place.  
3-54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem  
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages  
and warning lights work together to let you know when  
there is a problem with your vehicle.  
Warning Lights, Gages,  
and Indicators  
This part describes the warning lights and gages that  
may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you  
locate them.  
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on  
when you are driving, or when one of the gages  
shows there may be a problem, check the section that  
tells you what to do about it. Follow this manual’s  
advice. Waiting to do repairs can be costly – and even  
dangerous. So please get to know your warning  
lights and gages. They are a big help.  
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is  
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause  
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to  
your warning lights and gages could also save you  
or others from injury.  
Your vehicle also has a Driver Information Center (DIC)  
that works along with the warning lights and gages.  
See Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-71 for  
more information.  
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a  
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you will  
see in the details on the next few pages, some  
warning lights come on briefly when you start the  
engine just to let you know they are working. If you are  
familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed  
when this happens.  
3-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Instrument Panel Cluster  
The instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You will know how  
fast you are going, how much fuel you are using and many of the other things you will need to know to drive safely  
and economically.  
United States version shown, Canada similar  
3-56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Speedometer and Odometer  
Safety Belt Reminder Light  
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both  
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).  
See “MPH (km)” under DIC Controls and Displays  
on page 3-72 for more information.  
When the key is turned to RUN or START, a chime will  
sound for several seconds to remind you and your  
passengers to buckle your safety belts. The driver safety  
belt light will also come on and stay on for several  
seconds, then it will flash for several more. You should  
buckle your seat belt.  
The odometer mileage can be checked without  
the vehicle running. Your vehicle’s odometer works  
together with the driver information center. You can set  
a Trip A and a Trip B odometer. See “Trip Information”  
under DIC Controls and Displays on page 3-72 for  
more information.  
This chime and light will be  
repeated if the driver  
remains unbuckled and the  
vehicle is in motion.  
If your vehicle ever needs a new odometer installed, the  
new one will be set to the correct mileage total of the  
old odometer.  
Tachometer  
If the driver’s belt is buckled, neither the chime nor the  
light will come on.  
This gage indicates the  
engine speed in  
revolutions per  
minute (rpm).  
3-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Passenger Safety Belt  
Reminder Light  
Airbag Readiness Light  
There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument  
panel, which shows the airbag symbol. The system  
checks the airbag’s electrical system for malfunctions.  
The light tells you if there is an electrical problem.  
The system check includes the airbag sensors, the  
airbag modules, the wiring and the diagnostic module.  
For more information on the airbag system, see  
Airbag System on page 1-55.  
Several seconds after the key is turned to RUN or  
START, a chime will sound for several seconds  
to remind the front passenger to buckle their safety belt.  
This would only occur if the passenger airbag is  
enabled. See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-65  
for more information. The passenger safety belt light  
will also come on and stay on for several seconds, then  
it will flash for several more.  
This light will come on  
when you start your  
vehicle, and it will flash for  
a few seconds. Then the  
light should go out. This  
means the system is ready.  
This chime and light will be  
repeated if the passenger  
remains unbuckled and  
the vehicle is in motion.  
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start the  
vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your  
airbag system may not work properly. Have your vehicle  
serviced right away.  
If the passenger’s safety belt is buckled, neither the  
chime nor the light will come on.  
3-58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator  
{CAUTION:  
Your vehicle has the passenger sensing system.  
Your overhead console has a passenger airbag  
status indicator.  
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you  
start your vehicle, it means the airbag system  
may not be working properly. The airbags in  
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they  
could even inflate without a crash. To help avoid  
injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle  
serviced right away if the airbag readiness light  
stays on after you start your vehicle.  
United States  
Canada  
The airbag readiness light should flash for a few  
seconds when you turn the vehicle on. If the light does  
not come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to  
warn you if there is a problem.  
When the ignition key is turned to RUN or START, the  
passenger airbag status indicator will light ON and  
OFF, or the symbol for on and off, for several seconds  
as a system check. Then, after several more seconds,  
the status indicator will light either ON or OFF, or either  
the on or off symbol to let you know the status of the  
right front passenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mounted  
side impact airbag.  
If there is a problem with the airbag system in your  
vehicle, the Service airbag message will appear on the  
DIC display. See DIC Warnings and Messages on  
page 3-76 and Safety Belt Pretensioners on page 1-31  
for more information.  
3-59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger  
airbag status indicator, it means that the right front  
passenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact  
airbag are enabled (may inflate).  
{CAUTION:  
Even though the passenger sensing system is  
designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal  
airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag if  
the system detects a rear-facing child restraint,  
no system is fail-safe, and no one can  
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under  
some unusual circumstance, even though it is  
turned off. We recommend that rear-facing  
child restraints be secured in the rear seat,  
even if the airbag is off.  
{CAUTION:  
If the on indicator comes on when you have a  
rear-facing child restraint installed in the right  
front passenger’s seat, it means that the  
passenger sensing system has not turned off  
the passenger’s frontal airbag and  
seat-mounted side impact airbag. A child in a  
rear-facing child restraint can be seriously  
injured or killed if the right front passenger’s  
airbag inflates. This is because the back of the  
rear-facing child restraint would be very close  
to the inflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facing  
child restraint in the right front passenger’s  
seat if the airbag is turned on.  
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the airbag  
status indicator, it means that the passenger sensing  
system has turned off the right front passenger’s frontal  
airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag. See  
Passenger Sensing System on page 1-65 for more on  
this, including important safety information.  
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate a  
rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun visor says,  
“Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front.” This  
is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if  
the airbag deploys.  
3-60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If, after several seconds, all status indicator lights  
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may be a  
problem with the lights or the passenger sensing  
system. See your dealer for service.  
Charging System Light  
When you turn the engine  
on, this light will come on  
briefly to show that the  
generator and battery  
charging systems  
{CAUTION:  
are working properly.  
If the off indicator and the airbag readiness  
light ever come on together, it means that  
something may be wrong with the airbag  
system. If this ever happens, have the vehicle  
serviced promptly, because an adult-size  
person sitting in the right front passenger seat  
may not have the protection of the airbags.  
See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-58.  
If this light stays on, your vehicle needs service. You  
should take your vehicle to the dealer at once. To save  
your battery until you get there, turn off all accessories.  
See DIC Controls and Displays on page 3-72 for  
more information.  
3-61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light  
will also come on when you set your parking brake.  
The light will stay on if your parking brake does  
not release fully. If it stays on after your parking brake is  
fully released, it means you have a brake problem.  
Brake System Warning Light  
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into  
two parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can still  
work and stop you. For good braking, though, you  
need both parts working well.  
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the  
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is  
harder to push, or the pedal may go closer to the  
floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on,  
have the vehicle towed for service. See Towing  
Your Vehicle on page 4-37.  
If the warning light comes on, there is a brake problem.  
Have your brake system inspected right away.  
{CAUTION:  
Your brake system may not be working  
United States  
Canada  
properly if the brake system warning light is on.  
Driving with the brake system warning light on  
can lead to an accident. If the light is still on  
after you have pulled off the road and stopped  
carefully, have the vehicle towed for service.  
This light should come on briefly when you turn the  
engine on. If it does not come on then, have it fixed so  
it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.  
3-62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Anti-Lock Brake System  
Warning Light  
Low Tire Pressure Warning Light  
This light will come on  
briefly as you start the  
engine, for vehicles  
equipped with the Tire  
Pressure Monitor System.  
With the anti-lock brake  
system, the light will come  
on when your engine is  
started and may stay on  
for several seconds. That  
is normal.  
It will then come on only when a flat or low tire pressure  
condition exists.  
If the ABS warning light comes on and stays on, there  
may be a problem with the antilock portion of the  
brake system. If the red BRAKE light is not on, you still  
have brakes, but you do not have antilock brakes.  
See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-62.  
See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 5-59 for  
more information.  
If the light stays on, turn the ignition to OFF/ACC. If the  
light comes on when you are driving, stop as soon  
as possible and turn the ignition off. Then start  
the engine again to reset the system. If the light still  
stays on, or comes on again while you are driving, your  
vehicle needs service. If the regular brake system  
warning light is not on, you still have brakes, but you do  
not have anti-lock brakes. If the regular brake system  
warning light is also on, you do not have anti-lock brakes  
and there is a problem with your regular brakes. See  
3-63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Traction Control System (TCS)  
Warning Light  
StabiliTrak® Indicator Light  
For vehicles equipped with  
the StabiliTrak® system,  
this warning light  
The traction control system  
warning light should come  
on briefly when the  
engine is started.  
should come on briefly  
when the engine is started.  
If the warning light does not come on then, have it fixed  
so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem. If  
it stays on, or comes on when you are driving, there may  
be a problem with your StabiliTrak® system and your  
vehicle may need service. When this warning light is  
on, the system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your  
driving accordingly.  
If the StabiliTrak® system warning light comes on  
and stays on for an extended period of time when the  
system is turned on, your vehicle needs service.  
See StabiliTrak® System on page 4-10 for more  
information.  
If the warning light does not come on then, have it fixed  
so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem. If  
it stays on, or comes on when you are driving, there may  
be a problem with your traction control system and  
your vehicle may need service. When this warning light  
is on, the system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust  
your driving accordingly.  
If the traction control system warning light comes on  
and stays on for an extended period of time when the  
system is turned on, your vehicle needs service.  
See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-9 for  
more information.  
3-64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Engine Coolant Temperature  
Warning Light  
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage  
This gage  
shows the engine  
coolant temperature.  
The engine coolant  
temperature warning light  
will come on when the  
engine is very hot.  
This light will also come on briefly when the vehicle  
is started.  
It can be used to see when your engine has warmed up  
and to make sure your cooling system is operating  
properly. If the gage pointer moves into the shaded area,  
the engine coolant is too hot and the engine coolant  
temperature warning light will come on. See Engine  
Overheating on page 5-25 for more information.  
If the light does not go out or comes on and stays on  
while driving, there may be a problem with the cooling  
system. Driving with engine coolant temperature light on  
could cause your vehicle to overheat, see Overheated  
See Engine Overheating on page 5-25 and DIC  
Warnings and Messages on page 3-76 for more  
information.  
3-65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,  
transaxle, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of your  
vehicle or the replacement of the original tires with  
other than those of the same Tire Performance  
Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission  
controls and may cause this light to come on.  
Modifications to these systems could lead to costly  
repairs not covered by your warranty. This may  
also result in a failure to pass a required Emission  
Inspection/Maintenance test. See Accessories  
and Modifications on page 5-3.  
Malfunction Indicator Lamp  
Check Engine Light  
Your vehicle is equipped  
with a computer which  
monitors operation of the  
fuel, ignition, and emission  
control systems.  
This light should come on, as a check to show you it is  
working, when the ignition is on and the engine is  
not running. If the light does not come on, have it  
repaired. This light will also come on during a  
malfunction in one of two ways:  
This system is called OBD II (On-Board  
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to  
assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the  
life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner  
environment. The check engine light comes on to  
indicate that there is a problem and service is required.  
Malfunctions often will be indicated by the system  
before any problem is apparent. This may prevent more  
serious damage to your vehicle. This system is also  
designed to assist your service technician in correctly  
diagnosing any malfunction.  
Light Flashing — A misfire condition has been  
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions  
and may damage the emission control system  
on your vehicle. Diagnosis and service may  
be required.  
Light On Steady — An emission control system  
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.  
Diagnosis and service may be required.  
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this  
light on, after awhile, your emission controls  
may not work as well, your fuel economy may not  
be as good, and your engine may not run as  
smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that may  
not be covered by your warranty.  
3-66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing  
fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.  
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed  
should turn the light off.  
If the Light Is Flashing  
The following may prevent more serious damage to  
your vehicle:  
Reducing vehicle speed  
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?  
Avoiding hard accelerations  
Avoiding steep uphill grades  
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition  
will usually be corrected when the electrical system  
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.  
If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of  
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible  
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?  
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. See  
Gasoline Octane on page 5-5. Poor fuel quality will  
cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed.  
You may notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling  
when you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation  
on acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. (These  
conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)  
This will be detected by the system and cause the  
light to turn on.  
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see “If  
the Light Is On Steady” following.  
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,  
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.  
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart  
the engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If  
the Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is still  
flashing, follow the previous steps, and see your dealer  
for service as soon as possible.  
If you experience one or more of these conditions,  
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least  
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.  
If the Light Is On Steady  
You may be able to correct the emission system  
malfunction by considering the following:  
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,  
your dealer can check the vehicle. Your dealer has the  
proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any  
mechanical or electrical problems that may have  
developed.  
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?  
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install  
the cap. See Filling the Tank on page 5-8. The  
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has  
3-67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Emissions Inspection and  
Maintenance Programs  
Oil Pressure Light  
Some state/provincial and local governments have or  
may begin programs to inspect the emission control  
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this  
inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle  
registration.  
{CAUTION:  
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. If  
you do, your engine can become so hot that it  
catches fire. You or others could be burned.  
Check your oil as soon as possible and have  
your vehicle serviced.  
Here are some things you need to know in order to help  
your vehicle pass an inspection:  
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check  
engine light is on or not working properly.  
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD  
(on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical  
emission control systems have not been completely  
diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be  
considered not ready for inspection. This can happen if  
you have recently replaced your battery or if your  
battery has run down. The diagnostic system is  
designed to evaluate critical emission control systems  
during normal driving. This may take several days  
of routine driving. If you have done this and your vehicle  
still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD  
system readiness, your GM dealer can prepare the  
vehicle for inspection.  
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance may  
damage the engine. The repairs would not be  
covered by your warranty. Always follow the  
maintenance schedule in this manual for changing  
engine oil.  
3-68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
This light tells you if there  
could be a problem with  
your engine oil pressure.  
Fog Lamp Light  
The fog lamps light will  
come on when the fog  
lamps are in use.  
This light will come on briefly when you start your  
engine. That is a check to be sure the light works. If it  
does not come on, be sure to have it fixed so it will  
be there to warn you if something goes wrong.  
The light will go out when the fog lamps are turned off.  
See Fog Lamps on page 3-35 for more information.  
When the light comes on and stays on, it means that oil  
is not flowing through your engine properly. You  
could be low on oil and you might have some other  
system problem.  
Rear Fog Lamp Light  
This light will come on  
when the rear fog lamps  
are in use. For more  
information see Fog Lamps  
on page 3-35.  
Security Light  
For information regarding  
this light, see  
on page 2-19.  
Canada Only  
3-69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Lights On Reminder  
Highbeam On Light  
This light comes on  
whenever the parking  
lamps are on.  
This light comes on  
whenever the high-beam  
headlamps are on.  
See Headlamps on Reminder on page 3-34 for more  
information.  
for more information.  
Cruise Control Light  
Fuel Gage  
This light comes on  
whenever you set your  
cruise control.  
The fuel gage shows  
approximately how much  
fuel is in the tank. It  
works only when the  
engine is on.  
The light will go out when the cruise control is turned  
off. See Cruise Control on page 3-16 and Adaptive  
Cruise Control on page 3-19 for more information.  
3-70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If the fuel supply gets low, the Fuel Level Low message  
will appear on the DIC and a single chime will sound.  
Driver Information Center (DIC)  
The Driver Information Center (DIC) gives you the  
status of many of your vehicle’s systems. The DIC is  
also used to display warning/status messages. All  
messages will appear in the DIC display located at the  
bottom of the instrument panel cluster, below the  
tachometer and speedometer. The DIC buttons are  
located on the instrument panel, to the left of the  
steering wheel.  
Here are a few concerns some owners have had about  
the fuel gage. All of these situations are normal and  
do not indicate that anything is wrong with the fuel gage:  
At the gas station the gas pump shuts off before  
the gage reads full.  
The gage may change when you turn, stop quickly  
or accelerate quickly.  
The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After a short  
delay, the DIC will display the information that was  
last displayed before the engine was turned off.  
It takes a little more or less fuel to fill the tank than  
the gage indicated. For example, the gage may  
have indicated that the tank was half full, but  
it actually took a little more or less than half the  
tank’s capacity to fill the tank.  
The top line of the DIC display shows the vehicle system  
information and the warning/status messages. The  
bottom line of the DIC display shows the odometer on  
the left side. The bottom line of the DIC display also  
shows a digital speedometer on the right side.  
If a problem is detected, a warning message will appear  
on the display. Be sure to take any message that  
appears on the display seriously and remember that  
clearing the message will only make the message  
disappear, not correct the problem.  
3-71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
U Customization: Press this button to scroll through  
each of the customization features. See DIC Vehicle  
Customization on page 3-88 for more information on the  
customization features.  
DIC Controls and Displays  
The Driver Information  
Center (DIC) has different  
displays which can be  
accessed by pressing the  
DIC buttons located on  
the instrument panel, to the  
left of the steering wheel.  
V Set/Reset: Press this button to reset certain DIC  
features and to acknowledge DIC warning messages  
and clear them from the DIC display.  
yz Menu Up/Down: Press this button to scroll up  
and down the menu items.  
Trip/Fuel Display Menu Items  
3 (Trip/Fuel): The following display menu items  
3 Trip/Fuel: Press this button to scroll through the  
trip and fuel displays. See “Trip/Fuel Display Menu  
Items” following for more information on these displays.  
can be displayed by pressing the trip/fuel button:  
TRIP A or TRIP B  
These displays show the current distance traveled since  
the last reset for each trip odometer in either miles (mi)  
or kilometers (km). Both odometers can be used at  
the same time. Each trip odometer can be reset to zero  
separately by pressing and holding the set/reset  
button for a few seconds while the desired trip odometer  
is displayed.  
T Vehicle Information: Press this button to scroll  
through the vehicle information displays. See “Vehicle  
Information Display Menu Items” following for more  
information on these displays.  
3-72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FUEL RANGE  
INST (Instantaneous) ECONOMY (IFE)  
This display shows the approximate number of  
remaining miles (mi) or kilometers (km) you can drive  
without refilling your fuel tank. This estimate is based on  
the current driving conditions and will change if the  
driving conditions change. For example, if you are  
driving in traffic and making frequent stops, the display  
may read one number, but if you enter the freeway,  
the number may change even though you still have the  
same amount of fuel in the fuel tank. This is because  
different driving conditions produce different fuel  
economies. Generally, freeway driving produces better  
fuel economy than city driving.  
This display shows the current fuel economy  
in either miles per gallon (mpg) or liters per  
100 kilometers (L/100 km). This number reflects only  
the fuel economy that the vehicle has right now and  
will change frequently as driving conditions change.  
Unlike average economy, this display cannot be reset.  
FUEL USED  
This display shows the number of gallons (gal) or  
liters (L) of fuel used since the last reset of this display.  
To reset this display, press the set/reset button. The  
display will return to zero.  
Once the range drops below approximately  
40 miles (64 km) remaining, the display will  
show FUEL RANGE LOW.  
TIMER ON/OFF  
This display can be used like a stopwatch. You can  
record the time it takes to travel from one point to  
another. To access the timer, press the trip/fuel button  
until 00:00:00 TIMER OFF displays.  
If your vehicle is low on fuel, the FUEL LEVEL  
LOW message will be displayed. See “FUEL LEVEL  
LOW” under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-76  
for more information.  
To turn on the timer, press the set/reset button until  
TIMER ON displays. The timer will then start.  
AVERAGE ECONOMY (AFE)  
To turn off the timer, press the set/reset button again  
until TIMER OFF displays. The timer will stop and  
display the end timing value.  
This display shows the approximate average miles per  
gallon (mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km).  
This number is calculated based on the number  
of mpg (L/100 km) recorded since the last time this  
display was reset. To reset this display, press the  
set/reset button. The display will return to zero.  
To reset the timer, press and hold the set/reset button  
after the timer has been stopped. The display will return  
to zero.  
3-73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AVERAGE SPEED  
Vehicle Information Display Menu Items  
This display shows the average speed of the vehicle in  
either miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per  
hour (km/h). This average is calculated based on the  
various vehicle speeds recorded since the last reset of  
this display. To reset this display, press the set/reset  
button. The display will return to zero.  
T (Vehicle Information): The following display  
menu items can be displayed by pressing the vehicle  
information button:  
OIL LIFE REMAINING  
If the vehicle has this display, it shows the estimated oil  
life remaining. If you see 99% OIL LIFE REMAINING  
on the display, that means that 99% of the current oil  
life remains.  
BATTERY VOLTAGE  
This display shows the current battery voltage. If the  
voltage is in the normal range, the value will display. For  
example, the display may read BATTERY VOLTAGE  
13.2 VOLTS. If the voltage is low, the display will show  
LOW. If the voltage is high, the display will show  
HIGH. Your vehicle’s charging system regulates voltage  
based on the state of the battery. The battery voltage  
may fluctuate when viewing this information on the DIC.  
This is normal. See Charging System Light on  
When the oil life is depleted, the CHANGE ENGINE OIL  
SOON message will appear on the display. You  
should change your oil as soon as possible. In addition  
to the engine oil life system monitoring the oil life,  
additional maintenance is recommended in the  
Maintenance Schedule in this manual. See Scheduled  
Maintenance on page 6-4 and Engine Oil on page 5-13.  
page 3-61 for more information.  
Remember, you must reset the OIL LIFE yourself  
after each oil change. It will not reset itself. Also, be  
careful not to reset the OIL LIFE accidentally at any time  
other than when the oil has just been changed. It  
cannot be reset accurately until the next oil change.  
To reset the engine oil life system, See Engine Oil Life  
System on page 5-16. The display will show 100%  
when the system is reset.  
If there is a problem with the battery charging system,  
the DIC will display a message. See DIC Warnings  
and Messages on page 3-76 for more information.  
Blank Display  
This display shows no information.  
3-74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UNITS  
FRONT TIRES or REAR TIRES  
This display allows you to select between English or  
Metric units of measurement. Once in this display, press  
the set/reset button to select between ENGLISH or  
METRIC units.  
If your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)  
system, the pressure for each tire can be viewed in the  
DIC. The tire pressure will be shown in either pounds  
per square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa). Press  
the vehicle information button until the DIC shows  
the tire pressure for the front tires. Press the vehicle  
information button again to view the pressure for  
the rear tires.  
PARKING ASSIST  
If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Front and Rear  
Parking Assist (UFRPA) system, this display allows the  
system to be turned on or off. Once in this display,  
press the set/reset button to select between ON or OFF.  
If you choose ON, the system will be turned on. If you  
choose OFF, the system will be turned off. The  
UFRPA system automatically turns back on after each  
vehicle start. When the UFRPA system is turned off and  
the vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P), the DIC will  
display the PARKING ASSIST OFF message as  
a reminder that the system has been turned off. See  
DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-76 and  
page 3-38 for more information.  
If a low or high tire pressure condition is detected by  
the system while driving, a message advising you  
to check the pressure in a specific tire will appear in  
the display. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-56  
and DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-76 for  
more information.  
RELEARN TIRE POSITIONS  
If your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)  
system, after rotating the tires or after replacing a tire or  
sensor, the system must re-learn the tire positions.  
To re-learn the tire positions, see Tire Pressure Monitor  
on page 3-76 for more information.  
3-75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RELEARN REMOTE KEY  
DIC Warnings and Messages  
This display allows you to match the remote keyless  
entry transmitter to your vehicle. To match a remote  
keyless entry transmitter to your vehicle, do the  
following:  
These messages will appear if there is a problem  
detected in one of your vehicle’s systems.  
You must acknowledge a message to clear it from the  
screen for further use. To clear a message, press  
the set/reset button.  
1. Press the vehicle information button until RELEARN  
REMOTE KEY displays.  
Be sure to take any message that appears on the  
screen seriously and remember that clearing the  
message will only make the message disappear,  
not the problem.  
2. Press the set/reset button.  
The message REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVE  
will display.  
3. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttons on the  
first transmitter at the same time for approximately  
15 seconds.  
AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROL OFF  
This message will display when the automatic  
headlamps are turned off. See Exterior Lamps on  
page 3-30 for more information.  
A chime will sound indicating that the transmitter  
is matched.  
4. To match additional transmitters at this time,  
repeat Step 3.  
AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROL ON  
This message will display when the automatic  
headlamps are turned on. See Exterior Lamps on  
page 3-30 for more information.  
Each vehicle can have a maximum of  
eight transmitters matched to it.  
5. To exit the programming mode, you must cycle the  
key to OFF.  
Blank Display  
This display shows no information.  
3-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE  
CHECK TIRE PRESSURE  
This message will display when the system detects that  
the battery voltage is dropping beyond a reasonable  
level. The battery saver system will start reducing certain  
features of the vehicle that you may not be able to  
notice. At the point that the features are disabled, this  
message is displayed. It means that the vehicle is trying  
to save the charge in the battery.  
This symbol appears with  
this message.  
Turn off all unnecessary accessories to allow the battery  
to recharge.  
If your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)  
system, this message will display when the tire pressure  
in one of the tires needs to be checked. This message will  
also display LEFT FRONT, RIGHT FRONT, LEFT REAR,  
or RIGHT REAR to indicate which tire needs to be  
checked. You can receive more than one tire pressure  
message at a time. To read the other messages that may  
have been sent at the same time, press the set/reset  
button. If a tire pressure message appears on the DIC,  
stop as soon as you can. Have the tire pressures  
checked and set to those shown on your Tire Loading  
Information Label. See Tires on page 5-49, Loading Your  
page 5-56. The DIC display also shows the tire pressure  
values for the front and rear tires by pressing the vehicle  
information button. See DIC Controls and Displays on  
page 3-72. If the tire pressure is low, the low tire pressure  
warning light will come on. See Low Tire Pressure  
Warning Light on page 3-63.  
The normal battery voltage range is 11.5 to 15.5 volts.  
You can monitor battery voltage on the Driver  
Information Center (DIC) by pressing the trip/fuel button  
until BATTERY VOLTAGE is displayed.  
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON  
When this message displays, it means that service is  
required for your vehicle. See your GM dealer. See  
on page 6-4 for more information.  
When you reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON  
message by clearing it from the display, you still must  
reset the engine oil life system separately. For more  
information on resetting the engine oil life system, see  
Engine Oil Life System on page 5-16.  
3-77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CLEAN RADAR  
DRIVER DOOR OPEN  
When this message displays, it means that the Adaptive  
Cruise Control (ACC) system and the Forward Collision  
Alert (FCA) system are disabled because the radar  
is blocked and cannot detect vehicles in your path. It  
may also activate during heavy rain or due to road  
spray. To clean the system, see “Cleaning the System”  
under Adaptive Cruise Control on page 3-19.  
This symbol appears with  
this message.  
CRUISE SET TO XXX MPH (km/h)  
This message will display when the driver’s door is not  
closed completely. You should make sure that the  
driver’s door is closed completely.  
This message will display whenever the cruise control is  
set. See Cruise Control on page 3-16 and Adaptive  
Cruise Control on page 3-19 for more information.  
If your vehicle has Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC), after  
a few seconds, this message will clear and the  
message “SET SPD XX” will display at the bottom of the  
DIC. See “SET SPD (Speed)” later in this section.  
ENGINE HOT – A/C  
(Air Conditioning) OFF  
This message will display when the engine coolant  
becomes hotter than the normal operating temperature.  
To avoid added strain on a hot engine, the air  
conditioning compressor automatically turns off. When  
the coolant temperature returns to normal, the air  
conditioning compressor will turn back on. You can  
continue to drive your vehicle.  
If this message continues to appear, have the system  
repaired by your GM dealer as soon as possible to avoid  
damage to your engine.  
3-78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGINE OIL LOW ADD OIL  
ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE  
This message will display when the oil level is low. See  
Engine Oil on page 5-13 for more information on  
checking your engine oil.  
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine  
is overheating, severe engine damage may occur. If  
an overheat warning appears on the instrument  
panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon  
as possible. Do not increase the engine speed above  
normal idling speed. See Engine Overheating on  
page 5-25 for more information.  
ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE  
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine is  
overheating, severe engine damage may occur. If  
an overheat warning appears on the instrument  
panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon  
as possible. Do not increase the engine speed above  
normal idling speed. See Engine Overheating on  
page 5-25 for more information.  
This message will display when the engine has  
overheated. Immediately look for a safe place to pull  
your vehicle over and turn the engine off right away to  
avoid severe engine damage. See Engine Overheating  
Operating Mode on page 5-27. A chime will also sound  
when this message is displayed.  
This message will display when the engine coolant  
temperature is too hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to idle  
until it cools down. See Engine Coolant Temperature  
Warning Light on page 3-65.  
ENGINE POWER REDUCED  
This message will display when the engine power is  
being reduced to protect the engine from damage. There  
could be several malfunctions that might cause this  
message. Have your vehicle serviced by your GM dealer  
as soon as possible.  
page 5-27 for information on driving to a safe place  
in an emergency.  
3-79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FOLLOWING GAP  
FUEL LEVEL LOW  
This symbol appears with  
this message.  
This symbol appears with this message.  
This message will display when your vehicle is low on  
fuel. You should refill the fuel tank as soon as possible.  
A single chime will sound when this message is  
displayed. See Filling the Tank on page 5-8.  
If your vehicle has Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC), this  
message will display to show the follow distance  
that has been set. There are six follow distances to  
choose from. Each follow distance is shown on the DIC  
by displaying from one to six bars between two car  
symbols. See Adaptive Cruise Control on page 3-19 for  
more information.  
HEATED WASHER FLUID SYSTEM OFF  
This message will display when you manually turn off  
the heated washer fluid system or when the system  
automatically turns off. See “Heated Washer Fluid”  
under Windshield Washer on page 3-15 for more  
information.  
3-80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
HEATING WASH (Washer) FLUID  
WASH (Washer) WIPES PENDING  
LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN  
This symbol appears with  
This message will display when you turn on the heated  
washer fluid system. See “Heated Washer Fluid”  
under Windshield Washer on page 3-15 for more  
information.  
this message.  
HOOD OPEN  
This symbol appears with  
this message.  
This message will display when the driver’s side rear  
door is not closed completely. You should make  
sure that the door is closed completely.  
NO CRUISE BRAKING GAS  
PEDAL APPLIED  
This message will display when the Adaptive Cruise  
Control (ACC) is engaged and you are pressing  
the accelerator pedal enough to disable ACC automatic  
braking. See Adaptive Cruise Control on page 3-19  
for more information.  
This message will display when the hood is not closed  
completely. You should make sure that the hood is  
completely closed.  
ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE WITH CARE  
This message will display when the outside temperature  
is cold enough to create icy road conditions.  
3-81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE  
PASSENGER DOOR OPEN  
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine  
oil pressure is low, severe engine damage may  
occur. If a low oil pressure warning appears on the  
instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the  
vehicle as soon as possible. Do not drive the vehicle  
until the cause of the low oil pressure is corrected.  
See Engine Oil on page 5-13 for more information.  
This symbol appears with  
this message.  
A multiple chime will sound when this message is  
displayed. See Engine Oil on page 5-13 for more  
information.  
This message will display when the passenger’s side  
front door is not closed completely. You should  
make sure that the door is closed completely.  
PARKING ASSIST OFF  
If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Front and Rear  
Parking Assist (UFRPA) system, after the vehicle is  
shifted out of PARK (P), this message will display  
to remind the driver that the UFRPA system has been  
turned off. Press the set/reset button to acknowledge  
this message and clear it from the DIC display. To turn  
the UFRPA system back on, see “PARKING ASSIST”  
under DIC Controls and Displays on page 3-72.  
on page 3-38 for more information.  
RADAR CRUISE NOT READY  
This message will display when the Adaptive Cruise  
Control (ACC) system will not activate due to a  
temporary condition. Your vehicle does not require  
service. If this message appears when you attempt to  
activate the system, continue driving for several minutes  
and then try activating the system again. See Adaptive  
Cruise Control on page 3-19 for more information.  
RAINSENSE WIPERS ACTIVE  
If your vehicle has Rainsense™ II wipers, this message  
will display while this feature is active. See Rainsense™  
II Wipers on page 3-14 for more information.  
3-82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVE  
SERVICE AIR BAG  
This message will display while you are matching a  
remote keyless entry transmitter to your vehicle.  
See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle” under  
and DIC Controls and Displays on page 3-72 for  
more information.  
This message will display when there is a problem with  
the airbag system. Have your vehicle serviced by  
your GM dealer immediately. See Airbag Readiness  
Light on page 3-58 for more information.  
SERVICE A/C SYSTEM  
This message will display when the air delivery mode  
door or the electronic sensors that control the air  
conditioning and heating systems are no longer working.  
Have the climate control system serviced by your  
GM dealer if you notice a drop in heating and air  
conditioning efficiency.  
REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY  
This message will display when the battery in your  
remote keyless entry transmitter needs to be replaced.  
To replace the battery, see “Battery Replacement”  
on page 2-5.  
SERVICE BATTERY CHARGING  
SYSTEM  
RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN  
This message will display when a problem with the  
charging system has been detected. The charging  
system light will also be displayed on the instrument  
panel cluster. See Charging System Light on page 3-61  
for more information. Have your vehicle serviced by  
your GM dealer.  
This symbol appears with  
this message.  
This message will display when the passenger’s side  
rear door is not closed completely. You should check to  
make sure that the door is closed completely.  
3-83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SERVICE BRAKE ASSIST  
SERVICE PARKING ASSIST  
This message will display if there is a problem with the  
brake system. The brake system warning light and  
the anti-lock brake system warning light may also be  
displayed on the instrument panel cluster. See  
Brake System Warning Light on page 3-62 and  
more information. If this happens, stop as soon as  
possible and turn off the vehicle. Restart the vehicle and  
check for the message on the DIC display. If the  
message is displayed or appears again when you begin  
driving, the brake system needs service. See your  
GM dealer as soon as possible. See Brakes on  
page 5-35 for more information.  
If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Front and Rear  
Parking Assist (UFRPA) system, this message will  
display if there is a problem with the UFRPA system.  
Do not use this system to help you park. See Ultrasonic  
for more information. See your GM dealer for service.  
SERVICE POWER STEERING  
Your vehicle may have a speed variable assist steering  
system. See Steering on page 4-11.  
This message will display if a problem is detected with  
the speed variable assist steering system. When  
this message is displayed, you may notice that the effort  
required to steer the vehicle decreases or feels lighter,  
but you will still be able to steer the vehicle.  
SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM  
This message will display if the ignition is on to inform  
the driver that the brake fluid level is low. Have the  
brake system serviced by your GM dealer as soon  
as possible.  
SERVICE RADAR CRUISE  
This message will display when the Adaptive Cruise  
Control (ACC) system and the Forward Collision  
Alert (FCA) system are disabled and need service.  
See your GM dealer.  
3-84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SERVICE STABILITRAK  
SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM  
Your vehicle may have a vehicle stability enhancement  
system called StabiliTrak®. See StabiliTrak® System  
on page 4-10.  
This message will display when there is a problem  
with the theft-deterrent system programmed in the key.  
A fault has been detected in the system which means  
that the system is disabled and it is not protecting  
the vehicle. The vehicle usually restarts; however, you  
may want to take the vehicle to your GM dealer  
before turning off the engine. See PASS-Key® III+  
Operation on page 2-21 for more information.  
This message will display if there has been a problem  
detected with the StabiliTrak® system.  
If this message comes on while you are driving, pull off  
the road as soon as possible and stop carefully. Try  
resetting the system by turning the ignition off then back  
on. If this message still stays on or comes back on  
again while you are driving, your vehicle needs service.  
Have the StabiliTrak® system inspected by your  
GM dealer as soon as possible.  
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR SYSTEM  
If your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)  
system, this message will display if a part on the system  
is not working properly. If you drive your vehicle while  
any of the four sensors are missing or inoperable,  
the warning will come on in about 10 minutes. A sensor  
would be missing, for example, if you put different  
wheels on your vehicle without transferring the sensors.  
If the warning comes on and stays on, there may be  
a problem with the TPM. See your GM dealer.  
SERVICE SUSPENSION SYS (System)  
This message will display when the magnetic ride  
control or automatic leveling control system is not  
operating properly. Have your vehicle serviced by  
your GM dealer.  
3-85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL  
SPEED LIMITED TO XXX MPH (km/h)  
This message will display when there is a problem with  
the Traction Control System (TCS). When this  
message is displayed, the system will not limit wheel  
spin. Adjust your driving accordingly. See your  
GM dealer for service. See Traction Control  
This message will display when your vehicle speed is  
limited to 80 mph (128 km/h) because the vehicle  
detects a problem in the speed variable assist steering,  
magnetic ride control, or automatic leveling control  
systems. Have your vehicle serviced by your GM dealer.  
System (TCS) on page 4-9 for more information.  
STABILITRAK NOT READY  
SERVICE TRANSMISSION  
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak®, this message may  
display and the Traction Control System and  
StabiliTrak® Warning Light on the instrument panel  
cluster may be on after first driving the vehicle  
and exceeding 19 mph (30 km/h) for 30 seconds. The  
StabiliTrak® system is not functional until the light  
has turned off. See StabiliTrak® System on page 4-10  
for more information.  
This message will display when there is a problem with  
the vehicle’s transaxle. Have your vehicle serviced  
by your GM dealer.  
SERVICE VEHICLE SOON  
This message will display when a non-emissions related  
malfunction occurs. Have your vehicle serviced by  
your GM dealer as soon as possible.  
STARTING DISABLED SERVICE  
THROTTLE  
SET SPD (Speed)  
This message will display when your vehicle’s throttle  
system is not functioning properly. Have your vehicle  
serviced by your GM dealer.  
If your vehicle has Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC), this  
message will display whenever the cruise control is  
set. First, the “CRUISE SET TO XXX MPH (km/h)”  
message will appear. After a few seconds, the “CRUISE  
SET TO XXX MPH (km/h)” message will clear and  
the message “SET SPD XX” will display at the bottom of  
the DIC. See “CRUISE SET TO XXX MPH (km/h)”  
earlier in this section and Adaptive Cruise Control on  
page 3-19 for more information.  
3-86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
THEFT ATTEMPTED  
TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE  
If your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)  
system, this message will display when the system is  
re-learning the tire positions on your vehicle. See  
Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 5-59. The tire  
positions must be re-learned after rotating the tires  
or after replacing a tire or sensor. See Tire Inspection  
on page 5-56 for more information.  
This symbol appears with  
this message.  
TRACTION CONTROL OFF  
This message will display if the content theft-deterrent  
system has detected a break-in attempt while you  
were away from your vehicle. See Content  
This message will display when the traction control  
system is turned off. Adjust your driving accordingly. See  
Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-9 for more  
information.  
Theft-Deterrent on page 2-19 for more information.  
TIGHTEN GAS CAP  
TRACTION CONTROL ON  
This message will display when the gas cap has not  
been fully tightened. Recheck the gas cap to ensure that  
it is on and tightened properly.  
This message will display when the Traction Control  
System (TCS) is turned on. See Traction Control  
System (TCS) on page 4-9 for more information.  
TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE ENGINE  
This message will display when the transaxle fluid in  
your vehicle is too hot. Stop the vehicle and allow it to  
idle until the transaxle cools down or until this  
message is removed.  
3-87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TRUNK OPEN  
WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID  
This symbol appears with  
this message.  
This symbol appears with  
this message.  
This message will display when the trunk is not closed  
completely. You should make sure that the trunk is  
closed completely.  
This message will display when your vehicle is low on  
windshield washer fluid. You should refill the windshield  
washer fluid reservoir as soon as possible. See  
Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5-34 for more  
information.  
TURN SIGNAL ON  
If you drive your vehicle for more than about  
1 mile (1.6 km) with a turn signal on, this message  
will display as a reminder to turn off the turn signal.  
A multiple chime will sound when this message  
is displayed.  
DIC Vehicle Customization  
Your vehicle has customization capabilities that allow  
you to program certain features to one preferred setting.  
Customization features can only be programmed to  
one setting on the vehicle and cannot be programmed  
to a preferred setting for two different drivers.  
All of the customization options may not be available on  
your vehicle. Only the options available will be  
displayed on your DIC.  
3-88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The customization features were set to the default  
settings when your vehicle left the factory, but they  
may have been changed from their default state since  
that time.  
Feature Settings Menu Items  
The following are customization features that allow you  
to program settings to the vehicle:  
The customization preferences are automatically  
recalled.  
DISPLAY IN ENGLISH  
This feature will only display if a language other than  
English has been set. This feature allows you to change  
the language in which the DIC messages appear  
back to English.  
To change customization preferences, use the following  
procedure.  
Entering the Feature Settings Menu  
1. Turn the ignition on and place the vehicle in  
PARK (P).  
Press the customization button until the DISPLAY IN  
ENGLISH screen appears on the DIC display. Press the  
set/reset button to select English as the language in  
which all DIC messages will appear.  
2. Press the customization button until the FEATURE  
SETTINGS screen displays.  
DISPLAY LANGUAGE  
If the vehicle is not in PARK (P), FEATURE  
SETTINGS AVAILABLE IN PARK will display.  
This feature allows you to select the language in which  
the DIC messages will appear.  
3. Press the set/reset button to enter the FEATURE  
SETTINGS menu.  
Press the customization button until the DISPLAY  
LANGUAGE screen appears on the DIC display. Press  
the set/reset button to access the settings for this  
feature. Then press the menu up/down button to scroll  
through the following settings:  
ENGLISH (default): All messages will appear  
in English.  
DEUTSCH (German): All messages will appear  
in German.  
3-89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FRANCAIS (French): All messages will appear  
in French.  
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.  
The current setting will remain.  
Choose one of the available settings and press the  
set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to  
select it.  
ESPANOL (Spanish): All messages will appear  
in Spanish.  
JAPANESE: All messages will appear in Japanese.  
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK  
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.  
The current setting will remain.  
This feature allows you to select whether or not the  
door(s) will automatically unlock. It also allows you to  
select which doors and when they will automatically  
page 2-11 for more information.  
Choose one of the available settings and press the  
set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to  
select it.  
AUTO DOOR LOCK  
Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR  
UNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the  
set/reset button to access the settings for this feature.  
Then press the menu up/down button to scroll through  
the following settings:  
This feature allows you to select when the vehicle’s  
doors will automatically lock. See Programmable  
Automatic Door Locks on page 2-11 for more  
information.  
Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR  
LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset  
button to access the settings for this feature. Then  
press the menu up/down button to scroll through the  
following settings:  
OFF: None of the doors will automatically unlock.  
DRIVER AT KEY OUT: Only the driver’s door will  
unlock when the key is taken out of the ignition.  
DRIVER IN PARK: Only the driver’s door will unlock  
when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).  
SHIFT OUT OF PARK (default): The vehicle’s doors  
automatically lock when the doors are closed and  
the vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P).  
AT VEHICLE SPEED: The vehicle’s doors automatically  
lock when the vehicle speed is above 5 mph (8 km/h)  
for three seconds.  
3-90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doors will unlock when  
the key is taken out of the ignition.  
LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lamps will flash when you  
press the lock button on the remote keyless entry  
transmitter.  
ALL IN PARK (default): All of the doors will unlock  
when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).  
HORN ONLY: The horn will sound when you press the  
lock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter.  
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.  
The current setting will remain.  
HORN & LIGHTS (default): The exterior lamps  
will flash when you press the lock button on the remote  
keyless entry transmitter, and the horn will sound  
when the lock button is pressed again within  
five seconds of the previous command.  
Choose one of the available settings and press the  
set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to  
select it.  
REMOTE DOOR LOCK  
This feature allows you to select the type of feedback  
you will receive when locking the vehicle with the remote  
keyless entry transmitter. You will not receive feedback  
when locking the vehicle with the remote keyless  
entry transmitter if the doors are open. See Remote  
Keyless Entry System Operation on page 2-5 for more  
information.  
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.  
The current setting will remain.  
Choose one of the available settings and press the  
set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to  
select it.  
REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK  
Press the customization button until REMOTE DOOR  
LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset  
button to access the settings for this feature. Then  
press the menu up/down button to scroll through the  
following settings:  
This feature allows you to select the type of feedback  
you will receive when unlocking the vehicle with  
the remote keyless entry transmitter. You will not receive  
feedback when unlocking the vehicle with the remote  
keyless entry transmitter if the doors are open. See  
for more information.  
OFF: There will be no feedback when you press the  
lock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter.  
3-91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Press the customization button until REMOTE DOOR  
UNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the  
set/reset button to access the settings for this feature.  
Then press the menu up/down button to scroll through  
the following settings:  
Press the customization button until DELAY DOOR  
LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset  
button to access the settings for this feature. Then  
press the menu up/down button to scroll through the  
following settings:  
LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lamps will not flash when  
you press the unlock button on the remote keyless entry  
transmitter.  
OFF: There will be no delayed locking of the  
vehicle’s doors.  
ON (default): The locking of the vehicle’s doors will be  
delayed by 10 seconds after a power door lock switch  
is pressed when a door is open, or the lock button  
on the remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed while  
a door is open.  
LIGHTS ON (default): The exterior lamps will flash  
when you press the unlock button on the remote keyless  
entry transmitter.  
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.  
The current setting will remain.  
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.  
The current setting will remain.  
Choose one of the available settings and press the  
set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to  
select it.  
Choose one of the available settings and press the  
set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to  
select it.  
DELAY DOOR LOCK  
EXIT LIGHTING  
This feature allows you to select whether or not the  
locking of the vehicle’s doors will be delayed. The  
locking of the vehicle’s doors is delayed for up to  
10 seconds after a power door lock switch is pressed  
when a door is open, or after the lock button on  
the remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed while a  
door is open. The key must be out of the ignition for  
this feature to work.  
If it is dark enough outside, this feature allows you to  
select the amount of time you want the exterior lamps to  
remain on. This happens after the vehicle is unlocked  
using the remote keyless entry transmitter or if the  
vehicle key is turned to OFF from RUN.  
3-92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Press the customization button until EXIT LIGHTING  
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button to  
access the settings for this feature. Then press the  
menu up/down button to scroll through the following  
settings:  
Press the customization button until APPROACH  
LIGHTING appears on the DIC display. Press the  
set/reset button to access the settings for this feature.  
Then press the menu up/down button to scroll through  
the following settings:  
OFF: The exterior lamps will not turn on.  
OFF: The exterior lights will not turn on when you  
unlock the vehicle with the remote keyless entry  
transmitter.  
30 SECONDS (default): The exterior lamps will stay on  
for 30 seconds.  
ON (default): If it is dark enough outside, the exterior  
lights will turn on briefly when you unlock the vehicle  
with the remote keyless entry transmitter.  
1 MINUTE: The exterior lamps will stay on for  
one minute.  
2 MINUTES: The exterior lamps will stay on for  
two minutes.  
The lights will remain on for 20 seconds or until the lock  
button on the remote keyless entry transmitter is  
pressed, or the vehicle is no longer off. See Remote  
Keyless Entry System Operation on page 2-5 for more  
information.  
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.  
The current setting will remain.  
Choose one of the available settings and press the  
set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to  
select it.  
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.  
The current setting will remain.  
Choose one of the available settings and press the  
set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to  
select it.  
APPROACH LIGHTING  
This feature allows you to select whether or not to have  
the exterior lights turn on briefly during low light  
periods after unlocking the vehicle using the remote  
keyless entry transmitter.  
3-93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AUTO (Automatic) HIGH BEAMS  
CHIME VOLUME  
If the vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select to  
have the Intellibeam™ system turned off or on. See  
Exterior Lamps on page 3-30 for more information.  
This feature allows you to select the volume level of  
the chime.  
Press the customization button until CHIME VOLUME  
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button to  
access the settings for this feature. Then press the  
menu up/down button to scroll through the following  
settings:  
Press the customization button until AUTO HIGH  
BEAMS appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset  
button to access the settings for this feature. Then  
press the menu up/down button to scroll through the  
following settings:  
NORMAL (default): The chime volume will be set to a  
OFF: The Intellibeam™ system will be turned off.  
normal level.  
ON (default): The Intellibeam™ system will be  
LOUD: The chime volume will be set to a loud level.  
turned on.  
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.  
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.  
The current setting will remain.  
The current setting will remain.  
Choose one of the available settings and press the  
set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to  
select it.  
Choose one of the available settings and press the  
set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to  
select it.  
3-94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PARK TILT MIRRORS  
EASY EXIT SEAT  
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select  
whether or not the outside mirror(s) will automatically tilt  
down when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE (R).  
for more information.  
If the vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select  
your preference for the easy exit seat feature. See  
for more information.  
Press the customization button until EASY EXIT SEAT  
appears in the display. Press the set/reset button to  
access the settings for this feature. Then press the menu  
up/down button to scroll through the following settings:  
Press the customization button until PARK TILT  
MIRRORS appears on the DIC display. Press the  
set/reset button to access the settings for this feature.  
Then press the menu up/down button to scroll through  
the following settings:  
OFF (default): No seat exit recall will occur.  
ON: The driver’s seat will move back, and if the vehicle  
has the power tilt wheel and telescopic steering  
feature, the power steering column will move up and  
forward when the key is removed from the ignition.  
OFF (default): Neither outside mirror will be tilted down  
when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE (R).  
DRIVER MIRROR: The driver’s outside mirror will be  
tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into  
REVERSE (R).  
The automatic easy exit seat movement will only occur  
one time after the key is removed from the ignition.  
If the automatic movement has already occurred, and  
you put the key back in the ignition and remove it again,  
the seat and steering column will stay in the original  
exit position, unless a memory recall took place prior to  
removing the key again.  
PASSENGER MIRROR: The passenger’s outside  
mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into  
REVERSE (R).  
BOTH MIRRORS: The driver’s and passenger’s outside  
mirrors will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted  
into REVERSE (R).  
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.  
The current setting will remain.  
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.  
The current setting will remain.  
Choose one of the available settings and press the  
set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to  
select it.  
Choose one of the available settings and press the  
set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to  
select it.  
3-95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Press the customization button until REMOTE START  
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button  
to access the settings for this feature. Then press  
the menu up/down button to scroll through the  
following settings:  
MEMORY SEAT RECALL  
If the vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select  
your preference for the memory seat recall feature. See  
page 2-51 for more information.  
OFF: The remote start feature will be disabled.  
Press the customization button until MEMORY SEAT  
RECALL appears in the display. Press the set/reset  
button to access the settings for this feature. Then  
press the menu up/down button to scroll through the  
following settings:  
ON (default): The remote start feature will be enabled.  
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this  
feature. The current setting will remain.  
Choose one of the available settings and press the  
set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to  
select it.  
OFF (default): No memory seat recall will occur.  
ON: The driver’s seat will automatically move to the  
stored driving position when the unlock button on  
the remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed.  
FACTORY SETTINGS  
This feature allows you to set all of the customization  
features back to their factory default settings.  
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.  
Press the customization button until FACTORY  
SETTINGS appears on the DIC display. Press the  
set/reset button to access the settings for this feature.  
Then press the menu up/down button to scroll through  
the following settings:  
The current setting will remain.  
Choose one of the available settings and press the  
set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to  
select it.  
REMOTE START  
RESTORE ALL (default): The customization features  
If the vehicle has this feature, it allows you to turn the  
remote start feature off or on. The remote start feature  
allows you to start the engine from outside of the vehicle  
using your remote keyless entry transmitter. See  
“Remote Vehicle Start” under Remote Keyless Entry  
System Operation on page 2-5 for more information.  
will be set to their factory default settings.  
DO NOT RESTORE: The customization features will  
not be set to their factory default settings.  
Choose one of the available settings and press the  
set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to  
select it.  
3-96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Exiting the Feature Settings Menu  
The feature settings menu will be exited when any of  
the following occurs:  
{CAUTION:  
The vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P).  
The ignition is no longer in RUN.  
This system provides you with a far greater  
access to audio stations and song listings.  
Giving extended attention to entertainment  
tasks while driving can cause a crash and you  
or others can be injured or killed. Always keep  
your eyes on the road and your mind on the  
drive — avoid engaging in extended searching  
while driving.  
The trip/fuel or vehicle information DIC buttons are  
pressed.  
The end of the feature settings menu is reached.  
A 40 second time period has elapsed with no  
selection made.  
Audio System(s)  
Determine which radio your vehicle has and then read  
the pages following to familiarize yourself with its  
features.  
Keeping your mind on the drive is important for safe  
driving. For more information, see Defensive Driving on  
page 4-2. Get familiar with your vehicle’s audio  
system so you can use it with less effort and take full  
advantage of its features.  
Driving without distraction is a necessity for a safer  
driving experience. See Defensive Driving on page 4-2.  
By taking a few moments to read this manual and  
get familiar with your vehicle’s audio system, you can  
use it with less effort, as well as take advantage of  
its features. While your vehicle is parked, set up your  
audio system by presetting your favorite radio stations,  
setting the tone and adjusting the speakers. Then,  
when driving conditions permit, you can tune to your  
favorite stations using the presets and steering  
wheel controls (if equipped).  
3-97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Here are some ways in which you can help avoid  
distraction while driving.  
Notice: The chime signals related to safety belts,  
parking brake, and other functions of your vehicle  
operate through the GM radio/entertainment system.  
If that equipment is replaced or additional  
equipment is added to your vehicle, the chimes may  
not work. Make sure that replacement or additional  
equipment is compatible with your vehicle before  
installing it. See Accessories and Modifications on  
page 5-3.  
While your vehicle is parked:  
Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.  
Familiarize yourself with its operation.  
Set up your audio system by presetting your  
favorite radio stations, setting the tone, and  
adjusting the speakers. Then, when driving  
conditions permit, you can tune to your favorite  
radio stations using the presets and steering wheel  
controls (if equipped).  
Your vehicle has a feature called Retained Accessory  
Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio system can be  
played even after the ignition is turned off. See Retained  
Accessory Power (RAP) on page 2-24 for more  
information.  
Notice: Before adding any sound equipment to  
your vehicle, such as an audio system, CD player,  
CB radio, mobile telephone, or two-way radio, make  
sure that it can be added by checking with your  
dealer. Also, check federal rules covering mobile  
radio and telephone units. If sound equipment can  
be added, it is very important to do it properly.  
Added sound equipment may interfere with  
the operation of your vehicle’s engine, radio, or  
other systems, and even damage them. Your  
vehicle’s systems may interfere with the operation  
of sound equipment that has been added.  
Setting the Time (Radio with Single  
CD Player)  
Enabling the Digital Radio Clock  
Your vehicle has an analog clock as well as the digital  
radio clock. At the time of new vehicle delivery, the  
digital radio clock display should be disabled. If  
you decide to use the digital radio clock as well as the  
analog clock, you can change the setting to enable  
the radio clock display.  
3-98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Turn the radio clock display on or off by following  
these steps:  
Setting the Time and Date on the Digital  
Radio Clock  
1. Press the clock button until the clock and date  
setting menus appear.  
If your vehicle has a radio with a single CD player, it  
has a clock button for setting the time and date. To set  
the time and date, do the following:  
2. Press the pushbutton located under the forward  
arrow label until the menu for default clock and  
date settings appear.  
1. Press the clock button and HR, MIN, MM, DD,  
YYYY (hour, minute, month, day, and year) will  
appear on the display.  
3. Press the pushbutton located under the currently  
displayed status of either ON or OFF. The ON  
display indicates the radio clock display is disabled  
and the OFF display indicates the radio clock  
display is enabled. Press this pushbutton to toggle  
the radio clock display on or off.  
2. Press the pushbutton located under each one of  
the labels that you want to change. Every time the  
pushbutton is pressed again, the time or the  
date if selected, will increase by one.  
Another way to increase the time or date, is to  
press the right SEEK arrow or the FWD button.  
If the radio clock display is turned on, the screen  
will display Radio Clock ON for five seconds,  
then return to the original clock display menu.  
3. To decrease the time or date, press the left SEEK  
arrow or the REV button. You can also rotate the  
tune knob to adjust the selected setting.  
If the radio clock display is turned off, the screen  
will display Radio Clock OFF for five seconds. The  
menus for clock and date settings will be removed,  
and the ON display will appear as a current  
status indicating that the clock display can be turned  
on, if desired.  
The radio clock and analog clock are not synchronized.  
Occasionally you may need to set the digital radio  
clock using the procedure below to synchronize  
both clocks.  
3-99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Turn the radio clock display on or off by following  
these steps:  
1. Press the MENU button until the clock label  
display appears.  
2. Press the pushbutton located under the clock label  
until the clock and date settings appear.  
3. Press the pushbutton located under the forward  
arrow label until the menu for default clock and  
date settings appear.  
4. Press the pushbutton located under the currently  
displayed status of either ON or OFF. The ON  
display indicates the radio clock display is disabled  
and the OFF display indicates the radio clock  
display is enabled. Press this pushbutton to toggle  
the radio clock display on or off.  
Changing the Time and Date Default  
Setting  
To change the time and date default setting, do the  
following:  
1. Change the time default setting from 12 hour to  
24 hour or the date default setting from month/day/  
year to day/month/year, by pressing the clock button.  
2. Once the clock and date settings are displayed  
along with the forward arrow, press the pushbutton  
located under the forward arrow until the time  
12H and 24H, and the date MM/DD/YYYY (month,  
day, and year) and DD/MM/YYYY (day, month,  
and year) are displayed.  
3. Press the pushbutton located under the desired  
option, then press the clock button again to apply  
the selected default, or let the screen time out.  
If the radio clock display is turned on, the screen  
will display Radio Clock ON for five seconds,  
then return to the original clock display menu.  
If the radio clock display is turned off, the screen  
will display Radio Clock OFF for five seconds. The  
menus for clock and date settings will be removed,  
and the ON display will appear as a current  
status indicating that the clock display can be turned  
on, if desired.  
Setting the Time (Radio with  
Six-Disc CD Player)  
Enabling the Digital Radio Clock  
Your vehicle has an analog clock as well as the digital  
radio clock. At the time of new vehicle delivery, the  
digital radio clock display should be disabled. If  
you decide to use the digital radio clock as well as the  
analog clock, you can change the setting to enable  
the radio clock display.  
The radio clock and analog clock are not synchronized.  
Occasionally you may need to set the digital radio  
clock using the procedure below to synchronize  
both clocks.  
3-100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting the Time and Date on the Digital  
Radio Clock  
Changing the Time and Date  
Default Setting  
If your vehicle has a radio with a six-disc CD player, it  
has a MENU button for setting the time and date. To set  
the time and date, do the following:  
To change the time and date default setting, do the  
following:  
1. Change the time default setting from 12 hour to  
24 hour or the date default setting from month/day/  
year to day/month/year, by pressing the MENU  
button.  
1. Press the MENU button until the clock option is  
displayed.  
2. Press the pushbutton located under the clock label  
and the HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY (hour, minute,  
month, day, and year) will appear on the display.  
2. Once the clock symbol is displayed, press the  
pushbutton located under that symbol until the  
time and date settings are displayed along with a  
forward arrow.  
3. Press the pushbutton located under each one of  
the labels that you want to change. Every time the  
pushbutton is pressed again, the time or the  
date if selected, will increase by one.  
3. Press the pushbutton located under the forward  
arrow until the time 12H and 24H, and the date  
MM/DD/YYYY (month, day, and year) and  
Another way to increase the time or date, is to  
press the right SEEK arrow or the FWD button.  
DD/MM/YYYY (day, month, and year) are displayed.  
4. Press the pushbutton located under the desired  
option, then press the MENU button again to  
apply the selected default, or let the screen  
time out.  
4. To decrease the time or date, press the left SEEK  
arrow or the REV button. You can also rotate the  
tune knob to adjust the selected setting.  
3-101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
While the radio is tuned to an FM-RDS station, the  
station name or call letters will appear on the display. In  
rare cases, a radio station may broadcast incorrect  
information that will cause the radio features to work  
improperly. If this happens, contact the radio station.  
Radio with CD (MP3)  
XM™ Satellite Radio Service  
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the 48  
contiguous United States and in Canada (if available).  
XM™ offers over 100 coast-to-coast channels including  
music, news, sports, talk, traffic/weather, and children’s  
programming. XM™ provides digital quality audio  
and text information that includes song title and artist  
name. A service fee is required in order to receive  
the XM™ service. For more information, contact XM™  
at www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).  
Radio with CD shown, Radio with Six-Disc CD (MP3)  
similar  
Radio Data System (RDS)  
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS). The  
RDS feature is available for use only on FM stations  
that broadcast RDS information. This system relies upon  
receiving specific information from these stations and  
will only work when the information is available.  
3-102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AudioPilot®: If your vehicle is equipped with Bose®  
Premium audio, the system will have AudioPilot® noise  
compensation technology.  
To use AudioPilot® press the Automatic Volume Control  
screen button to access the AudioPilot® menu and  
then press the ON screen button. AudioPilot®  
Playing the Radio  
O (Power/Volume): Press this knob to turn the  
system on and off.  
Turn this knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise  
to decrease the volume.  
automatically adjusts the volume level of the audio so  
that it always sounds the same to you. The feature  
is most effective at lower volume settings where  
background noise may be louder than the audio. At high  
volume settings there may be little or no change in  
the audio level. In some cases where the noise level  
changes quickly, you may hear the audio level changing.  
This is normal. For more information on AudioPilot®,  
please visit www.bose.com.  
Speed Compensated Volume (SCV): The radio is also  
equipped with Speed Compensated Volume (SCV).  
When SCV is on, the radio volume automatically adjusts  
to compensate for road and wind noise as you speed  
up or slow down while driving. That way, the volume  
level should sound about the same as you drive.  
To activate SCV:  
1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.  
To activate AudioPilot®, do the following steps:  
1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.  
2. Press the MENU button to display the radio  
setup menu.  
3. Press the pushbutton under the AUTO VOLUM  
label on the radio display.  
2. Press the MENU button to display the radio  
setup menu.  
4. Press the pushbutton under the desired Speed  
Compensated Volume setting (OFF, Low, Med,  
or High) to select the level of radio volume  
compensation. The display will time out after  
approximately 10 seconds. Each higher setting  
allows for more radio volume compensation at faster  
vehicle speeds.  
3. Press the pushbutton located under the AUTO  
VOLUM label on the radio display.  
4. Press the ON or OFF button to turn this feature  
on or off.  
3-103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Finding a Station  
Storing a Radio Station as a Favorite  
Drivers are encouraged to set up their radio station  
favorites while the vehicle is parked. Tune to your  
favorite stations using the presets, favorites button, and  
steering wheel controls (if equipped). See Defensive  
Driving on page 4-2.  
BAND: Press this button to switch between AM, FM, or  
XM™ (if equipped). The display will show the selection.  
a (Tune): Turn this knob to select radio stations.  
© SEEK ¨: Press the right or left SEEK arrow to go  
FAV (Favorites): A maximum of 36 stations can be  
programmed as favorites using the six pushbuttons  
positioned below the radio station frequency labels and  
by using the radio favorites page button (FAV button).  
Press the FAV button to go through up to six pages  
of favorites, each having six favorite stations available  
per page. Each page of favorites can contain any  
combination of AM, FM, or XM™ (if equipped)  
stations. To store a station as a favorite, perform  
the following steps:  
to the next or to the previous station and stay there.  
To scan stations, press and hold either SEEK arrow for  
three seconds until you hear a beep. The radio will go to a  
station, play for a few seconds, then go on to the next  
station. Press either SEEK arrow again to stop scanning.  
The radio will only seek and scan stations with a strong  
signal that are in the selected band.  
4 (Information) (XM™ Satellite Radio Service, MP3,  
and RDS Features): Press the information button  
to display additional text information related to the  
current FM-RDS or XM™ station, or MP3 song. A choice  
of additional information such as: Channel, Song,  
Artist, CAT may appear. Continue pressing the  
information button to highlight the desired label, or press  
the pushbutton positioned under any one of the labels  
and the information about that label will be displayed.  
1. Tune to the desired radio station.  
2. Press the FAV button to display the page where  
you want the station stored.  
3. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons until you  
hear a beep. Whenever that pushbutton is pressed  
and released, the station that was set will return.  
4. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton radio station  
you want stored as a favorite.  
When information is not available, No Info will appear on  
the display.  
3-104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The number of favorites pages can be setup using the  
MENU button. To setup the number of favorites  
pages, perform the following steps:  
Turn the tune knob clockwise or counterclockwise to  
adjust the highlighted setting. You can also adjust  
the highlighted setting by pressing either the SEEK,  
FWD, or REV button until the desired levels are  
obtained. If a station’s frequency is weak, or if there is  
static, decrease the treble.  
1. Press the MENU button to display the radio  
setup menu.  
2. Press the pushbutton located below the  
FAV 1-6 label.  
To quickly adjust bass, midrange, or treble to the middle  
position, press the pushbutton positioned under the  
BASS, MID, or TREB label for more than two seconds.  
You will hear a beep and the level will be adjusted  
to the middle position.  
3. Select the desired number of favorites pages by  
pressing the pushbutton located below the  
displayed page numbers.  
4. Press the FAV button, or let the menu time out, to  
return to the original main radio screen showing the  
radio station frequency labels and to begin the  
process of programming your favorites for the  
chosen amount of numbered pages.  
To quickly adjust all tone and speaker controls to the  
middle position, press the tune knob for more than  
two seconds until you hear a beep.  
EQ (Equalization): For the non-Bose® amplified  
radio, perform the following steps to setup the  
equalization settings:  
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)  
BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, or Treble): To  
adjust bass, midrange, or treble, press the tune  
knob until the tone control labels appear on the display.  
Continue pressing to highlight the desired label, or  
press the pushbutton positioned under the desired label.  
1. Press the Tune knob until the equalization label  
appears on display.  
2. Press the pushbutton located under the equalization  
label to get choices of POP, ROCK, CTRY, TALK,  
JAZZ, and CLAS, to appear on display.  
3. Press the pushbutton located under the  
desired setting.  
3-105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
For the Bose® amplified radio, perform the following  
steps to setup the equalization settings:  
under the desired label. Turn the tune knob clockwise or  
counterclockwise to adjust the highlighted setting. You  
can also adjust the highlighted setting by pressing either  
the SEEK, FWD or REV buttons until the desired  
levels are obtained.  
1. Press the Tune knob until the equalization label  
appears on display.  
2. Press the pushbutton located under the equalization  
label to get choices of Norm, Driv, Rear, and  
Surround, to appear on display.  
To quickly adjust balance or fade to the middle position,  
press the pushbutton positioned under the BAL or  
FADE label for more than two seconds. You will hear a  
beep and the level will be adjusted to the middle  
position.  
Press either fourth or fifth positioned pushbutton  
located under the displayed Surround until  
Centerpoint appears on display.  
To quickly adjust all speaker and tone controls to the  
middle position, press the tune knob for more than  
two seconds until you hear a beep.  
3. Press the pushbutton located under the  
desired setting.  
To return to the manual mode, press the EQ button until  
Manual appears on the display or start to manually adjust  
the bass, midrange, or treble by pressing the tune knob.  
Digital Signal Processing (DSP): This feature is used  
to provide a choice of four different listening  
experiences. DSP can be used while listening to the  
audio system or a CD. To change the DSP mode, press  
the tune knob until the DSP control label appears on  
the display. Press the pushbutton located under the DSP  
label until the control labels appear. Continue by  
pressing the desired button below the control labels on  
the display.  
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)  
BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust balance or  
fade, press the tune knob until the speaker control labels  
appear on the display. Continue pressing to highlight  
the desired label, or press the pushbutton positioned  
3-106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
For more information on the control label displays, see  
the following:  
Finding a Category (CAT) Station  
CAT (Category): The CAT button is used to find XM™  
stations when the radio is in the XM™ mode. To find  
XM™ channels within a desired category, perform  
the following:  
Norm (Normal): Select this screen button to adjust  
the audio for normal mode, this provides the best  
sound quality for all seating positions.  
Driv (Driver): Select this screen button to adjust  
the audio for the driver to receive the best  
possible sound quality.  
1. Press the BAND button until the XM™ frequency is  
displayed. Press the CAT button to display the  
category labels on the radio display. Continue  
pressing the CAT button until the desired category  
name is displayed.  
Rear: Select this screen button to adjust the audio  
for the rear seat passengers to receive the best  
possible sound quality.  
2. Press either of the two buttons below the desired  
category label to immediately tune to the first  
XM™ station associated with that category.  
Surround (Centerpoint™): Select this screen  
button to enable Bose Centerpoint™. Centerpoint™  
produces a surround sound listening experience  
from a CD, MP3/WMA, or XM stereo digital  
audio source and will deliver five independent audio  
channels from conventional two channel stereo  
recordings. (Not available for AM, FM, or  
auxiliary sources.)  
3. Rotate the tune knob, press the buttons below the  
right or left arrows displayed, or press the right or  
left SEEK buttons to go to the next or previous  
XM™ station within the selected category.  
4. To exit the category search mode, press the  
FAV button or BAND button to display your  
favorites again.  
Surround Centerpoint™ is for vehicles equipped with  
Bose® Premium audio only.  
3-107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Undesired XM™ categories can be removed through  
the setup menu. To remove an undesired category,  
perform the following:  
The radio will not allow you to remove or add categories  
while the vehicle is moving faster than five mph  
(eight km/h).  
1. Press the MENU button to display the radio  
setup menu.  
The CAT button will also toggle between compressed  
and uncompressed audio when a mixed disc is present.  
See “Compressed Audio” later in this section.  
2. Press the pushbutton located below the  
XM CAT label.  
Radio Messages  
3. Rotate the tune knob to display the category you  
want removed.  
Locked: This message is displayed when the  
THEFTLOCK system has locked up the radio. Take the  
vehicle to your dealer for service.  
4. Press the pushbutton located under the Remove  
label until the category name along with the word  
Removed appears on the display.  
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be  
corrected, contact your dealer.  
5. Repeat the steps to remove more categories.  
Removed categories can be restored by pressing the  
pushbutton under the Add label when a removed  
category is displayed or by pressing the pushbutton  
under the Restore All label.  
3-108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
XM™ Radio Messages  
Radio Display  
Message  
Condition  
Action Required  
XL (Explicit Language  
Channels)  
XL on the radio display,  
after the channel name,  
indicates content with  
explicit language.  
These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a  
customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).  
XM Updating  
No XM Signal  
Loading XM  
Updating  
The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and  
no action is required. This process should take no longer  
than 30 seconds.  
encryption code  
Loss of signal  
The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a  
location that is blocking the XM™ signal. When you move  
into an open area, the signal should return.  
Acquiring channel audio  
(after 4 second delay)  
The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and  
text data. No action is needed. This message should  
disappear shortly.  
Channel Off Air  
Channel Unavail  
Channel not in service  
This channel is not currently in service. Tune to another  
channel.  
Channel no  
longer available  
This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.  
Tune to another station. If this station was one of the  
presets, choose another station for that preset button.  
No Artist Info  
No Title Info  
No CAT Info  
Artist Name/Feature  
not available  
No artist information is available at this time on this channel.  
The system is working properly.  
Song/Program Title  
not available  
No song title information is available at this time on this  
channel. The system is working properly.  
Category Name  
not available  
No category information is available at this time on this  
channel. The system is working properly.  
3-109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d)  
Radio Display  
Message  
Condition  
Action Required  
No Info  
No Text/Informational  
message available  
No text or informational messages are available at this time  
on this channel. The system is working properly.  
CAT Not Found  
XM Theftlocked  
No channel available for  
the chosen category  
There are no channels available for the selected category.  
The system is working properly.  
Theft lock active  
The XM™ receiver in the vehicle may have previously been  
in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™ receivers  
cannot be swapped between vehicles. If this message  
appears after having your vehicle serviced, check with  
your dealer.  
XM Radio ID  
Unknown  
Radio ID label  
(channel 0)  
If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with the  
XM™ Radio eight digit radio ID label. This label is needed  
to activate the service.  
Radio ID not known  
(should only be if  
hardware failure)  
If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, there  
may be a receiver fault. Consult with your dealer.  
Check XM Receivr  
XM Feature  
Hardware failure  
If this message does not clear within a short period of time,  
the receiver may have a fault. Consult with your dealer.  
CAT button pressed  
when not in XM mode  
The CAT function is exclusive to XM. The system is  
working properly.  
XM Not Available  
XM Not Available  
If this message does not clear within a short period of time,  
the receiver may have a fault. Consult with your dealer.  
3-110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If there is no apparent damage, try a known good CD.  
Playing a CD (Single CD Player)  
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the  
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer  
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of  
the recorded CD with a marking pen instead.  
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The  
player will pull it in and the CD should begin playing.  
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the  
player, it will stay in the player. When the ignition or  
radio is turned on, the CD will start playing where  
it stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.  
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert more  
than one CD into the slot at a time, or attempt  
to play scratched or damaged CDs, you could  
damage the CD player. When using the CD player,  
use only CDs in good condition without any  
label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player  
and the loading slot free of foreign materials,  
liquids, and debris.  
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol will appear on  
the radio display. As each new track starts to play  
the track number will appear on the display.  
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may be reduced  
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality  
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the  
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase  
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in  
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur, check  
the bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD is  
damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the  
CD will not play properly. If the surface of the CD  
is soiled, see Care of Your CDs on page 3-124 for  
more information.  
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”  
later in this section.  
Z (Eject): Press the CD eject button to eject the CD.  
If the CD is not removed, after several seconds, the  
CD will be automatically pulled back into the player.  
a (Tune): Turn this knob to select tracks on the CD  
currently playing.  
3-111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go to the  
start of the current track, if more than ten seconds have  
played. Press the right SEEK arrow to go to the next  
track. If either SEEK arrow is held or pressed multiple  
times, the player will continue moving backward or  
forward through the CD.  
4 (Information): Press this button to switch the display  
between the track number, elapsed time of the track,  
and the time. When the ignition is off, press this button  
to display the time (if the clock display is enabled).  
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a  
CD is playing. The CD will remain safely inside the radio  
for future listening.  
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button to  
reverse playback quickly within a track. You will  
hear sound at a reduced volume. Release this button to  
resume playing the track. The elapsed time of the  
track will appear on the display.  
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD  
when listening to the radio. The CD icon and track  
number will appear on the display when a CD is in the  
player. Press this button again and the system will  
automatically search for an auxiliary input device, such  
as a portable audio player. If a portable audio player  
is not connected, No Aux Input Device Found will  
be displayed.  
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold this button  
to advance playback quickly within a track. You will  
hear sound at a reduced volume. Release this button to  
resume playing the track. The elapsed time of the  
track will appear on the display.  
RDM (Random): With random, you can listen to CD  
tracks in random, rather than sequential order. This  
feature is not available in playlist mode. To use random,  
do the following:  
1. To play tracks from the CD you are listening to in  
random order, press the pushbutton positioned  
under the RDM label. The random icon will appear  
on the display.  
2. Press the same pushbutton again to turn off  
random play. The random icon will disappear from  
the display.  
3-112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may be reduced  
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality  
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the  
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase  
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in  
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur, check  
the bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD is  
damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the  
CD will not play properly. If the surface of the CD  
is soiled, see Care of Your CDs on page 3-124 for  
more information.  
Playing a CD(s) (Six-Disc CD Player)  
LOAD ^: Press this button to load CDs into the CD  
player. This CD player will hold up to six CDs.  
To insert one CD, do the following:  
1. Press and release the load button.  
2. Wait for the message to insert the disc.  
3. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,  
label side up. The player will pull the CD in.  
If there is no apparent damage, try a known good CD.  
To insert multiple CDs, do the following:  
1. Press and hold the load button for five seconds.  
You will hear a beep and Load All Discs will  
be displayed.  
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the  
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer  
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of  
the recorded CD with a marking pen instead.  
2. Follow the displayed instruction on when to insert  
the discs. The CD player takes up to six CDs.  
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert more  
than one CD into the slot at a time, or attempt  
to play scratched or damaged CDs, you could  
damage the CD player. When using the CD player,  
use only CDs in good condition without any  
label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player  
and the loading slot free of foreign materials,  
liquids, and debris.  
3. Press the Load button again to cancel loading  
more CDs.  
If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in the  
player, it will stay in the player. When the ignition  
or radio is turned on, the CD will start playing where it  
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.  
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol will appear on  
the CD. As each new track starts to play, the track  
number will appear on the display.  
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”  
later in this section.  
3-113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Z (Eject): Press the CD eject button to eject CD(s).  
To eject the CD that is currently playing, press and  
release this button. You will hear a beep and Ejecting  
Disc will be displayed. Once the disc is ejected, Remove  
Disc will appear on display. The CD can be removed.  
If the CD is not removed, after several seconds, the CD  
will be automatically pulled back into the player and  
begin playing.  
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold this button  
to advance playback quickly within a track. You will  
hear sound at a reduced volume. Release this button to  
resume playing the track. The elapsed time of the  
track will appear on the display.  
RDM (Random): With random, you can listen to the  
tracks in random, rather than sequential order, on  
one CD or all CDs in a six-disc CD player. To use  
random, do one of the following:  
For the Six-Disc CD player, press and hold the eject  
button for two seconds to eject all discs.  
To play the tracks from the CD you are listening to  
in random order, press the pushbutton positioned  
under the RDM label until Randomize Current  
Disc is displayed. Press the pushbutton again to  
turn off random play.  
a (Tune): Turn this knob to select tracks on the CD  
currently playing.  
© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go to the  
start of the current track, if more than ten seconds have  
played. Press the right SEEK arrow to go to the next  
track. If either SEEK arrow is held, or pressed multiple  
times, the player will continue moving backward or  
forward through the tracks on the CD.  
To play tracks from all CDs loaded in a six-disc CD  
player in random order, press the pushbutton  
positioned under the RDM label until Randomize All  
Discs is displayed. Press the same pushbutton  
again to turn off random play.  
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button to  
reverse playback quickly within a track. You will  
hear sound at a reduced volume. Release this button to  
resume playing the track. The elapsed time of the  
track will appear on the display.  
3-114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a  
CD is playing. The CD will remain safely inside the radio  
for future listening.  
Compressed Audio  
The radio will also play discs that contain both  
uncompressed CD audio (.CDA files) and MP3/WMA  
files. By default the radio will read only the  
uncompressed audio and ignore the MP3/WMA files.  
Pressing the CAT button will toggle between  
compressed and uncompressed audio format.  
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD  
when listening to the radio. The CD icon and a  
message showing disc and/or track number will appear  
on the display when a CD is in the player. Press this  
button again and the system will automatically search for  
an auxiliary input device, such as a portable audio  
player. If a portable audio player is not connected, No  
Aux Input Device Found will be displayed.  
MP3/WMA Format  
If you burn your own MP3/WMA disc on a personal  
computer:  
Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on a CD-R or  
CD-RW disc.  
Using an MP3/WMA CD-R or CR-W Disc  
The radio will play MP3 and WMA files that were  
recorded on a CD-R or CD-RW disc. The files can be  
recorded with the following fixed bit rates: 32 kbps,  
40 kbps, 56 kbps, 64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps, 112 kbps,  
128 kbps, 160 kbps, 192 kbps, 224 kbps, 256 kbps,  
and 320 kbps or a variable bit rate. Song title, artist  
name, and album will be available for display by  
the radio when recorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.  
Make sure to finalize the disc when burning an MP3  
disc, using multiple sessions. It is usually better to  
burn the disc all at once.  
Files can be recorded with a variety of fixed or  
variable bit rates. Song title, artist name, and album  
will be available for display by the radio when  
recorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.  
Make sure playlists have a.m3u or.wpl extension,  
other file extensions may not work.  
3-115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The CD player is able to read and play a maximum of  
50 folders, 50 playlists, and 255 files. You can  
change playlists by using the previous and next folder  
buttons, the tuner knob, or the seek buttons. Long  
file names, folder names, or playlist names may use  
more disc memory space than necessary. To conserve  
space on the disc, minimize the length of the file,  
folder or playlist names. You can also play an MP3  
CD-R that was recorded using no file folders. The  
system can support up to 8 folders in depth, however,  
keep the total number of folders to a minimum in  
order to reduce the complexity and confusion in trying to  
locate a particular folder during playback. If a CD-R  
contains more than the maximum of 50 folders,  
50 playlists, and 255 files, the player will let you access  
and navigate up to the maximum, but all items over  
the maximum will be ignored.  
Empty Directory or Folder  
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the  
file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no  
compressed files directly beneath them, the player will  
advance to the next folder in the file structure that  
contains compressed audio files and the empty folder  
will not be displayed or numbered.  
No Folder  
When the CD-R contains only compressed files, the  
files will be located under the root folder. The next and  
previous folder functions will not be displayed on a  
CD-R that was recorded without folders or playlists.  
When displaying the name of the folder the radio  
will display ROOT.  
When the CD-R contains only playlists and compressed  
audio files, but no folders, all files will be located  
under the root folder. The folder down and the folder up  
buttons will search playlists (Px) first and then go to  
the root folder. When the radio displays the name of the  
folder the radio will display ROOT.  
Root Directory  
The root directory of the CD-R is treated as a folder. If  
the root directory has compressed audio files, the  
directory will be displayed as F1 ROOT. All files  
contained directly under the root directory will be  
accessed prior to any root directory folders. However,  
playlists (Px) will always be accessed before root folders  
or files.  
3-116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Order of Play  
File System and Naming  
Tracks recorded to the CD-R will be played in the  
following order:  
The song name that will be displayed will be the song  
name that is contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name  
is not present in the ID3 tag, then the radio will  
display the file name without the extension (such as  
.mp3) as the track name.  
Play will begin from the first track in the first playlist  
and will continue sequentially through all tracks in  
each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist  
has been played, play will continue from the first  
track of the first playlist.  
Track names longer than 22 characters or four pages  
will be shortened. The display will not show parts  
of words on the last page of text and the extension of  
the filename will not be displayed.  
− Playlists can be changed by pressing the next  
and previous folder button, the seek buttons,  
or rotating the tuner knob.  
Preprogrammed Playlists  
Play will begin from the first track in the first folder  
and will continue sequentially through all tracks in  
each folder. When the last track of the last  
folder has been played, play will continue from the  
first track of the first folder.  
You can access preprogrammed playlists that were  
created using WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real  
Jukebox™ software, however, you will not have playlist  
editing capability using the radio. Playlists must have  
a file extension of M3U or WPL. These playlists will be  
treated as special folders containing compressed  
audio song files.  
When play enters a new folder, the display will not  
automatically show the new folder name unless  
you have chosen the folder mode as the default display.  
The new track name will appear on the display.  
Playlists can be changed by using the previous and  
next folder buttons, the seek buttons, or rotating  
the tuner knob. Tracks cannot be changed. Songs will  
be played sequentially; press the REV or FWD to  
advance through the currently playing song.  
3-117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the  
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer  
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of  
the recorded CD with a marking pen instead.  
Playing an MP3  
Insert a CD-R partway into the slot (Single CD Player),  
or press the load button and wait for the message to  
insert disc (Six-Disc CD Player), label side up. The  
player will pull it in, and the CD-R should begin playing.  
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert more  
than one CD into the slot at a time, or attempt  
to play scratched or damaged CDs, you could  
damage the CD player. When using the CD player,  
use only CDs in good condition without any  
label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player  
and the loading slot free of foreign materials,  
liquids, and debris.  
If you turn off the ignition or radio with a CD-R in the  
player it will stay in the player. When you turn on  
the ignition or radio, the CD-R will start to play where it  
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.  
As each new track starts to play, the track number and  
song title will appear on the display.  
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may be reduced  
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality  
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the  
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase  
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in  
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur, check  
the bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD is  
damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the  
CD will not play properly. If the surface of the CD  
is soiled, see Care of Your CDs on page 3-124 for more  
information.  
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”  
later in this section.  
Z (Eject): Press the CD eject button to eject  
CD-R(s). To eject the CD-R that is currently playing,  
press and release this button. You will hear a beep and  
Ejecting Disc will be displayed. Once the disc is  
ejected, Remove Disc will appear on display. The CD-R  
can be removed. If the CD-R is not removed, after  
several seconds, the CD-R will be automatically pulled  
back into the player and begin playing.  
If there is no apparent damage, try a known good CD.  
For the Six-Disc CD player, press and hold the eject  
button for two seconds to eject all discs.  
3-118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Release this button to resume playing the file. The  
elapsed time of the file will appear on the display.  
a (Tune): Turn this knob to select MP3 files on the  
CD-R currently playing.  
RDM (Random): With random, you can listen to MP3  
files on the CD-R in random, rather than sequential  
order, on one CD-R or all discs in a six-disc CD player.  
To use random, do one of the following:  
© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go to the  
start of the current MP3 file, if more than ten seconds  
have played. Press the right SEEK arrow to go to  
the next MP3 file. If either SEEK arrow is held or  
pressed multiple times, the player will continue moving  
backward or forward through MP3 files on the CD.  
1. To play MP3 files from the CD-R you are listening  
to in random order, press the pushbutton positioned  
under the RDM label until Random Current Disc  
is displayed. Press the same pushbutton again to  
turn off random play.  
S c (Previous Folder): Press the pushbutton  
positioned under the Folder label to go to the first track  
in the previous folder.  
2. To play songs from all CDs loaded in a six-disc CD  
player in random order, press the pushbutton  
positioned under the RDM label until Randomize All  
Discs is displayed. Press the same pushbutton  
again to turn off random play.  
c T (Next Folder): Press the pushbutton positioned  
under the Folder label to go to the first track in the  
next folder.  
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button to  
reverse playback quickly within an MP3 file. You  
will hear sound at a reduced volume.  
h (Music Navigator): Use the music navigator  
feature to play MP3 files on the CD-R in order by artist  
or album. Press the pushbutton located below the  
music navigator label. The player will scan the disc to  
sort the files by artist and album ID3 tag information. It  
may take several minutes to scan the disc depending  
on the number of MP3 files recorded to the CD-R. The  
radio may begin playing while it is scanning the disc  
in the background. When the scan is finished, the CD-R  
will begin playing again.  
Release this button to resume playing the file. The  
elapsed time of the file will appear on the display.  
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold this button  
to advance playback quickly within an MP3 file. You  
will hear sound at a reduced volume.  
3-119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Once the disc has been scanned, the player will default  
to playing MP3 files in order by artist. The current  
artist playing is shown on the second line of the display  
between the arrows. Once all songs by that artist are  
played, the player will move to the next artist in  
alphabetic order on the CD-R and begin playing MP3  
files by that artist. If you want to listen to MP3 files  
by another artist, press the pushbutton located below  
either arrow button. You will go to the next or previous  
artist in alphabetic order. Continue pressing either  
button until the desired artist is displayed.  
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD  
when listening to the radio. The CD icon and a  
message showing disc and/or track number will appear  
on the display when a CD is in the player. Press this  
button again and the system will automatically search for  
an auxiliary input device such as a portable audio  
player. If a portable audio player is not connected, No  
Aux Input Device Found will be displayed.  
CD Messages  
DISC ERROR: If this message appears on the display  
and/or the CD comes out, it could be for one of the  
following reasons:  
To change from playback by artist to playback by  
album, press the pushbutton located below the Sort By  
label. From the sort screen, push one of the buttons  
below the album button. Press the pushbutton below the  
Back label to return to the main music navigator  
screen. Now the album name is displayed on the second  
line between the arrows and songs from the current  
album will begin to play. Once all songs from that album  
are played, the player will move to the next album in  
alphabetic order on the CD-R and begin playing  
MP3 files from that album.  
The radio system does not support the playlist  
format, the compressed audio format, or the data  
file format.  
It is very hot. When the temperature returns to  
normal, the CD should play.  
You are driving on a very rough road. When the  
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.  
The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.  
To exit music navigator mode, press the button below  
the Back label to return to normal MP3 playback.  
The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and  
try again.  
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a  
CD is playing. The CD will remain safely inside the radio  
for future listening.  
There may have been a problem while burning  
the CD.  
The label may be caught in the CD player.  
3-120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,  
try a known good CD.  
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD  
when a portable audio device is playing. Press this  
button again and the system will begin playing audio  
from the connected portable audio player. If a portable  
audio player is not connected, No Aux Input Device  
Found will be displayed.  
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be  
corrected, contact your dealer. If the radio displays  
an error message, write it down and provide it to your  
dealer when reporting the problem.  
Listening to a Portable Audio Player  
Navigation/Radio System  
To listen to a portable audio player such as an  
MP3 player, iPod, PDA, laptop computer (with  
microphone output), or cassette player over the radio  
and speakers, use a cable with a 3.5 mm jack to  
connect your portable audio player to the auxiliary input  
jack located on the radio faceplate.  
Your vehicle may have a navigation radio system.  
The navigation system has built-in features intended to  
minimize driver distraction. Technology alone, no  
matter how advanced, can never replace your own  
judgment. See the navigation system manual for some  
tips to help you reduce distractions while driving.  
When a device is connected, the radio automatically  
begins playing audio from the device over the  
car speakers.  
Theft-Deterrent Feature  
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of  
your vehicle’s radio. The feature works automatically  
by learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification  
Number (VIN). If the radio is moved to a different  
vehicle, it will not operate. If the radio is removed from  
your vehicle, the original VIN in the radio can be  
used to trace the radio back to your vehicle.  
O (Power/Volume): Turn this knob clockwise to  
increase or counterclockwise to decrease the volume of  
the portable player. You may need to do additional  
volume adjustments from the portable device if  
the volume does not go loud or soft enough.  
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a  
portable audio device is playing. The portable audio  
device will continue playing, so you may want to stop it  
or power it off.  
With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio will not  
operate if stolen.  
3-121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If your vehicle does not have OnStar, press this button  
to silence the system. Press this button again or  
turn the volume knob to turn the sound on.  
Audio Steering Wheel Controls  
The audio steering wheel  
controls may be different  
depending on your  
vehicles options. Some  
audio controls can  
be adjusted at the steering  
wheel. They include the  
following:  
If your vehicle has the navigation system, press this  
button to initiate voice recognition. See “Voice  
Recognition” in the index of your vehicle’s navigation  
system manual for more information.  
SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch between  
AM, FM, or XM (if equipped), radio, or CD.  
+ / (Volume): Press the plus or minus button to  
increase or to decrease the volume.  
¨ (Seek): Press the seek arrow to go to the next  
radio station and stay there. The system will only seek  
radio stations with strong frequencies.  
x w (Next/Previous): Press the up or the  
When the seek arrow is pressed and held for  
two seconds, the system will scan the radio stations  
that are in the selected band. If listening to a CD,  
the system will advance to the next track of that  
particular CD.  
down arrow to go to the next or to the previous preset  
radio station.  
When a CD is playing, press the up or the down arrow to  
go to the next or previous track.  
If you have the navigation system, some of the audio  
steering wheel controls work when a DVD is playing in  
the navigation radio. See the Navigation System  
manual for more information.  
g (Mute/Voice Recognition): Press and hold this  
button to interact with the OnStar system. If your vehicle  
is also equipped with the navigation system, push this  
button to initiate voice recognition and say, “OnStar”  
to enter OnStar mode, see the OnStar® System  
on page 2-43 in this manual for more information.  
3-122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
XM™ Satellite Radio Service  
Radio Reception  
XM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio  
reception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous  
United States, and in Canada (if available). Just as with  
FM, tall buildings or hills can interfere with satellite  
radio signals, causing the sound to fade in and out. In  
addition, traveling or standing under heavy foliage,  
bridges, garages, or tunnels may cause loss of  
XM signal for a period of time. The radio may display  
NO XM SIGNAL to indicate interference.  
You may experience frequency interference and static  
during normal radio reception if items such as cellphone  
chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and  
external electronic devices are plugged into the  
accessory power outlet. If there is interference or static,  
unplug the item from the accessory power outlet.  
AM  
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,  
especially at night. The longer range can cause  
station frequencies to interfere with each other. For  
better radio reception, most AM radio stations will boost  
the power levels during the day, and then reduce  
these levels during the night. Static can also occur when  
things like storms and power lines interfere with radio  
reception. When this happens, try reducing the treble on  
your radio.  
Cellular Phone Usage  
Cellular phone usage may cause interference with your  
vehicle’s radio. This interference may occur when  
making or receiving phone calls, charging the phone’s  
battery, or simply having the phone on. This interference  
is an increased level of static while listening to the  
radio. If static is received while listening to the radio,  
unplug the cellular phone and turn it off.  
FM Stereo  
FM stereo will give the best sound, but FM signals will  
reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall  
buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing  
the sound to fade in and out.  
3-123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Care of Your CDs  
Care of the CD Player  
Handle CDs carefully. Store them in their original cases  
or other protective cases and away from direct  
sunlight and dust. The CD player scans the bottom  
surface of the disc. If the surface of a CD is damaged,  
such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the CD will  
not play properly or not at all. If the surface of a CD is  
soiled, take a soft, lint free cloth or dampen a clean, soft  
cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution mixed with  
water, and clean it. Make sure the wiping process starts  
from the center to the edge.  
The use of CD lens cleaners for CD players is not  
advised, due to the risk of contaminating the internal  
lens of the CD optics with lubricants.  
Diversity Antenna System  
The AM-FM antenna is integrated with the rear window  
defogger, located in the rear window. Make sure that  
the inside surface of the rear window is not scratched  
and that the grid lines on the glass are not damaged. If  
the inside surface is damaged, it could interfere with  
radio reception.  
Do not touch the bottom side of a CD while handling it;  
this could damage the surface. Pick up CDs by  
grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole and  
the outer edge.  
Notice: Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting with  
metallic film. The metallic film in some tinting  
materials will interfere with or distort the incoming  
radio reception. Any damage caused to your  
antenna due to metallic tinting materials will not be  
covered by your warranty.  
3-124  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Notice: Do not try to clear frost or other material  
from the inside of the front windshield and rear  
window with a razor blade or anything else that is  
sharp. This may damage the rear window defogger  
grid and affect your radio’s ability to pick up  
stations clearly. The repairs wouldn’t be covered by  
your warranty.  
XM™ Satellite Radio  
Antenna System  
The XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof  
of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of snow and  
ice build up for clear radio reception.  
If your vehicle has a sunroof, the performance of the  
XM™ system may be affected if the sunroof is open.  
If static is heard on the radio, when the rear window  
defogger is turned on, it could mean that a defogger grid  
line has been damaged. If this is true, the grid line  
must be repaired.  
Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle can interfere  
with the performance of the XM™ system. Make sure  
the XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is not obstructed.  
If adding an aftermarket cellular telephone to your  
vehicle, and the antenna needs to be attached to the  
glass, make sure that the grid lines for the AM-FM  
antennas are not damaged. Make sure the cellular  
telephone antenna does not touch a grid line.  
3-125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
NOTES  
3-126  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 4  
Driving Your Vehicle  
StabiliTrak® System ......................................4-10  
4-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Your Driving, the Road, and  
Your Vehicle  
{CAUTION:  
Defensive driving really means “Be ready for  
anything.” On city streets, rural roads, or  
expressways, it means “Always expect the  
unexpected.” Assume that pedestrians or other  
drivers are going to be careless and make  
mistakes. Anticipate what they might do and  
be ready. Rear-end collisions are about the  
most preventable of accidents. Yet they are  
common. Allow enough following distance.  
Defensive driving requires that a driver  
concentrate on the driving task. Anything that  
distracts from the driving task makes proper  
defensive driving more difficult and can even  
cause a collision, with resulting injury. Ask a  
passenger to help do these things, or pull off  
the road in a safe place to do them. These  
simple defensive driving techniques could  
save your life.  
Defensive Driving  
The best advice anyone can give about driving is:  
Drive defensively.  
Please start with a very important safety device in your  
vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They Are for  
Everyone on page 1-10.  
4-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half the adult  
population — choose never to drink alcohol, so they  
never drive after drinking. For persons under 21,  
it is against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.  
There are good medical, psychological, and  
Drunken Driving  
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is  
a national tragedy. It is the number one contributor  
to the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims  
every year.  
developmental reasons for these laws.  
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway  
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and  
then drive. But what if people do? How much is “too  
much” if someone plans to drive? It is a lot less  
than many might think. Although it depends on each  
person and situation, here is some general information  
on the problem.  
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive  
a vehicle:  
Judgment  
Muscular Coordination  
Vision  
Attentiveness  
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone  
who is drinking depends upon four things:  
Police records show that almost half of all motor  
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,  
these deaths are the result of someone who was  
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than  
16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been  
associated with the use of alcohol, with more than  
300,000 people injured.  
The amount of alcohol consumed  
The drinker’s body weight  
The amount of food that is consumed before and  
during drinking  
The length of time it has taken the drinker to  
consume the alcohol  
4-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
According to the American Medical Association, a 180 lb  
(82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce (355 ml)  
bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BAC  
of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the  
same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce (120 ml) glasses  
of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces  
(45 ml) of liquors like whiskey, gin, or vodka.  
BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person who  
consumes food just before or during drinking will have a  
somewhat lower BAC level.  
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally  
have a lower relative percentage of body water  
than men. Since alcohol is carried in body water, this  
means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC  
level than a man of her same body weight will when  
each has the same number of drinks.  
The law in most U.S. states, and throughout Canada,  
sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent. In some other  
countries, the limit is even lower. For example, it is  
0.05 percent in both France and Germany. The  
BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United States  
is 0.04 percent.  
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to  
six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have seen,  
it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks,  
and how quickly the person drinks them.  
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of  
0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills  
of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching  
0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All  
drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent.  
It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, if  
the same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces  
or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s  
4-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision  
increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of  
0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of  
0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a  
collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance  
of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a  
level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!  
{CAUTION:  
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.  
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and  
judgment can be affected by even a small  
amount of alcohol. You can have a serious — or  
even fatal — collision if you drive after drinking.  
Please do not drink and drive or ride with a  
driver who has been drinking. Ride home in a  
cab; or if you are with a group, designate a  
driver who will not drink.  
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol  
in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold  
showers will speed that up. “I will be careful” is not the  
right answer. What if there is an emergency, a need to  
take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street?  
A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able to  
react quickly enough to avoid the collision.  
There is something else about drinking and driving that  
many people do not know. Medical research shows that  
alcohol in a person’s system can make crash injuries  
worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or  
heart. This means that when anyone who has been  
drinking — driver or passenger — is in a crash, that  
person’s chance of being killed or permanently disabled  
is higher than if the person had not been drinking.  
Control of a Vehicle  
You have three systems that make your vehicle go  
where you want it to go. They are the brakes, the  
steering, and the accelerator. All three systems have to  
do their work at the places where the tires meet the road.  
Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow or ice, it  
is easy to ask more of those control systems than  
the tires and road can provide. That means you can lose  
control of your vehicle. See Traction Control System  
(TCS) on page 4-9.  
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your vehicle’s  
on page 5-3.  
4-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive  
in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy  
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is a  
mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool between  
hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much faster if you  
do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace with the traffic  
and allow realistic following distances, you will eliminate a  
lot of unnecessary braking. That means better braking  
and longer brake life.  
Braking  
See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-62.  
Braking action involves perception time and  
reaction time.  
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.  
That is perception time. Then you have to bring up your  
foot and do it. That is reaction time.  
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a  
second. But that is only an average. It might be less  
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or  
more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,  
coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,  
drugs, and frustration. But even in three-fourths of a  
second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels  
66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an  
emergency, so keeping enough space between  
your vehicle and others is important.  
If your engine ever stops while you are driving, brake  
normally but do not pump your brakes. If you do,  
the pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine  
stops, you will still have some power brake assist.  
But you will use it when you brake. Once the power  
assist is used up, it may take longer to stop and  
the brake pedal will be harder to push.  
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your vehicle’s  
on page 5-3.  
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly  
with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement  
or gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is  
wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; the condition of your brakes;  
the weight of the vehicle; and the amount of brake  
force applied.  
4-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)  
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes. ABS is an advanced  
electronic braking system that will help prevent a  
braking skid.  
When you start your engine and begin to drive away,  
your anti-lock brake system will check itself. You  
may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while  
this test is going on, and you may even notice that your  
brake pedal moves a little. This is normal.  
If there is a problem with  
the anti-lock brake system,  
this warning light will  
stay on. See Anti-Lock  
Light on page 3-63.  
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.  
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam  
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what  
happens with ABS:  
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If  
one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer  
will separately work the brakes at each front wheel  
and at both rear wheels.  
4-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure  
faster than any driver could. The computer is  
programmed to make the most of available tire and road  
conditions. This can help you steer around the obstacle  
while braking hard.  
Remember: Anti-lock does not change the time you  
need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always  
decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to  
the vehicle in front of you, you will not have time to apply  
your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops.  
Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even  
though you have anti-lock brakes.  
Using Anti-Lock  
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal  
down firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may hear  
the anti-lock pump or motor operate, and feel the  
brake pedal pulsate, but this is normal.  
Braking in Emergencies  
With anti-lock brakes, you can steer and brake at the  
same time. In many emergencies, steering can help you  
more than even the very best braking.  
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates on  
wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly.  
4-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL message, the  
traction control system warning light and the StabiliTrak®  
warning light will come on to let you know if there is a  
problem with the traction control system. See DIC  
Warnings and Messages on page 3-76.  
Traction Control System (TCS)  
Your vehicle has a traction control system that limits  
wheel spin. This is especially useful in slippery  
road conditions. The system operates only if it senses  
that the front wheels are spinning too much or beginning  
to lose traction. When this happens, the system works  
the front brakes and reduces engine power (by  
closing the throttle and managing engine spark) to limit  
wheel spin.  
The traction control system and StabiliTrak® warning  
light will flash when the traction control system is limiting  
Warning Light on page 3-64 and StabiliTrak® Indicator  
Light on page 3-64 for more information. You may feel or  
hear the system working, but this is normal.  
When this light and the SERVICE TRACTION  
CONTROL message are on, the system will not limit  
wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.  
The traction control system automatically comes on  
whenever you start your vehicle. To limit wheel  
spin, especially in slippery road conditions, you should  
always leave the system on. But you can turn the  
traction control system off if you ever need to.  
You can turn the system on or off at any time by  
pressing the traction control system button located on  
the console or on the end of the column shifter. The DIC  
will display TRACTION CONTROL OFF when you  
press the button.  
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the traction  
control system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise  
control will automatically disengage. When road  
conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may  
re-engage the cruise control. See Cruise Control  
on page 3-16 or Adaptive Cruise Control on page 3-19  
for more information.  
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your vehicle’s  
on page 5-3 for more information.  
4-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Magnetic Ride Control  
StabiliTrak® System  
Your vehicle may have this feature. The StabiliTrak®  
system is an advanced computer controlled system that  
helps the driver maintain directional control of the  
vehicle in difficult driving conditions. This is  
accomplished by selectively applying any one of the  
vehicle’s brakes and reducing engine power.  
The StabiliTrak® system comes on automatically  
whenever you start your vehicle. The system cannot be  
turned off.  
Your vehicle may have a feature called Magnetic Ride  
Control that automatically adjusts the ride of your  
vehicle. Automatic ride control is achieved through a  
computer used to control and monitor the suspension  
system. The controller receives input from various  
sensors to determine the proper system response. If the  
controller detects a problem within the system, the  
DIC will display a SERVICE SUSPENSION SYS  
message. See DIC Warnings and Messages on  
page 3-76 for more information. If this message appears,  
have your vehicle serviced at your dealership.  
The STABILITRAK NOT READY message may be  
displayed in the DIC and the traction control system and  
StabiliTrak® warning light on the instrument panel  
cluster will be on after first driving the vehicle and  
exceeding 30 mph 48 (km/h) for 30 seconds. The  
StabiliTrak® system is off until the light has turned off.  
This could take up to 15 minutes.  
Electronically Controlled Air Ride  
Suspension  
If you have a Cadillac Professional Vehicle, you may  
have a feature called Electronically Controlled Air  
Suspension. Air ride control is achieved through a  
computer used to control and monitor the system. The  
controller receives input from two height sensors to  
determine the proper system response. If the controller  
detects a problem with the system, the Driver  
Information Center (DIC) will display a SERVICE  
SUSPENSION SYS message. If this message appears,  
have your vehicle serviced at your dealership.  
The traction control system and StabiliTrak® warning  
light on the instrument panel cluster will flash when the  
system is operating. See Traction Control System  
(TCS) Warning Light on page 3-64 and  
StabiliTrak® Indicator Light on page 3-64 for more  
information. You may also feel or hear the system  
working. This is normal.  
4-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The SERVICE STABILITRAK message will be displayed  
and the traction control system and StabiliTrak® warning  
light on the instrument panel cluster will come on if there  
is a problem with the system. When this light and the  
SERVICE STABILITRAK message are on, the system is  
not operational. Adjust your driving accordingly.  
Magnetic Speed Variable Assist  
Steering System  
This system continuously adjusts the effort you feel  
when steering at all vehicle speeds. It provides ease  
when parking, yet a firm, solid feel at highway speeds.  
Steering Tips  
Panic Brake Assist  
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.  
Your vehicle has a panic brake assist system that  
monitors the intention of the driver while braking. If the  
system senses that the driver has applied hard/fast  
pressure to the brake pedal, the system will generate  
additional pressure, making it easier for the driver to  
maintain brake application. When this happens the brake  
pedal will feel easier to push. Just hold the brake pedal  
down firmly and let the system work for you. You may feel  
the brakes vibrate, or you may notice some noise but this  
is normal. The brakes will return to normal operation after  
the brake pedal has been released.  
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on  
the news happen on curves. Here is why:  
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to  
the same laws of physics when driving on curves.  
The traction of the tires against the road surface makes  
it possible for the vehicle to change its path when  
you turn the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertia  
will keep the vehicle going in the same direction. If  
you have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you  
will understand this.  
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the  
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at  
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While  
you are in a curve, speed is the one factor you  
can control.  
Steering  
Power Steering  
If you lose power steering assist because the engine  
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but  
it will take much more effort.  
4-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.  
Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control  
systems — steering and acceleration — have to do  
their work where the tires meet the road. Adding  
the sudden acceleration can demand too much of those  
places. You can lose control. See Traction Control  
System (TCS) on page 4-9.  
Steering in Emergencies  
There are times when steering can be more effective  
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find  
a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls  
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between  
parked cars and stops right in front of you. You  
can avoid these problems by braking — if you can stop  
in time. But sometimes you cannot; there is not room.  
That is the time for evasive action — steering around  
the problem.  
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on  
the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you  
want it to go, and slow down.  
If you have StabiliTrak®, the system may be active. See  
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like  
these. First apply your brakes.  
StabiliTrak® System on page 4-10.  
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should  
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds  
are based on good weather and road conditions. Under  
less favorable conditions you will want to go slower.  
See Braking on page 4-6. It is better to remove as much  
speed as you can from a possible collision. Then  
steer around the problem, to the left or right depending  
on the space available.  
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach  
a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front  
wheels are straight ahead.  
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the  
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to  
accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then  
accelerate gently into the straightaway.  
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your vehicle’s  
on page 5-3.  
4-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Off-Road Recovery  
You may find that your right wheels have dropped  
off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while you  
are driving.  
An emergency like this requires close attention and a  
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at  
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you  
can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without  
removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer  
quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel  
once you have avoided the object.  
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the  
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the  
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,  
steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of  
the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up to  
one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts  
the pavement edge. Then turn your steering wheel  
to go straight down the roadway.  
The fact that such emergency situations are always  
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving  
at all times and wear safety belts properly.  
4-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to  
pass while you are awaiting an opportunity. For  
one thing, following too closely reduces your area  
of vision, especially if you are following a larger  
vehicle. Also, you will not have adequate space if  
the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops.  
Keep back a reasonable distance.  
Passing  
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a  
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,  
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then  
goes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?  
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane  
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the  
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming  
traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in  
judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger  
can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the  
worst of all traffic accidents — the head-on collision.  
When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,  
start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and  
do not get too close. Time your move so you will be  
increasing speed as the time comes to move into  
the other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you  
will have a running start that more than makes up  
for the distance you would lose by dropping  
back. And if something happens to cause you to  
cancel your pass, you need only slow down  
and drop back again and wait for another  
opportunity.  
So here are some tips for passing:  
Drive ahead. Look down the road, to the sides  
and to crossroads for situations that might affect  
your passing patterns. If you have any doubt  
whatsoever about making a successful pass,  
wait for a better time.  
If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle,  
wait your turn. But take care that someone is not  
trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow  
vehicle. Remember to glance over your shoulder  
and check the blind spot.  
Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and  
lines. If you can see a sign up ahead that might  
indicate a turn or an intersection, delay your pass.  
A broken center line usually indicates it is all  
right to pass, providing the road ahead is clear.  
Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or  
a double solid line, even if the road seems empty  
of approaching traffic.  
4-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and  
start your left lane change signal before moving out  
of the right lane to pass. When you are far  
Loss of Control  
Let us review what driving experts say about what  
happens when the three control systems — brakes,  
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough  
friction where the tires meet the road to do what the  
driver has asked.  
enough ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front  
in your inside mirror, activate your right lane  
change signal and move back into the right lane.  
Remember that your passenger side outside mirror  
is convex. The vehicle you just passed may  
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to  
steer and constantly seek an escape route or area  
of less danger.  
seem to be farther away from you than it really is.  
Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on  
two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the  
next vehicle.  
Skidding  
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.  
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable  
care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving  
those conditions. But skids are always possible.  
Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.  
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it  
may be slowing down or starting to turn.  
If you are being passed, make it easy for the  
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps  
you can ease a little to the right.  
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s  
three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels  
are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much  
speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose  
cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much  
throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.  
4-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off  
the accelerator pedal.  
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,  
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, you  
will want to slow down and adjust your driving to  
these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery  
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and  
vehicle control more limited.  
Remember: Any traction control system helps  
avoid only the acceleration skid. If your traction  
control system is off, then an acceleration skid is  
also best handled by easing your foot off the  
accelerator pedal.  
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try  
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration,  
or braking, including engine braking by shifting to a  
lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tires  
to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery  
until your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning  
clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow  
on the road to make a mirrored surface — and  
slow down when you have any doubt.  
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the  
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want  
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,  
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready  
for a second skid if it occurs.  
If you have StabiliTrak®, the system may be active. See  
StabiliTrak® System on page 4-10.  
Remember: Any Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) helps  
avoid only the braking skid.  
4-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.  
But as we get older these differences increase.  
A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice as much  
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.  
Driving at Night  
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.  
One reason is that some drivers are likely to be  
impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with night vision  
problems, or by fatigue.  
What you do in the daytime can also affect your  
night vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright  
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your  
eyes will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you  
are driving, do not wear sunglasses at night. They  
may cut down on glare from headlamps, but they also  
make a lot of things invisible.  
Here are some tips on night driving.  
Drive defensively.  
Do not drink and drive.  
Adjust the inside rearview mirror to reduce the glare  
from headlamps behind you.  
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching  
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several  
seconds, for your eyes to re-adjust to the dark. When  
you are faced with severe glare, as from a driver  
who does not lower the high beams, or a vehicle with  
misaimed headlamps, slow down a little. Avoid  
staring directly into the approaching headlamps.  
Since you cannot see as well, you may need to  
slow down and keep more space between you  
and other vehicles.  
Slow down, especially on higher speed roads.  
Your vehicle’s headlamps can light up only so much  
road ahead.  
In remote areas, watch for animals.  
If you are tired, pull off the road in a safe place  
and rest.  
4-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Keep the windshield and all the glass on your vehicle  
clean — inside and out. Glare at night is made  
much worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the  
glass can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass  
makes lights dazzle and flash more than clean  
glass would, making the pupils of your eyes  
contract repeatedly.  
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads  
Remember that the headlamps light up far less of a  
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep  
your eyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimly  
lighted objects. Just as the headlamps should be  
checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes  
be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from  
night blindness — the inability to see in dim light — and  
are not even aware of it.  
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet  
road, you cannot stop, accelerate, or turn as well  
because your tire-to-road traction is not as good as on  
dry roads. And, if your tires do not have much tread  
left, you will get even less traction. It is always wise to  
go slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while  
you are driving. The surface may get wet suddenly when  
your reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement.  
4-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your  
windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy  
rain can make it harder to see road signs and  
traffic signals, pavement markings, the edge of the road,  
and even people walking.  
Driving too fast through large water puddles or even  
going through some car washes can cause problems,  
too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid  
puddles. But if you cannot, try to slow down before  
you hit them.  
It is wise to keep your windshield wiping equipment in  
good shape and keep your windshield washer fluid  
reservoir filled with washer fluid. Replace your  
windshield wiper inserts when they show signs of  
streaking or missing areas on the windshield, or when  
strips of rubber start to separate from the inserts.  
Hydroplaning  
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up  
under your tires that they can actually ride on the  
water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and  
you are going fast enough. When your vehicle is  
hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.  
Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can if your  
tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in  
one or more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is  
standing on the road. If you can see reflections  
from trees, telephone poles, or other vehicles, and  
raindrops dimple the water’s surface, there could be  
hydroplaning.  
{CAUTION:  
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They will not  
work as well in a quick stop and may cause  
pulling to one side. You could lose control of  
the vehicle.  
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There  
just is not a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.  
The best advice is to slow down when it is raining.  
After driving through a large puddle of water  
or a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly  
until your brakes work normally.  
4-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving Through Deep Standing Water  
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips  
Besides slowing down, allow some extra following  
distance. And be especially careful when you  
pass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear  
room ahead, and be prepared to have your  
view restricted by road spray.  
Notice: If you drive too quickly through deep  
puddles or standing water, water can come in  
through your engine’s air intake and badly damage  
your engine. Never drive through water that is  
slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle. If  
you cannot avoid deep puddles or standing water,  
drive through them very slowly.  
Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires  
on page 5-49.  
Driving Through Flowing Water  
{CAUTION:  
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.  
If you try to drive through flowing water, as you  
might at a low water crossing, your vehicle can  
be carried away. As little as six inches of  
flowing water can carry away a smaller vehicle.  
If this happens, you and other vehicle  
occupants could drown. Do not ignore police  
warning signs, and otherwise be very cautious  
about trying to drive through flowing water.  
4-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:  
City Driving  
Know the best way to get to where you are  
going. Get a city map and plan your trip into  
an unknown part of the city just as you would for a  
cross-country trip.  
Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross  
most large cities. You will save time and energy.  
See Freeway Driving on page 4-22.  
Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic  
light is there because the corner is busy enough  
to need it. When a light turns green, and just before  
you start to move, check both ways for vehicles  
that have not cleared the intersection or may  
be running the red light.  
One of the biggest problems with city streets is the  
amount of traffic on them. You will want to watch out for  
what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to  
traffic signals.  
4-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep  
up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the  
same speed most of the other drivers are driving.  
Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow.  
Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.  
Freeway Driving  
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to  
the freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as  
you drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin  
to check traffic. Try to determine where you expect  
to blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close  
to the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal,  
check your mirrors, and glance over your shoulder as  
often as necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the  
traffic flow.  
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the  
posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it is slower.  
Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.  
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use  
your turn signal.  
Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways, parkways,  
expressways, turnpikes, or superhighways — are the  
safest of all roads. But they have their own special rules.  
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your  
shoulder to make sure there is not another vehicle in  
your blind spot.  
4-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you  
allow a reasonable following distance.  
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it  
serviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it needs  
service, have it done before starting out. Of course,  
you will find experienced and able service experts in  
GM dealerships all across North America. They will be  
ready and willing to help if you need it.  
Expect to move slightly slower at night.  
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the  
proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do  
not, under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive  
on to the next exit.  
Here are some things you can check before a trip:  
Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full? Are  
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.  
The exit speed is usually posted. Reduce your speed  
according to your speedometer, not to your sense  
of motion. After driving for any distance at higher  
speeds, you may tend to think you are going slower  
than you actually are.  
all windows clean inside and outside?  
Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?  
Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked  
all levels?  
Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?  
Before Leaving on a Long Trip  
Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,  
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for  
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the  
recommended pressure?  
Make sure you are ready. Try to be well rested. If you  
must start when you are not fresh — such as after  
a day’s work — do not plan to make too many miles that  
first part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing  
and shoes you can easily drive in.  
Weather Forecasts: What is the weather outlook  
along your route? Should you delay your trip a  
short time to avoid a major storm system?  
Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?  
4-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Highway Hypnosis  
Hill and Mountain Roads  
Is there actually such a condition as highway hypnosis?  
Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call it  
highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever.  
There is something about an easy stretch of road with  
the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the  
road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the  
wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Do  
not let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can  
leave the road in less than a second, and you could  
crash and be injured.  
What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be  
aware that it can happen.  
Then here are some tips:  
Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a  
comfortably cool interior.  
Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and  
to the sides. Check your rearview mirrors and your  
instruments frequently.  
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from  
driving in flat or rolling terrain.  
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you are  
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make  
your trips safer and more enjoyable.  
If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,  
service, or parking area and take a nap, get some  
exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness  
on the highway as an emergency.  
Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid  
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system,  
and transaxle. These parts can work hard on  
mountain roads.  
4-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Know how to go down hills. The most important  
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of  
the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go  
down a steep or long hill.  
{CAUTION:  
If you do not shift down, your brakes could get  
so hot that they would not work well. You  
would then have poor braking or even none  
going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down  
to let your engine assist your brakes on a  
steep downhill slope.  
Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down  
to a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your  
engine and transaxle, and you can climb the  
hill better.  
Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane  
roads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wide  
or cut across the center of the road. Drive at speeds  
that let you stay in your own lane.  
As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There  
could be something in your lane, like a stalled car or  
an accident.  
{CAUTION:  
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the  
ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have  
to do all the work of slowing down. They could  
get so hot that they would not work well. You  
would then have poor braking or even none  
going down a hill. You could crash. Always  
have your engine running and your vehicle in  
gear when you go downhill.  
You may see highway signs on mountains that  
warn of special problems. Examples are long  
grades, passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocks  
area, or winding roads. Be alert to these and take  
appropriate action.  
4-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Winter Driving  
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a  
supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter  
outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red  
cloth, and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And,  
if you will be driving under severe conditions, include  
a small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet, or a couple of  
burlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure you  
properly secure these items in your vehicle.  
Here are some tips for winter driving:  
Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.  
You may want to put winter emergency supplies in  
your trunk.  
Also see Tires on page 5-49.  
4-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
traction of all. You can get wet ice when it is about  
freezing, 32°F (0°C), and freezing rain begins to fall. Try  
to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews  
can get there.  
Driving on Snow or Ice  
Most of the time, those places where the tires meet the  
road probably have good traction.  
However, if there is snow or ice between the tires and  
the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You will  
have a lot less traction, or grip, and will need to be  
very careful.  
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowing,  
or loose snow — drive with caution.  
Traction control improves your ability to accelerate when  
driving on a slippery road. Even though your vehicle  
has the Traction Control System (TCS), you will want to  
slow down and adjust your driving to the road  
conditions. Under certain conditions, you may want to  
turn the TCS off, such as when driving through  
deep snow and loose gravel, to help maintain vehicle  
motion at lower speeds. See Traction Control System  
(TCS) on page 4-9.  
What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold snow  
or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet ice  
can be even more trouble because it may offer the least  
4-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Your Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) improves your  
vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop on a  
slippery road. Even though you have ABS, you will want  
to begin stopping sooner than you would on dry  
page 4-7.  
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard  
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a  
serious situation. You should probably stay with  
your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near  
help and you can hike through the snow. Here are  
some things to do to summon help and keep yourself  
and your passengers safe:  
Allow greater following distance on any slippery road.  
Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine until  
you hit a spot that is covered with ice. On an  
otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in  
shaded areas where the sun cannot reach, such as  
around clumps of trees, behind buildings, or under  
bridges. Sometimes the surface of a curve or an  
overpass may remain icy when the surrounding  
roads are clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead of  
you, brake before you are on it. Try not to brake while  
you are actually on the ice, and avoid sudden  
steering maneuvers.  
Turn on your hazard flashers.  
Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that  
you have been stopped by the snow.  
Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.  
If you do not have blankets or extra clothing, make  
body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags,  
rags, floor mats — anything you can wrap around  
yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.  
4-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
{CAUTION:  
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your  
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon  
monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could  
overcome you and kill you. You cannot see it or  
smell it, so you might not know it is in your  
vehicle. Clear away snow from around the base  
of your vehicle, especially any that is blocking  
your exhaust pipe. And check around again  
from time to time to be sure snow does not  
collect there.  
Open a window just a little on the side of the  
vehicle that is away from the wind. This will help  
keep CO out.  
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.  
Run your engine only as long as you must. This  
saves fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a  
little faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator  
slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get  
and it keeps the battery charged. You will need a  
well-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly  
for signaling later on with your headlamps. Let the  
heater run for a while.  
4-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost  
all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine again  
and repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable  
from the cold. But do it as little as possible. Preserve the  
fuel as long as you can. To help keep warm, you can get  
out of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises  
every half hour or so until help comes.  
{CAUTION:  
If you let your tires spin at high speed, they can  
explode, and you or others could be injured.  
And, the transaxle or other parts of the vehicle  
can overheat. That could cause an engine  
compartment fire or other damage. When you  
are stuck, spin the wheels as little as possible.  
Do not spin the wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h)  
as shown on the speedometer.  
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,  
Mud, Ice or Snow  
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will  
need to spin the wheels, but you do not want to  
spin your wheels too fast. The method known as rocking  
can help you get out when you are stuck, but you  
must use caution.  
Notice: Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of  
your vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the  
wheels too fast while shifting your transaxle back  
and forth, you can destroy your transaxle. See  
For information about using tire chains on your vehicle,  
see Tire Chains on page 5-70.  
4-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out  
Loading Your Vehicle  
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That  
will clear the area around your front wheels. You should  
turn your traction control system off. See Traction  
Control System (TCS) on page 4-9. Then shift back and  
forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward gear,  
spinning the wheels as little as possible. Release the  
accelerator pedal while you shift, and press lightly on the  
accelerator pedal when the transaxle is in gear. By  
slowly spinning your wheels in the forward and reverse  
directions, you will cause a rocking motion that may  
free your vehicle. If that does not get you out after a few  
tries, you may need to be towed out. If you do need  
to be towed out, see Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-37.  
It is very important to know how much weight your  
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle  
capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants,  
cargo, and all nonfactory-installed options. Two labels  
on your vehicle show how much weight it may properly  
carry, the Tire and Loading Information label and the  
Certification label.  
{CAUTION:  
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the  
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either  
the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight  
Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on your  
vehicle can break, and it can change the way  
your vehicle handles. These could cause you  
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading  
can shorten the life of your vehicle.  
4-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The Tire and Loading Information label also shows the  
tire size of the original equipment tires (C) and the  
recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D). For more  
information on tires and inflation see Tires on page 5-49  
and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-56.  
Tire and Loading Information Label  
There is also important loading information on the  
Certification label. It tells you the Gross Vehicle Weight  
Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight Rating  
(GAWR) for the front and rear axle; see “Certification  
Label” later in this section.  
If you have a Professional Vehicle, a Tire and Loading  
Information label specific to your vehicle will be  
provided and installed by the final body manufacturer.  
The Tire and Loading Information label, should be  
attached to the B-pillar of your vehicle. See the final  
stage manufacturer’s manual or contact them directly.  
The label shows the original tires installed on your  
professional vehicle and the recommended cold  
tire inflation pressures for those tires. The label also  
tells you the professional vehicle’s capacity weight.  
Label Example  
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information label is  
attached to the vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar). With  
the driver’s door open, you will find the label attached  
below the door lock post (striker). The tire and  
loading information label shows the number of occupant  
seating positions (A), and the maximum vehicle  
capacity weight (B) in kilograms and pounds.  
4-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit  
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight  
of occupants and cargo should never exceed  
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.  
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and  
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.  
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and  
passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.  
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of  
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if  
the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs and there will be  
five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount  
of available cargo and luggage load capacity is  
650 lbs (1400 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).  
Example 1  
Description  
Vehicle Capacity Weight  
for Example 1 =  
Item  
Total  
A
1,000 lbs (453 kg)  
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and  
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight  
may not safely exceed the available cargo  
Subtract Occupant  
Weight 150 lbs  
(68 kg) × 2 =  
Available Occupant and  
Cargo Weight =  
B
C
300 lbs (136 kg)  
700 lbs (317 kg)  
and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.  
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load from  
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.  
Consult this manual to determine how this reduces  
the available cargo and luggage load capacity of  
your vehicle.  
If your vehicle can tow a trailer, see “Towing a  
Trailer” for important information on towing a trailer,  
towing safety rules, and trailering tips.  
4-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Example 2  
Description  
Example 3  
Description  
Item  
Total  
Item  
Total  
Vehicle Capacity Weight  
for Example 2 =  
Vehicle Capacity Weight  
for Example 3 =  
A
1,000 lbs (453 kg)  
A
1,000 lbs (453 kg)  
Subtract Occupant  
Weight 150 lbs  
(68 kg) × 5 =  
Available Cargo  
Weight =  
Subtract Occupant  
Weight 200 lbs  
(91 kg) × 5 =  
Available Cargo  
Weight =  
B
C
750 lbs (340 kg)  
250 lbs (113 kg)  
B
C
1,000 lbs (453 kg)  
0 lbs (0 kg)  
Refer to your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Information  
label for specific information about your vehicle’s  
capacity weight and seating positions. The combined  
weight of the driver, passengers, and cargo should  
never exceed your vehicle’s capacity weight.  
4-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If your vehicle is a Professional Vehicle, the vehicle  
specific Certification label is provided by the final stage  
manufacturer. The coach-builder should be consulted  
if the final stage manufacturer’s label is not present. The  
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR label should be  
on the driver’s door edge.  
Certification Label  
If you do have a heavy load, you should spread it out.  
Do not carry more than 194 lbs (88 kg) in the trunk  
of your non-professional vehicle.  
{CAUTION:  
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the  
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either  
the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight  
Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on your  
vehicle can break, and it can change the way  
your vehicle handles. These could cause you  
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading  
can shorten the life of your vehicle.  
A vehicle specific Certification label is attached to the  
rear edge of the driver’s door. This label shows the  
gross weight capacity of your vehicle, called the Gross  
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes  
the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel, and cargo.  
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the  
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the  
front or rear axle.  
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause  
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your  
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.  
4-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If you put things inside your vehicle, like suitcases,  
tools, packages, or anything else, they will go as fast as  
the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly,  
or if there is a crash, they will keep going.  
Automatic Level Control  
This feature keeps the rear of your vehicle level as the  
load changes. It is automatic, you do not need to  
adjust anything.  
This type of level control is fully automatic and will  
provide a better leveled riding position as well as better  
handling under a variety of passenger and loading  
conditions. An air compressor connected to the rear  
shocks will raise or lower the rear of the vehicle  
to maintain proper vehicle height. The system is  
activated when the ignition key is turned to RUN and  
will automatically adjust vehicle height thereafter.  
The system may exhaust (lower vehicle height) for up to  
ten minutes after the ignition key has been turned to  
OFF. You may hear the air compressor operating when  
the height is being adjusted.  
{CAUTION:  
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike  
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or  
in a crash.  
Put things in the trunk of your vehicle. In a  
trunk, put them as far forward as you can.  
Try to spread the weight evenly.  
Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,  
inside the vehicle so that some of them  
are above the tops of the seats.  
Do not leave an unsecured child restraint  
in your vehicle.  
When you carry something inside the  
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.  
4-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Here are some important things to consider before you  
do recreational vehicle towing:  
Towing  
What is the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?  
Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s  
recommendations.  
Towing Your Vehicle  
Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if  
you need to have your disabled vehicle towed. See  
Roadside Service on page 7-6.  
How far will you tow? Some vehicles have  
restrictions on how far and how long they can tow.  
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle  
for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),  
see Recreational Vehicle Towing following.  
Do you have the proper towing equipment?  
See your dealer or trailering professional for  
additional advice and equipment recommendations.  
Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as you  
would prepare your vehicle for a long trip, you  
will want to make sure your vehicle is prepared to  
on page 4-23.  
Recreational Vehicle Towing  
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle  
behind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome.  
The two most common types of recreational vehicle  
towing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing your  
vehicle with all four wheels on the ground) and “dolly  
towing” (towing your vehicle with two wheels on  
the ground and two wheels up on a device known  
as a “dolly”).  
Dinghy Towing  
Notice: If you tow your vehicle with all four wheels  
on the ground, the drivetrain components could  
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by  
your warranty. Do not tow your vehicle with all  
four wheels on the ground.  
With the proper preparation and equipment, many  
vehicles can be towed in these ways. See “Dinghy  
Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.  
Your vehicle was not designed to be towed with all  
four wheels on the ground. If your vehicle must  
be towed, you should use a dolly. See “Dolly Towing”  
later in this section for more information.  
4-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Dolly Towing  
Towing a Trailer  
The Cadillac Professional Vehicle cannot tow a trailer.  
{CAUTION:  
If you do not use the correct equipment and  
drive properly, you can lose control when you  
pull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too  
heavy, the brakes may not work well — or even  
at all. You and your passengers could be  
seriously injured. You may also damage your  
vehicle; the resulting repairs would not be  
covered by your warranty. Pull a trailer only if  
you have followed all the steps in this section.  
Ask your dealer for advice and information  
about towing a trailer with your vehicle.  
Your vehicle can be towed using a dolly. To tow your  
vehicle using a dolly, follow these steps:  
1. Put the front wheels on the dolly.  
2. Put the vehicle in PARK (P).  
Your vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with the  
proper trailer towing equipment. To identify the trailering  
capacity of your vehicle, you should read the information  
in “Weight of the Trailer” that appears later in this  
section. Trailering is different than just driving your  
vehicle by itself. Trailering means changes in handling,  
durability and fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering  
takes correct equipment, and it has to be used properly.  
3. Set the parking brake and then remove the key.  
4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead  
position.  
5. Release the parking brake.  
4-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
That is the reason for this part. In it are many  
time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules.  
Many of these are important for your safety and that of  
your passengers. So please read this section carefully  
before you pull a trailer.  
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 1,000 miles  
(1 600 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,  
axle or other parts could be damaged.  
Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you  
tow a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)  
and do not make starts at full throttle. This  
helps your engine and other parts of your vehicle  
wear in at the heavier loads.  
Load-pulling components such as the engine, transaxle,  
wheel assemblies and tires are forced to work harder  
against the drag of the added weight. The engine  
is required to operate at relatively higher speeds and  
under greater loads, generating extra heat. What  
is more, the trailer adds considerably to wind resistance,  
increasing the pulling requirements.  
Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer.  
Do not drive faster than the maximum posted  
speed for trailers, or no more than 55 mph  
(90 km/h), to save wear on your vehicle’s parts.  
If You Do Decide To Pull a Trailer  
Three important considerations have to do with weight:  
The weight of the trailer  
If you do, here are some important points:  
There are many different laws, including speed limit  
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure  
your rig will be legal, not only where you live  
The weight of the trailer tongue  
The total weight on your vehicle’s tires  
but also where you will be driving. A good source  
for this information can be state or provincial police.  
Consider using a sway control. You can ask a hitch  
dealer about sway controls.  
4-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or  
advice, or you can write us at:  
Weight of the Trailer  
How heavy can a trailer safely be?  
Cadillac Customer Assistance Center  
Cadillac Motor Car Division  
P.O. Box 33169  
It should never weigh more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg).  
These are total maximum weights including the load. But  
even that can be too heavy.  
Detroit, MI 48232-5169  
In Canada, write to:  
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For  
example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside  
temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull  
a trailer are all important. It can also depend on any  
special equipment that you have on your vehicle,  
and the amount of tongue weight the vehicle can carry.  
See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue” later in this  
section for more information.  
General Motors of Canada Limited  
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005  
1908 Colonel Sam Drive  
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7  
Weight of the Trailer Tongue  
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight  
to measure because it affects the total or gross weight  
of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)  
includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you  
may carry in it, and the people who will be riding in  
the vehicle. And if you tow a trailer, you must add the  
tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle will  
be carrying that weight, too. See Loading Your Vehicle  
on page 4-31 for more information about your  
vehicle’s maximum load capacity.  
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the  
driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required  
trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional  
equipment, passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle  
must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight.  
4-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Hitches  
It is important to have the correct hitch equipment.  
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are  
a few reasons why you will need the right hitch. Here  
are some rules to follow:  
The rear bumper on your vehicle is not intended for  
hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or other  
bumper-type hitches to it. Use only a frame-mounted  
hitch that does not attach to the bumper.  
Will you have to make any holes in the body of your  
vehicle when you install a trailer hitch? If you do, then  
be sure to seal the holes later when you remove the  
hitch. If you do not seal them, deadly carbon  
monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can get into your  
vehicle. See Engine Exhaust on page 2-33. Dirt and  
water can, too.  
If you are using a weight-carrying hitch or a  
weight-distributing hitch, the trailer tongue (A) should  
weigh 10 to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer  
weight (B).  
After you have loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and  
then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are  
proper. If they are not, you may be able to get them right  
simply by moving some items around in the trailer.  
Safety Chains  
You should always attach chains between your vehicle  
and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue  
of the trailer so that the tongue will not drop to the road if  
it becomes separated from the hitch. Instructions about  
safety chains may be provided by the hitch manufacturer  
or by the trailer manufacturer. Follow the manufacturer’s  
recommendation for attaching safety chains and do not  
attach them to the bumper. Always leave just enough  
slack so you can turn with your rig. And, never allow  
safety chains to drag on the ground.  
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires  
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limit  
for cold tires. You will find these numbers on the Tire  
and Loading Information Label. See Loading Your  
Vehicle on page 4-31. Then be sure you do not go over  
the GVW limit for your vehicle, including the weight  
of the trailer tongue.  
4-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Trailer Brakes  
Following Distance  
Because your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, do not try to  
tap into your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system. If you  
do, both brake systems will not work well, or at all.  
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as  
you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer.  
This can help you avoid situations that require  
heavy braking and sudden turns.  
Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailer  
brakes so you will be able to maintain them properly.  
Passing  
Driving with a Trailer  
You will need more passing distance up ahead when  
you are towing a trailer. And, because the vehicle  
is a good deal longer, you will need to go much farther  
beyond the passed vehicle before you can return to  
your lane.  
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.  
Before setting out for the open road, you will want to  
get to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of  
handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer.  
And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are  
driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as  
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.  
Backing Up  
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.  
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand  
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your  
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,  
have someone guide you.  
Before you start, check the trailer hitch and platform,  
parts and attachments, safety chains, electrical  
connector, lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the  
trailer has electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer  
moving and then apply the trailer brake controller  
by hand to be sure the brakes are working. This lets  
you check your electrical connection at the same time.  
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that  
the load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer  
brakes are still working.  
4-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making Turns  
Driving on Grades  
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start  
down a long or steep downgrade. If you do not shift  
down, you might have to use your brakes so much that  
they would get hot and no longer work well.  
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering  
could cause the trailer to come in contact with the  
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid  
making very sharp turns while trailering.  
On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce your  
speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reduce the  
possibility of the engine and the transmission  
overheating.  
When you are turning with a trailer, make wider turns  
than normal. Do this so your trailer will not strike  
soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other  
objects. Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal  
well in advance.  
Parking on Hills  
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer  
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle may need a  
different turn signal flasher and/or extra wiring. Check  
with your dealer. The arrows on your instrument  
panel will flash whenever you signal a turn or lane  
change. Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps will also  
flash, telling other drivers you are about to turn,  
change lanes or stop.  
{CAUTION:  
You really should not park your vehicle, with a  
trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes  
wrong, your rig could start to move. People  
can be injured, and both your vehicle and the  
trailer can be damaged.  
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument  
panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer  
are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind  
you are seeing your signal when they are not. It  
is important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer  
bulbs are still working.  
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here is  
how to do it:  
1. Apply your regular brakes, but do not shift into  
PARK (P).  
2. Have someone place chocks behind the  
trailer wheels.  
4-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the  
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.  
Maintenance When Trailer Towing  
Your vehicle will need service more often when you are  
pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for  
more on this. Things that are especially important in  
trailer operation are automatic transaxle fluid (do  
not overfill), engine oil, drive belt, cooling system and  
brake system. Each of these is covered in this manual,  
and the Index will help you find them quickly. If you  
are trailering, it is a good idea to review this information  
before you start your trip.  
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then shift into  
PARK (P) firmly and apply your parking brake.  
5. Release the regular brakes.  
When You Are Ready to Leave After  
Parking on a Hill  
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down  
while you:  
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts  
are tight.  
Start your engine,  
Shift into a gear, and  
Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing  
Make sure the parking brake has released.  
2. Let up on the brake pedal.  
Your cooling system may temporarily overheat during  
severe operating conditions. See Engine Overheating on  
page 5-25.  
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.  
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store  
the chocks.  
4-44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5  
Service and Appearance Care  
5-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Section 5  
Service and Appearance Care  
5-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Accessories and Modifications  
Service  
When you add non-GM accessories to your vehicle they  
can affect your vehicle’s performance and safety,  
including such things as, braking, stability, ride and  
handling, emissions systems, aerodynamics, durability,  
and electronic systems like antilock brakes, traction  
control and stability control. Some of these accessories  
may even cause malfunction or damage not covered  
by warranty.  
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to  
be happy with it. We hope you will go to your dealer  
for all your service needs. You will get genuine GM parts  
and GM-trained and supported service people.  
We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.  
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:  
GM Accessories are designed to complement and  
function with other systems on your vehicle. Your  
GM dealer can accessorize your vehicle using genuine  
GM Accessories. When you go to your GM dealer  
and ask for GM Accessories, you will know that  
GM-trained and supported service technicians will  
perform the work using genuine GM Accessories.  
California Proposition 65 Warning  
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or  
emit chemicals known to the State of California to  
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive  
harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems  
(including some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and  
some component wear by-products contain and/or emit  
these chemicals.  
5-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If you want to do some of your own service work, you  
will want to use the proper service manual. It tells  
you much more about how to service your vehicle than  
this manual can. To order the proper service manual,  
page 7-14.  
Doing Your Own Service Work  
{CAUTION:  
You can be injured and your vehicle could be  
damaged if you try to do service work on a  
vehicle without knowing enough about it.  
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to  
do your own service work, see Servicing Your  
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-70.  
Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,  
experience, the proper replacement parts,  
and tools before you attempt any vehicle  
maintenance task.  
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list  
the mileage and the date of any service work you  
perform. See Maintenance Record on page 6-14.  
Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, and  
other fasteners. English and metric  
fasteners can be easily confused. If you  
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later  
break or fall off. You could be hurt.  
5-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Adding Equipment to the Outside of Gasoline Octane  
Your Vehicle  
Use premium unleaded gasoline with a posted octane  
rating of 91 or higher. You may also use regular  
unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher, but  
your vehicle’s acceleration may be slightly reduced, and  
you may notice a slight audible knocking noise,  
commonly referred to as spark knock. If the octane is  
less than 87, you may notice a heavy knocking  
noise when you drive. If this occurs, use a gasoline  
rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible.  
Otherwise, you might damage your engine. If you are  
using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher and you hear  
heavy knocking, your engine needs service.  
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can  
affect the airflow around it. This may cause wind  
noise and affect windshield washer performance. Check  
with your dealer before adding equipment to the  
outside of your vehicle.  
Fuel  
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the  
proper maintenance of your vehicle.  
5-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Gasoline Specifications  
Additives  
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM  
specification D 4814 in the United States or  
CAN/CGSB-3.5 in Canada. Some gasolines may  
contain an octane-enhancing additive called  
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).  
General Motors recommends against the use of  
gasolines containing MMT. See Additives on page 5-6  
for additional information.  
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States  
are now required to contain additives that will help  
prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming,  
allowing your emission control system to work  
properly. In most cases, you should not have to add  
anything to your fuel. However, some gasolines contain  
only the minimum amount of additive required to  
meet U.S. Environmental Protection Agency regulations.  
To help keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean,  
or if your vehicle experiences problems due to  
dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline that is  
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. Also, your  
GM dealer has additives that will help correct and  
prevent most deposit-related problems.  
California Fuel  
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions  
Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that  
meet California specifications. See the underhood  
emission control label. If this fuel is not available  
in states adopting California emissions standards, your  
vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting  
federal specifications, but emission control system  
performance may be affected. The malfunction indicator  
lamp may turn on and your vehicle may fail a  
smog-check test. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on  
page 3-66. If this occurs, return to your authorized  
GM dealer for diagnosis. If it is determined that  
the condition is caused by the type of fuel used, repairs  
may not be covered by your warranty.  
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and  
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be available in  
your area. General Motors recommends that you use  
these gasolines if they comply with the specifications  
described earlier. However, E85 (85% ethanol)  
and other fuels containing more than 10% ethanol must  
not be used in vehicles that were not designed for  
those fuels.  
5-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that  
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing  
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel  
system and also damage the plastic and rubber  
parts. That damage would not be covered under  
your warranty.  
Fuels in Foreign Countries  
If you plan on driving in another country outside the  
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard  
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel  
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly  
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not  
be covered by your warranty.  
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low  
emissions may contain an octane-enhancing additive  
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl  
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline  
whether the fuel contains MMT. General Motors  
recommends against the use of such gasolines. Fuels  
containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs  
and the performance of the emission control system may  
be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may turn  
on. If this occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for  
service.  
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or  
contact a major oil company that does business in the  
country where you will be driving.  
5-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Filling the Tank  
{CAUTION:  
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can  
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to  
you and others, read and follow all the  
instructions on the pump island. Turn off your  
engine when you are refueling. Do not smoke  
if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle.  
Keep sparks, flames, and smoking materials  
away from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump  
unattended when refueling your vehicle — this  
is against the law in some places. Keep  
children away from the fuel pump; never let  
children pump fuel.  
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel  
door on the driver’s side of the vehicle.  
To open the fuel door, apply pressure in the center of  
the rear edge of the fuel door and it will pop open.  
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise.  
The fuel cap has a spring in it; if the cap is released  
too soon, it will spring back to the right.  
While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from the  
hook on the fuel door.  
5-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The TIGHTEN GAS CAP message will be displayed on  
the Driver Information Center (DIC) if the fuel cap is  
not properly installed. See DIC Warnings and Messages  
on page 3-76 for more information.  
{CAUTION:  
If you spill fuel and then something ignites it,  
you could be badly burned. Fuel can spray out  
on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly.  
This spray can happen if your tank is nearly  
full, and is more likely in hot weather. Open  
the fuel cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise  
to stop. Then unscrew the cap all the way.  
{CAUTION:  
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not  
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by  
shutting off the pump or by notifying the  
station attendant. Leave the area immediately.  
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the  
tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished  
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel  
from painted surfaces as soon as possible. See  
Washing Your Vehicle on page 5-86.  
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get  
the right type. Your dealer can get one for you.  
If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly.  
This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to  
light and may damage your fuel tank and emissions  
page 3-66.  
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until it  
clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. The  
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has  
been left off or improperly installed. This would allow fuel  
to evaporate into the atmosphere. See Malfunction  
Indicator Lamp on page 3-66.  
5-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Filling a Portable Fuel Container  
Checking Things Under  
the Hood  
{CAUTION:  
{CAUTION:  
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in  
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from  
the container can ignite the gasoline vapor.  
You can be badly burned and your vehicle  
damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury to  
you and others:  
An electric fan under the hood can start up  
and injure you even when the engine is not  
running. Keep hands, clothing and tools away  
from any underhood electric fan.  
Dispense gasoline only into approved  
containers.  
Do not fill a container while it is inside a  
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed, or  
on any surface other than the ground.  
Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the  
inside of the fill opening before operating  
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained  
until the filling is complete.  
{CAUTION:  
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts  
and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,  
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and  
other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or  
others could be burned. Be careful not to drop  
or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.  
Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.  
5-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Hood Release  
To lift the hood, use the following steps:  
1. Pull the hood release  
lever with this symbol  
on it. It is located  
on the lower left side of  
the instrument panel.  
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and find the  
secondary hood release lever, located near the  
center of the hood. Move the release lever up and  
to the right to raise the hood.  
Before closing the hood, be sure all filler caps are on  
properly. Then pull the hood down and close it firmly.  
5-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Engine Compartment Overview  
When you open the hood, here is what you will see:  
4.6L L37 Engine shown, 4.6L LD8 Engine similar  
5-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood Fuse Block  
on page 5-93.  
Engine Oil  
If the ENGINE OIL LOW ADD OIL message appears on  
the Driver Information Center (DIC), it means you  
need to check your engine oil level right away. See  
“ENGINE OIL LOW ADD OIL” under DIC Warnings and  
Messages on page 3-76.  
B. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting on  
page 5-39.  
C. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding  
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid  
on page 5-34.  
You should check your engine oil level regularly; this is  
an added reminder.  
D. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap. See  
and Cooling System on page 5-28.  
Checking Engine Oil  
E. Power Steering Fluid. See Power Steering Fluid on  
page 5-33.  
It is a good idea to check your engine oil every time you  
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil  
must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.  
F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”  
under Engine Oil on page 5-13.  
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See  
Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for  
the location of the engine oil dipstick.  
G. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”  
under Engine Oil on page 5-13.  
H. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”  
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes  
to drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this,  
the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.  
under Brakes on page 5-35.  
I. Automatic Transaxle Fluid Cap and Dipstick (Out of  
View). See Automatic Transaxle Fluid on page 5-19.  
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel  
or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it  
again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.  
J. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air  
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-18.  
5-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Overview on page 5-12 for  
the location of the  
When to Add Engine Oil  
engine oil fill cap.  
Turn the cap counterclockwise to remove it.  
If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the tip of  
the dipstick, you will need to add at least one quart/liter  
of oil. But you must use the right kind. This section  
explains what kind of oil to use. For engine oil crankcase  
page 5-101.  
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere  
in the proper operating range in the cross-hatched  
area. Push the dipstick all the way back in when you  
are through.  
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine has  
so much oil that the oil level gets above the  
cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating  
range, the engine could be damaged.  
5-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
These numbers on an oil container show its  
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity  
oils such as SAE 20W-50.  
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use  
Oils meeting these  
requirements should also  
have the starburst  
symbol on the container.  
This symbol indicates  
that the oil has been  
certified by the American  
Petroleum Institute (API).  
You should look for this information on the oil container,  
and use only those oils that are identified as meeting  
GM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst symbol  
on the front of the oil container.  
Look for two things:  
GM6094M  
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting  
GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American  
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines  
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended  
oil can result in engine damage not covered by  
your warranty.  
Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GM  
Standard GM6094M. You should look for and use  
only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.  
SAE 5W-30  
GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirements for  
your vehicle.  
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is best  
for your vehicle.  
5-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the  
temperature falls below 20°F (29°C), it is  
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30  
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will provide  
easier cold starting and better protection for your engine  
at extremely low temperatures.  
When the system has calculated that oil life has been  
diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is  
necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message in  
the Driver Information Center (DIC) will come on.  
Change your oil as soon as possible within the next  
600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are  
driving under the best conditions, the oil life system may  
not indicate that an oil change is necessary for over a  
year. However, the engine oil and filter must be changed  
at least once a year and at this time the system must  
be reset. Your dealer has GM-trained people who  
will perform this work using genuine GM parts and reset  
the system. It is also important to check the oil  
Engine Oil Additives  
Do not add anything to your oil. The recommended oils  
with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard  
GM6094M are all you will need for good performance  
and engine protection.  
regularly and keep it at the proper level.  
Engine Oil Life System  
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must  
change the oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since the last  
oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system  
whenever the oil is changed.  
When to Change Engine Oil  
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know  
when to change the engine oil and filter. This is  
based on engine revolutions and engine temperature,  
and not on mileage. Based on driving conditions,  
the mileage at which an oil change will be indicated can  
vary considerably. For the oil life system to work  
properly, you must reset the system every time the  
oil is changed.  
5-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
How to Reset the Engine Oil  
Life System  
What to Do with Used Oil  
Used engine oil contains certain elements that may be  
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.  
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean  
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good  
hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or  
rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s  
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.  
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change  
the engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Anytime  
the oil is changed, reset the system so it can calculate  
when the next oil change is required. If a situation  
occurs where you change the oil prior to a CHANGE  
ENGINE OIL SOON message in the Driver Information  
Center (DIC) being turned on, reset the system.  
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you  
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the  
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it in  
the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into  
streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by taking it  
to a place that collects used oil. If you have a problem  
properly disposing of used oil, ask your dealer, a service  
station, or a local recycling center for help.  
After the oil has been changed, the CHANGE ENGINE  
OIL SOON message must be reset. To reset the  
message, do the following:  
1. Turn the key to the ON position without starting  
the engine.  
2. Press the INFO button on the Driver Information  
Center (DIC) until OIL LIFE REMAINING is  
displayed. See DIC Controls and Displays on  
page 3-72.  
3. Press and hold the INFO RESET button until  
100% is displayed. This resets the oil life indicator.  
4. Turn the key to OFF.  
If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes  
back on when you start your vehicle, the engine oil  
life system has not reset. Repeat the procedure.  
5-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To inspect or replace the filter, do the following:  
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter  
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for  
the location of the engine air cleaner/filter.  
When to Inspect the Engine Air  
Cleaner/Filter  
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II  
intervals and replace it at the first oil change after each  
50,000 mile (83 000 km) interval. See Scheduled  
Maintenance on page 6-4 for more information. If you  
are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter  
at each engine oil change.  
How to Inspect the Engine Air  
Cleaner/Filter  
1. Loosen and remove the two screws on the top of  
the engine air cleaner/filter cover.  
To inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the filter from  
the vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release  
loose dust and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt, a  
new filter is required.  
2. Lift up the outboard side of the cover at an angle  
while pulling toward you. This is necessary due to  
the two hinges located on the inboard side of  
the cover.  
3. Remove the engine air cleaner/filter element and  
any loose debris that may be found in the air  
cleaner base.  
4. Inspect or replace the air filter element.  
5-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Follow these steps to reinstall the cover to the engine  
air cleaner/filter housing:  
Automatic Transaxle Fluid  
1. Align the two hinges located on the inboard side of  
the cover.  
2. Push the cover slightly down and towards the  
engine to engage the tabs in the hinges and  
align the two screws.  
When to Check and Change Automatic  
Transaxle Fluid  
A good time to check your automatic transaxle fluid  
level is when the engine oil is changed.  
3. Tighten the two screws on the top of the engine air  
cleaner/filter housing cover.  
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in  
Additional Required Services on page 6-6, and be sure  
to use the transaxle fluid listed in Recommended  
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.  
{CAUTION:  
How to Check Automatic  
Transaxle Fluid  
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter  
off can cause you or others to be burned. The  
air cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to  
stop flames if the engine backfires. If it is  
not there and the engine backfires, you could  
be burned. Do not drive with it off, and be  
careful working on the engine with the air  
cleaner/filter off.  
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may  
choose to have this done at the dealership service  
department.  
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions  
here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.  
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage the  
transaxle. Too much can mean that some of the  
fluid could come out and fall on hot engine or  
exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Too little fluid  
could cause the transaxle to overheat. Be sure  
to get an accurate reading if you check the  
transaxle fluid.  
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can  
cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can  
easily get into your engine, which will damage it.  
Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when  
you are driving.  
5-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the transaxle  
fluid level if you have been driving:  
3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift  
lever through each gear range, pausing for about  
three seconds in each range. Then, position  
the shift lever in PARK (P).  
When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C).  
At high speed for quite a while.  
4. Let the engine run at idle for three to five minutes.  
In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.  
While pulling a trailer.  
Then, without shutting off the engine, follow  
these steps:  
The transaxle fluid cap is located next to the radiator  
hose and below the engine air cleaner/filter assembly on  
the driver’s side of the vehicle, and is marked TRANS  
page 5-12 for more information on location.  
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal  
operating temperature, which is 180°F to 200°F  
(82°C to 93°C).  
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about  
15 miles (24 km) when outside temperatures are  
above 50°F (10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C),  
you may have to drive longer.  
1. After removing the engine air cleaner/filter assembly  
to reach the transaxle fluid cap, turn the cap  
counterclockwise to remove. Pull out the dipstick  
and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.  
Checking the Fluid Level  
2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds, and  
then pull it back out again.  
Prepare you vehicle as follows:  
1. Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine  
running.  
2. With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever  
in PARK (P).  
5-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
How to Add Automatic Transaxle Fluid  
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine  
what kind of transaxle fluid to use. See Recommended  
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.  
If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper  
fluid to bring the level into the cross-hatched area on  
the dipstick.  
1. Pull out the dipstick.  
2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid at the  
dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level.  
It does not take much fluid, generally less than  
one pint (0.5 L). Do not overfill.  
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transaxle  
fluid may damage your vehicle, and the damages  
may not be covered by your warranty. Always  
use the automatic transaxle fluid listed in  
3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the  
lower level. The fluid level must be in the  
cross-hatched area.  
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push  
the dipstick back in all the way and turn the  
handle clockwise. Reinstall the engine air  
cleaner/filter assembly.  
3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as  
described under “How to Check Automatic  
Transaxle Fluid,” earlier in this section.  
4. When the correct fluid level is obtained, push  
the dipstick back in all the way and turn the  
handle clockwise.  
5-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may  
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator  
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may  
require changing sooner, at the first maintenance  
service after each 25,000 miles (41 500 km) or  
24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs  
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use  
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.  
Engine Coolant  
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with  
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed  
to remain in your vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles  
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only  
DEX-COOL® extended life coolant.  
The following explains your cooling system and how to  
add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem  
with engine overheating, see Engine Overheating on  
page 5-25.  
What to Use  
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and  
one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which will not damage  
aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you do  
not need to add anything else.  
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and  
DEX-COOL® coolant will:  
Giving freezing protection down to 34°F (37°C).  
Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).  
Protect against rust and corrosion.  
Help keep the proper engine temperature.  
Let the warning lights and gages work as  
they should.  
5-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture,  
your engine could overheat and be badly damaged.  
The repair cost would not be covered by your  
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze  
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and  
other parts.  
{CAUTION:  
Adding only plain water to your cooling  
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or  
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil  
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your  
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the  
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the  
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot  
but you would not get the overheat warning.  
Your engine could catch fire and you or others  
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,  
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.  
If you have to add coolant more than two times a year,  
have your dealer check your cooling system.  
Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/or additives  
in your vehicle’s cooling system, you could  
damage your vehicle. Use only the proper mixture  
of the engine coolant listed in this manual for  
the cooling system. See Recommended Fluids and  
Lubricants on page 6-12 for more information.  
5-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Checking Coolant  
{CAUTION:  
The engine coolant surge  
tank is located toward the  
rear of the engine  
compartment on the  
passenger’s side of  
the vehicle.  
Turning the surge tank pressure cap when the  
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam  
and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you  
badly. Never turn the surge tank pressure  
cap — even a little — when the engine and  
radiator are hot.  
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your  
engine is cold, the coolant level should be at the FULL  
COLD mark, located on the side of the surge tank  
that faces the engine.  
For more information on location, see Engine  
Compartment Overview on page 5-12.  
5-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adding Coolant  
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap  
If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL®  
coolant mixture at the coolant surge tank, but only  
when the engine is cool.  
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly  
installed, coolant loss and possible engine  
damage may occur. Be sure the cap is properly  
and tightly secured.  
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for  
more information on location.  
{CAUTION:  
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot  
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,  
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot  
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.  
Engine Overheating  
You will find an ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE  
message or an ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP  
ENGINE message displayed in the Driver Information  
on page 3-76 for more information. You will also  
hear a chime.  
When replacing the pressure cap, make sure to turn the  
cap until it clicks.  
There is also an engine temperature warning light  
and/or gage on the instrument panel cluster. See Engine  
5-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Notice: If your engine catches fire because you  
keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can be  
badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be  
covered by your warranty. See Overheated Engine  
Protection Operating Mode on page 5-27 for  
information on driving to a safe place in an  
emergency.  
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine  
{CAUTION:  
Steam from an overheated engine can burn  
you badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay  
away from the engine if you see or hear steam  
coming from it. Just turn it off and get  
If No Steam Is Coming From  
Your Engine  
everyone away from the vehicle until it cools  
down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or  
coolant before you open the hood.  
An overheat warning, along with a low coolant message,  
can indicate a serious problem.  
If you get an engine overheat warning with no low  
coolant message, but see or hear no steam, the problem  
may not be too serious. Sometimes the engine can  
get a little too hot when you:  
If you keep driving when your engine is  
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You  
or others could be badly burned. Stop your  
engine if it overheats, and get out of the  
vehicle until the engine is cool.  
Climb a long hill on a hot day.  
Stop after high-speed driving.  
Idle for long periods in traffic.  
Tow a trailer.  
Mode on page 5-27 for information on driving  
to a safe place in an emergency.  
5-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,  
try this for a minute or so:  
Overheated Engine Protection  
Operating Mode  
1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in NEUTRAL (N)  
while stopped. If it safe to do so, pull off the road,  
shift to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and let the  
engine idle.  
If an overheated engine condition exists and the  
message ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE is  
displayed, an overheat protection mode which alternates  
firing groups of cylinders helps prevent engine damage.  
In this mode, you will notice a loss in power and  
engine performance. This operating mode allows your  
vehicle to be driven to a safe place in an emergency.  
Driving extended miles (km) and/or towing a trailer in the  
overheat protection mode should be avoided.  
2. Set the climate controls to the highest heat setting  
and fan speed and open the windows as necessary.  
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you  
can drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about  
10 minutes. If the warning does not come back on, you  
can drive normally.  
Notice: After driving in the overheated engine  
protection operating mode, to avoid engine damage,  
allow the engine to cool before attempting any  
repair. The engine oil will be severely degraded.  
Repair the cause of coolant loss, change the oil and  
reset the oil life system. See Engine Oil on  
page 5-13.  
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park your  
vehicle right away.  
If there is still no sign of steam, idle the engine for  
three minutes while you are parked. If you still have the  
warning, turn off the engine and get everyone out of  
the vehicle until it cools down. Also, see “Overheated  
Engine Protection Operating Mode” later in this section.  
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service  
help right away.  
5-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Cooling System  
When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is what you will see:  
4.6L L37 Engine shown, 4.6L LD8 Engine similar  
A. Coolant Surge Tank with Pressure Cap  
B. Electric Engine Cooling Fans  
5-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on, check  
to see if the electric engine cooling fans are running.  
If the engine is overheating, both fans should be  
running. If they are not, your vehicle needs service.  
{CAUTION:  
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood  
can start up even when the engine is not  
running and can injure you. Keep hands,  
clothing and tools away from any underhood  
electric fan.  
Notice: Engine damage from running your engine  
without coolant is not covered by your warranty. See  
page 5-27 for information on driving to a safe place  
in an emergency.  
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may  
cause premature engine, heater core or radiator  
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant  
may require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles  
(50 000 km) or 24 months, whichever occurs first.  
Any repairs would not be covered by your  
warranty. Always use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free)  
coolant in your vehicle.  
If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling, do  
not do anything else until it cools down. The vehicle  
should be parked on a level surface.  
{CAUTION:  
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine  
parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them. If  
you do, you can be burned.  
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you  
run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That  
could cause an engine fire, and you could be  
burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive  
the vehicle.  
5-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, add coolant  
as follows:  
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant  
Surge Tank  
If you have not found a problem yet, check to see if  
coolant is visible in the surge tank. If coolant is visible  
but the level is not at the FULL COLD mark located  
on the side of the surge tank, add enough of a  
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and  
DEX-COOL® coolant at the coolant surge tank to  
bring the level to the FULL COLD mark, but be sure  
the cooling system, including the coolant surge  
tank pressure cap (if equipped), is cool before you  
do it. See Engine Coolant on page 5-22 for more  
information.  
{CAUTION:  
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling  
system can blow out and burn you badly. They  
are under pressure, and if you turn the coolant  
surge tank pressure cap — even a little — they  
can come out at high speed. Never turn the  
cap when the cooling system, including the  
coolant surge tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait  
for the cooling system and coolant surge tank  
pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn  
the pressure cap.  
5-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
{CAUTION:  
{CAUTION:  
Adding only plain water to your cooling  
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot  
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol  
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot  
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.  
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or  
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil  
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your  
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the  
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the  
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot  
but you would not get the overheat warning.  
Your engine could catch fire and you or others  
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,  
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.  
1. You can remove the  
coolant surge tank  
pressure cap when the  
cooling system,  
including the coolant  
surge tank pressure  
cap and upper radiator  
hose, is no longer hot.  
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack  
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.  
Use the recommended coolant and the proper  
coolant mixture.  
Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise. If  
you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss means  
there is still some pressure left.  
5-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Then keep turning the cap and remove it.  
3. Fill the coolant surge  
tank with the proper  
mixture to the  
FULL COLD mark on  
the side of the  
coolant surge tank.  
4.6L L37 Engine shown, 4.6L LD8 Engine similar  
4. With the coolant surge tank cap off, start the  
engine and let it run until you can feel the upper  
radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the engine  
cooling fans.  
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant  
surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, add  
more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tank  
until the level reaches the FULL COLD mark on  
the side of the coolant surge tank.  
5. Then replace the cap. Be sure the cap is hand-tight  
and fully seated.  
5-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
How to Check Power Steering Fluid  
Power Steering Fluid  
To check the power steering fluid, do the following:  
The power steering fluid  
1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartment  
cool down.  
reservoir is located next to  
the underhood fuse  
block on the passenger’s  
side of the vehicle.  
Overview on page 5-12  
for more information  
on location.  
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.  
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a  
clean rag.  
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.  
5. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on  
the dipstick.  
The level should be at the FULL COLD mark. If  
necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the level up to  
the mark.  
When to Check Power Steering Fluid  
What to Use  
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid  
unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or  
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system  
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected  
and repaired.  
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see  
Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper  
fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.  
5-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Notice:  
Windshield Washer Fluid  
What to Use  
When using concentrated washer fluid,  
follow the manufacturer’s instructions for  
adding water.  
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read  
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will  
be operating your vehicle in an area where the  
temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has  
sufficient protection against freezing.  
Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.  
Water can cause the solution to freeze and  
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts  
of the washer system. Also, water does not  
clean as well as washer fluid.  
Adding Washer Fluid  
Fill your washer fluid tank only three-quarters  
full when it is very cold. This allows for  
expansion if freezing occurs, which could  
damage the tank if it is completely full.  
The WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID message will  
be displayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC)  
when the fluid is low. See DIC Warnings and Messages  
on page 3-76 for more information.  
Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your  
windshield washer. It can damage your washer  
system and paint.  
Open the cap with the  
washer symbol on it. Add  
washer fluid until the  
tank is full. See Engine  
on page 5-12 for  
reservoir location.  
5-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
So, it is not a good idea to top off your brake fluid.  
Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If you add fluid  
when your linings are worn, then you will have too  
much fluid when you get new brake linings. You should  
add or remove brake fluid, as necessary, only when  
work is done on the brake hydraulic system.  
Brakes  
Brake Fluid  
Your brake master cylinder  
reservoir is filled with  
DOT-3 brake fluid. See  
Overview on page 5-12  
for reservoir location  
and access.  
{CAUTION:  
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on  
the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is  
hot enough. You or others could be burned,  
and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake  
fluid only when work is done on the brake  
hydraulic system.  
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in  
the reservoir might go down. The first is that the  
brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during  
normal brake lining wear. When new linings are put in,  
the fluid level goes back up. The other reason is  
that fluid is leaking out of the brake system. If it is, you  
should have your brake system fixed, since a leak  
means that sooner or later your brakes will not work  
well, or will not work at all.  
If the ignition is on and the brake fluid is low, the  
SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM message will be displayed  
in the Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC  
Warnings and Messages on page 3-76.  
What to Add  
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake  
fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container  
page 6-12.  
5-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area  
around the cap before removing it. This will help  
keep dirt from entering the reservoir.  
Brake Wear  
Your vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.  
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make  
a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads  
are worn and new pads are needed. The sound  
may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle  
is moving, except when you are pushing on the  
brake pedal firmly.  
{CAUTION:  
With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake  
system, your brakes may not work well, or they  
may not even work at all. This could cause a  
crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.  
{CAUTION:  
Notice:  
The brake wear warning sound means that  
soon your brakes will not work well. That  
could lead to an accident. When you hear  
the brake wear warning sound, have your  
vehicle serviced.  
Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake  
system parts. For example, just a few drops of  
mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in your  
brake system can damage brake system parts so  
badly that they will have to be replaced. Do not  
let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.  
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake  
pads could result in costly brake repair.  
If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted  
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be  
careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle. If  
you do, wash it off immediately. See Washing  
Your Vehicle on page 5-86.  
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake  
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly  
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with  
your brakes.  
5-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help  
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect  
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in  
the proper sequence to GM torque specifications.  
When you replace parts of your braking system — for  
example, when your brake linings wear down and you  
need new ones put in — be sure you get new approved  
replacement parts. If you do not, your brakes may no  
longer work properly. For example, if someone puts in  
brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle, the balance  
between your front and rear brakes can change — for the  
worse. The braking performance you have come to  
expect can change in many other ways if someone puts  
in the wrong replacement brake parts.  
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete  
axle sets.  
Brake Pedal Travel  
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to  
normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in  
pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.  
Battery  
Brake Adjustment  
Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When it is  
time for a new battery, get one that has the replacement  
number shown on the original battery’s label. We  
recommend an ACDelco® replacement battery.  
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related  
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,  
chemicals known to the State of California to  
cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands  
after handling.  
Every time you apply the brakes, with or without the  
vehicle moving, your brakes adjust for wear.  
Replacing Brake System Parts  
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many  
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if  
the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your vehicle  
was designed and tested with top-quality GM brake parts.  
5-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The battery is located under the rear seat cushion. To  
access the battery, see Rear Underseat Fuse Block on  
page 5-96. You do not need to access the battery to jump  
start your vehicle. See Jump Starting on page 5-39.  
{CAUTION:  
A battery that is not properly vented can let  
sulfuric acid fumes into the area under the rear  
seat cushion. These fumes can damage your  
rear seat safety belt systems. You may not be  
able to see this damage, and the safety belts  
might not provide the protection needed in a  
crash. If a replacement battery is ever needed,  
it must be vented in the same manner as the  
original battery. Always make sure that the  
vent hose is properly reattached before  
reinstalling the seat cushion.  
To be sure the vent hose (A) is properly attached, the  
vent hose connectors (B) must be securely reattached to  
the vent outlets (C) on each side of the battery, and  
the vent assembly grommet (D) must be secured to the  
floor pan (E).  
5-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Vehicle Storage  
{CAUTION:  
If you are not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days  
or more, remove the black, negative () cable from  
the battery. This will help keep your battery from  
running down.  
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous  
because:  
They contain acid that can burn you.  
They contain gas that can explode  
or ignite.  
{CAUTION:  
They contain enough electricity to  
burn you.  
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas  
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you  
are not careful. See Jump Starting on  
page 5-39 for tips on working around a battery  
without getting hurt.  
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some  
or all of these things can hurt you.  
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly  
damage to your vehicle that would not be covered  
by your warranty.  
Jump Starting  
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it  
will not work, and it could damage your vehicle.  
If your vehicle’s battery has run down, you may want to  
use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start  
your vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do  
it safely.  
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt  
battery with a negative ground system.  
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt  
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can  
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems  
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.  
5-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables  
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching  
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground  
connection you do not want. You would not be able  
to start your vehicle and the bad grounding could  
damage the electrical systems.  
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set  
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in  
the jump start procedure. Put an automatic  
transaxle in PARK (P) or a manual transaxle in  
NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake.  
Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessories  
on during the jump starting procedure, they could  
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered  
by your warranty. Always turn off your radio and  
other accessories when jump starting your vehicle.  
4.6L LD8 Engine shown, 4.6L L37 Engine similar  
The remote positive (+) terminal is located in the  
engine compartment on the passenger’s side of the  
vehicle. Lift the red plastic cap to access the  
terminal. See Engine Compartment Overview on  
page 5-12 for more information on the location  
of the remote positive (+) terminal.  
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug  
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette  
lighter or the accessory power outlets. Turn off  
the radio and all lamps that are not needed. This  
will avoid sparks and help save both batteries. And  
it could save the radio!  
A second remote positive (+) terminal is located on  
the rear underseat fuse block.  
4. Open the hoods and locate the positive (+) and  
negative () terminal locations on the other  
vehicle. Your vehicle has a remote positive (+) jump  
starting terminal and a remote negative () jump  
starting terminal.  
The remote negative () terminal is located behind  
the power steering pulley, near the engine cover.  
It is marked GND ().  
5-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
You will not see the battery of your vehicle under  
the hood. It is located under the rear passenger’s  
seat. You will not need to access the battery  
for jump starting. The remote terminals are for that  
purpose.  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do  
not need to add water to the battery installed  
in your new vehicle. But if a battery has filler  
caps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there.  
If it is low, add water to take care of that first.  
If you do not, explosive gas could be present.  
{CAUTION:  
An electric fan can start up even when the  
engine is not running and can injure you. Keep  
hands, clothing and tools away from any  
underhood electric fan.  
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.  
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it  
in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place  
with water and get medical help immediately.  
{CAUTION:  
{CAUTION:  
Using a match near a battery can cause battery  
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing  
this, and some have been blinded. Use a  
flashlight if you need more light.  
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure  
you badly. Keep your hands away from moving  
parts once the engine is running.  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
5-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or  
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a  
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.  
8. Now connect the black negative () cable to the  
negative () terminal location of the vehicle with  
the good battery. Use a remote negative () terminal  
if the vehicle has one.  
Before you connect the cables, here are some  
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to  
positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if  
the vehicle has one. Negative () will go to a heavy,  
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote  
Do not let the other end of the cable touch anything  
until the next step. The other end of the negative ()  
cable does not go to the dead battery. It goes to  
a heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a  
remote negative () terminal on the vehicle with  
the dead battery.  
negative () terminal if the vehicle has one.  
Do not connect positive (+) to negative () or you  
will get a short that would damage the battery  
and maybe other parts too. And do not connect the  
negative () cable to the negative () terminal on  
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.  
9. Connect the other end of the negative () cable to  
the negative () terminal location on the vehicle with  
the dead battery. Your vehicle has a remote  
negative () terminal marked GND ().  
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the remote  
positive (+) terminal location on the vehicle with  
the dead battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal  
if the vehicle has one.  
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run  
the engine for a while.  
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.  
If it will not start after a few tries, it probably  
needs service.  
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to  
the positive (+) terminal location of the vehicle with  
the good battery. Use a remote positive (+)  
terminal if the vehicle has one.  
5-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or  
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may  
occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would  
not be covered by your warranty. Always connect  
and remove the jumper cables in the correct  
order, making sure that the cables do not touch  
each other or other metal.  
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, do  
the following:  
1. Disconnect the black negative () cable from the  
vehicle that had the dead battery.  
2. Disconnect the black negative () cable from the  
vehicle with the good battery.  
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the  
vehicle with the good battery.  
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the  
other vehicle.  
5. Return the remote positive (+) terminal cover to its  
original position.  
Jumper Cable Removal  
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote  
Negative () Terminal (GND)  
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote  
Negative () Terminals  
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal  
5-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The vehicle should be properly prepared as follows:  
Headlamp Aiming  
The vehicle has a visual optical headlamp aiming  
system. The aim has been preset at the factory and  
should need no further adjustment.  
The vehicle should be placed so the headlamps are  
25 ft. (7.6 m) from a light colored wall or other flat  
surface.  
The vehicle must have all four tires on a level  
surface which is level all the way to the wall or other  
flat surface.  
However, if the vehicle is damaged in an accident, the  
headlamp aim may be affected and adjustment may  
be necessary.  
The vehicle should be placed so it is perpendicular  
to the wall or other flat surface.  
If oncoming vehicles flash their high beams at you, this  
may also mean the vertical aim needs to be adjusted.  
The vehicle should not have any snow, ice, or  
mud on it.  
It is recommended that the vehicle is taken to your  
dealer for service if the headlamps need to be re-aimed.  
It is possible however, to re-aim the headlamps as  
described in the following procedure.  
The vehicle should be fully assembled and all other  
work stopped while headlamp aiming is being  
performed.  
Notice: To make sure your headlamps are aimed  
properly, read all the instructions before beginning.  
Failure to follow these instructions could cause  
damage to headlamp parts.  
The vehicle should be normally loaded with a full  
tank of fuel and one person or 160 lbs (75 kg)  
sitting on the driver’s seat.  
Tires should be properly inflated.  
The spare tire is in its original location in  
the vehicle.  
5-44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Headlamp aiming is done with the vehicle’s low-beam  
headlamps. The high-beam headlamps will be correctly  
aimed if the low-beam headlamps are aimed properly.  
3. Measure the distance from the ground to the center  
line running through the lens of the headlamp.  
Record the distance.  
4. At the wall or other flat surface, measure from the  
ground upward the recorded distance from Step 2  
and mark it.  
To adjust the vertical aim, do the following:  
1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on page 5-11  
for more information.  
5. Draw or tape a horizontal line the width of the  
vehicle at the wall or other flat surface where it  
was marked it Step 4.  
Notice: Do not cover a headlamp to improve beam  
cut-off when aiming. Covering a headlamp may  
cause excessive heat build-up which may cause  
damage to the headlamp.  
6. Turn on the low-beam headlamps and place a  
piece of cardboard or equivalent in front of the  
headlamp not being aimed. This should allow only  
the beam of light from the headlamp being  
aimed to be seen on the flat surface.  
2. Find the center line running through the lens of the  
headlamp.  
5-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. Locate the vertical headlamp aiming screws. They  
are located under the hood near each headlamp  
assembly. First lift the flap to access either of them.  
Each one is the top outboard screw by the “ V”  
on the cover panel next to the aiming flap.  
8. Turn the vertical aiming screw until the headlamp  
beam is aimed to the horizontal tape line. If you  
turn it clockwise, it will raise the beam and if  
you turn it counterclockwise, it will lower the beam.  
The top edge of the cut-off should be positioned  
at the bottom edge of the horizontal tape line.  
The adjustment screw can be turned with a 6 mm  
hex wrench.  
9. Repeat Steps 7 and 8 for the opposite headlamp.  
5-46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Bulb Replacement  
It is recommended that all bulbs be replaced by  
your dealer.  
Windshield Wiper Blade  
Replacement  
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear  
or cracking. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4  
for more information on wiper blade inspection.  
High Intensity Discharge (HID)  
Lighting  
Replacement blades come in different types and are  
removed in different ways. Here’s how to remove  
the wiper blade:  
1. Turn the engine off.  
{CAUTION:  
2. Lift the windshield wiper arm and blade away from  
the windshield.  
The low beam high intensity discharge lighting  
system operates at a very high voltage. If you  
try to service any of the system components,  
you could be seriously injured. Have your  
dealer or a qualified technician service them.  
Your vehicle has HID headlamps. After your vehicle’s  
HID headlamp bulb has been replaced, you may notice  
that the beam is a slightly different shade than it was  
originally. This is normal.  
5-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To remove and replace the wiper blade element do the  
following:  
1. The wiper blade element has two notches at  
one end which are engaged by the bottom claw set  
of the wiper blade. At the notched end of the  
wiper blade, pull the wiper blade element from the  
wiper blade assembly.  
2. To replace the element, start at the heel end of the  
wiper blade, which is the end nearest to the base of  
the wiper arm, and slide the wiper blade element,  
notched end last, into the wiper blade claw sets.  
3. Pull the clip up from the blade connecting point,  
and pull the blade assembly down toward the  
windshield to remove it from the wiper arm.  
3. To engage the last claw into the notched end of the  
wiper blade element, squeeze the wiper blade  
element at the notched area, and push the wiper  
blade element so the claw fits into the notch.  
4. Install the new wiper blade onto the wiper arm and  
firmly press down on the clip to snap it into place.  
4. Be sure the two wiper blade element notches are  
engaged by the last claw set, and that all the other  
claws are properly engaged in the slots of the  
wiper blade element on both sides.  
5-48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
{CAUTION:  
Poorly maintained and improperly used  
tires are dangerous.  
Overloading your tires can cause  
overheating as a result of too much  
friction. You could have an air-out and a  
serious accident. See Loading Your  
Vehicle on page 4-31.  
Underinflated tires pose the same danger  
as overloaded tires. The resulting accident  
could cause serious injury. Check all tires  
frequently to maintain the recommended  
pressure. Tire pressure should be checked  
when your tires are cold.  
A. Correct Installation  
B. Incorrect Installation  
For the proper type and size windshield wiper blades,  
page 6-13.  
Overinflated tires are more likely to be  
cut, punctured, or broken by a sudden  
impact — such as when you hit a pothole.  
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.  
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If  
your tread is badly worn, or if your tires  
have been damaged, replace them.  
Tires  
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by  
a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions  
about your tire warranty and where to obtain service,  
see your GM Warranty booklet for details. For additional  
information refer to the tire manufacturer’s booklet  
included with your vehicle’s owner manual.  
See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-56  
for inflation pressure adjustment for high  
speed driving.  
5-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPC  
specifications meet or exceed all federal safety  
guidelines.  
Tire Sidewall Labeling  
Useful information about a tire is molded into its sidewall.  
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation): The  
Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates that  
the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of  
Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.  
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters  
and numbers following the DOT code are the Tire  
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows the  
manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and date the tire  
was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides of  
the tire, although only one side may have the date of  
manufacture.  
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of  
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.  
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire  
manufacturers are required to grade tires based on  
three performance factors: treadwear, traction and  
temperature resistance. For more information see  
Passenger Car Tire Example  
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of letters  
and numbers used to define a particular tire’s width,  
height, aspect ratio, construction type and service  
description. See the “Tire Size” illustration later in this  
section for more detail.  
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum  
load that can be carried and the maximum pressure  
needed to support that load. For information on  
recommended tire pressure see Inflation - Tire Pressure  
on page 5-56 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-31.  
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria  
Specification): Original equipment tires designed to  
GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC  
5-50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The Tire  
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows the  
manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and date the tire  
was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both  
sides of the tire, although only one side may have the  
date of manufacture.  
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum  
load that can be carried and the maximum pressure  
needed to support that load. See Inflation - Tire  
Pressure on page 5-56 and Loading Your Vehicle on  
page 4-31.  
(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire or compact  
spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi (420 kPa).  
For more information on tire pressure and inflation see  
Tire on page 5-81.  
Compact Spare Tire Example  
(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters and numbers  
define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction  
type and service description. The letter T as the  
first character in the tire size means the tire is for  
temporary use only.  
(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact spare tire or  
temporary use tire has a tread life of approximately  
3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should not be driven  
at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h). The compact spare  
tire is for emergency use when a regular road tire  
has lost air and gone flat. See Spare Tire on page 5-81  
and If a Tire Goes Flat on page 5-71.  
(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria  
Specification): Original equipment tires designed to  
GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC  
specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPC  
specifications meet or exceed all federal safety  
guidelines.  
(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of  
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.  
5-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPC  
specifications meet or exceed all federal safety  
guidelines.  
(C) Dual Tire Maximum Load: Maximum load that can  
be carried and the maximum pressure needed to  
support that load when used in a dual configuration.  
(D) DOT (Department of Transportation): The  
Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates that  
the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of  
Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.  
(E) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters and  
numbers following DOT code are the Tire Identification  
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer  
and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was  
manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides of the  
tire, although only one side may have the date of  
manufacture.  
Light Truck Tire Example  
(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combination of  
letters and numbers used to define a particular  
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type and  
service description. See the “Tire Size” illustration  
later in this section for more detail.  
(F) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of  
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.  
(G) Single Tire Maximum Load: Maximum load that  
can be carried and the maximum pressure needed  
to support that load when used as a single. For  
information on recommended tire pressure see  
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria  
Specification): Original equipment tires designed to  
GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC  
5-52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in inches.  
Tire Size  
The following illustration shows an example of a tire size.  
(F) Service Description: These characters represent  
the load range and speed rating of the tire. The load  
index represents the load carry capacity a tire is certified  
to carry. The load index can range from 1 to 279. The  
speed rating is the maximum speed a tire is certified  
to carry a load. Speed ratings range from A to Z.  
Tire Terminology and Definitions  
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire pressing  
outward on each square inch of the tire. Air pressure  
is expressed in pounds per square inch (psi) or  
kilopascal (kPa).  
(A) P-Metric Tire: The United States version of a  
metric tire sizing system. The letter P as the first  
character in the tire size means a passenger vehicle tire  
engineered to standards set by the U. S. Tire and  
Rim Association.  
Accessory Weight: This means the combined weight  
of optional accessories. Some examples of optional  
accessories are, automatic transmission, power steering,  
power brakes, power windows, power seats, and air  
conditioning.  
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates the  
tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall.  
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that indicates  
the tire height-to-width measurements. For example, if  
the tire size aspect ratio is 60, as shown in item C of the  
illustration, it would mean that the tire’s sidewall is  
60 percent as high as it is wide.  
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height to  
its width.  
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located  
between the plies and the tread. Cords may be made  
from steel or other reinforcing materials.  
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to  
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The  
letter R means radial ply construction; the letter D means  
diagonal or bias ply construction; and the letter B means  
belted-bias ply construction.  
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by  
steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.  
5-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies are  
laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the  
centerline of the tread.  
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an  
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward when  
mounted on a vehicle.  
Cold Inflation Pressure: The amount of air pressure in  
a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) or  
kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat  
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.  
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on light duty  
trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles.  
from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-56.  
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from  
1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying  
capacity of a tire.  
Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motor  
vehicle with standard and optional equipment including  
the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, but  
without passengers and cargo.  
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air  
pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated. The  
maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.  
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall of a  
tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the U.S.  
Department of Transportation (DOT) motor vehicle  
safety standards. The DOT code includes the Tire  
Identification Number (TIN), an alphanumeric designator  
which can also identify the tire manufacturer, production  
plant, brand and date of production.  
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire at the  
maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.  
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of curb  
weight; accessory weight; vehicle capacity weight;  
and production options weight.  
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating, see Loading  
Your Vehicle on page 4-31.  
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of occupants a  
vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg).  
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-31.  
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the front  
axle, see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-31.  
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating positions.  
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle,  
see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-31.  
5-54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an  
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into contact  
with the road.  
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that faces  
outward when mounted on a vehicle. The side of the tire  
that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering, or  
bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding  
that is higher or deeper than the same moldings on  
the other sidewall of the tire.  
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes  
called wear bars, that show across the tread of a tire  
when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains.  
See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5-64.  
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards): A  
tire information system that provides consumers with  
ratings for a tire’s traction, temperature, and treadwear.  
Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using  
government testing procedures. The ratings are molded  
into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform Tire Quality  
Grading on page 5-67.  
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on passenger  
cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose  
vehicles.  
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle  
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure and  
shown on the tire placard. See Inflation - Tire Pressure  
on page 5-56 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-31.  
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of designated  
seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg) plus  
the rated cargo load. See Loading Your Vehicle  
on page 4-31.  
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords  
that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the  
centerline of the tread.  
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire  
beads are seated.  
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an  
individual tire due to curb weight, accessory weight,  
occupant weight, and cargo weight.  
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread and  
the bead.  
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to a  
vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weight and  
the original equipment tire size and recommended  
inflation pressure. See “Tire and Loading Information  
Label” under Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-31.  
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to a  
tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire  
can operate.  
Traction: The friction between the tire and the road  
surface. The amount of grip provided.  
5-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A Tire and Loading Information label is attached to the  
vehicle’s center pillar, below the driver’s door latch.  
This label lists your vehicle’s original equipment  
tires and shows the correct inflation pressures for your  
tires when they are cold. The recommended cold  
tire inflation pressure, shown on the label, is the  
minimum amount of air pressure needed to support your  
vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.  
Inflation - Tire Pressure  
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to  
operate effectively.  
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that  
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It is not.  
If your tires do not have enough air (under-inflation),  
you can get the following:  
For additional information regarding how much weight  
your vehicle can carry, and an example of the tire  
and loading information label, see Loading Your Vehicle  
on page 4-31. How you load your vehicle affects the  
vehicle handling and ride comfort, never load your  
vehicle with more weight than it was designed to carry.  
Too much flexing  
Too much heat  
Tire overloading  
Premature or irregular wear  
Poor handling  
When to Check  
Reduced fuel economy  
Check your tires once a month or more. Do not forget to  
check the spare tire. If your vehicle has a compact  
spare tire, it should be at 60 psi (420 kPa). For additional  
information see Spare Tire on page 5-81.  
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation), you  
can get the following:  
Unusual wear  
Poor handling  
Rough ride  
Needless damage from road hazards  
5-56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the  
metal stem in the center of the tire valve. Re-check the  
tire pressure with the tire gage.  
How to Check  
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire  
pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly inflated  
simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look properly  
inflated even when they are under-inflated. Check the  
tire’s inflation pressure when the tires are cold. Cold  
means your vehicle has been sitting for at least  
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve  
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt  
and moisture.  
Your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) that  
sends tire pressure information to the Driver Information  
Center (DIC). Using the DIC control buttons, the  
driver is able to check tire pressure levels in all  
four road tires. See Tire Pressure Monitor System on  
page 5-59 and DIC Controls and Displays on page 3-72  
for additional information.  
three hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).  
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.  
Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a  
pressure measurement. If the cold tire inflation  
pressure matches the recommended pressure on the  
Tire and Loading Information label, no further  
adjustment is necessary. If the inflation pressure is  
low, add air until you reach the recommended amount.  
5-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If your vehicle has P235/55R17 or P245/50R18 size  
tires, and you will be driving at speeds of 100 mph  
(160 km/h) or higher, where it is legal, set the cold  
inflation pressure to the maximum inflation pressure  
shown on the tire sidewall, or 38 psi (265 kPa),  
whichever is lower. See the example following.  
High Speed Operation  
{CAUTION:  
Driving at high speeds, 100 mph (160 km/h) or  
higher, puts an additional strain on tires.  
Sustained high-speed driving causes  
Example:  
You will find the maximum load and inflation pressure  
molded on the tire’s sidewall, in small letters, near  
the rim flange. It will read something like this: Maximum  
load 690 kg (1521 lbs) 300 kPa (44 psi) Max. Press.  
excessive heat build up and can cause sudden  
tire failure. You could have a crash and you or  
others could be killed. Some high-speed rated  
tires require inflation pressure adjustment for  
high speed operation. When speed limits and  
road conditions are such that a vehicle can be  
driven at high speeds, make sure the tires are  
rated for high speed operation, in excellent  
condition, and set to the correct cold tire  
inflation pressure for the vehicle load.  
For this example, you would set the inflation pressure for  
high-speed driving at 38 psi (265 kPa).  
When you end this high-speed driving, return the tires to  
the cold inflation pressure shown on the Tire and  
Loading Information label. See Loading Your Vehicle on  
page 4-31.  
5-58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Professional Vehicle  
Tire Pressure Monitor System  
The proper inflation of the tires on your professional  
vehicle depends on the type of tires on it.  
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) is designed  
to monitor the amount of pressure in your vehicle’s  
tires using radio and sensor technology. A TPMS  
sensor, mounted onto the vehicle’s full-size tire and  
wheel assembly, transmits tire pressure readings to a  
receiver located in the vehicle. The compact spare  
tire and wheel does not have a TPMS sensor.  
Tire pressure status and tire pressure warnings are  
shown on the Driver Information Center (DIC) display.  
For additional information and details about the DIC  
operation and displays see DIC Controls and Displays  
on page 3-72 and DIC Warnings and Messages on  
page 3-76.  
If your vehicle has P235/60R17 size tires, the cold  
inflation pressure is 41 psi (284 kPa).  
If your vehicle has LT235/60R17E size tires, the  
cold inflation pressure depends on the vehicle mass  
and should be determined by the vehicle  
coach-builder. A tire and loading information label  
provided by the final stage manufacturer should be  
attached to the B-pillar on the driver’s side of the  
vehicle. If the final stage manufacturer’s label is not  
present, the coach-builder should be consulted. Do  
not use the tire pressures indicated on the General  
Motors label. These tire pressures are for the  
incomplete vehicle and are not the correct tire  
pressures for the completed professional vehicle.  
If a low tire pressure condition is detected, the TPMS  
will display the CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning  
message on the DIC and, at the same time, illuminate  
the low tire pressure warning symbol, on the instrument  
panel cluster.  
Operation at inflation pressures below this  
recommendation may cause your tires to become  
overloaded.  
You may notice, during cooler weather conditions, that  
the low tire pressure warning symbol and the CHECK  
TIRE PRESSURE message will display when the vehicle  
is first started and then turn off as you start to drive  
the vehicle. This could be an early indicator that the tire  
pressures are getting low and need to be checked  
and inflated to the proper pressure.  
5-59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be  
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation  
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer  
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.  
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size  
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation  
pressure label, you should determine the proper inflation  
pressure for those tires.)  
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper  
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to  
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has  
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the  
TPMS low tire pressure telltale.  
The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning message and  
low tire pressure light (telltale) will appear at each  
ignition cycle until the tires are inflated to the correct  
inflation pressure.  
As an added safety  
feature, your vehicle has  
been equipped with a  
tire pressure monitoring  
system (TPMS) that  
The Tire and Loading Information Label shows the size  
of your vehicle’s original tires and their recommended  
cold inflation pressures. See Loading Your Vehicle  
on page 4-31, for the location of the tire and loading  
information label. Also see Inflation - Tire Pressure  
on page 5-56.  
illuminates a low tire  
pressure telltale when one  
or more of your tires is  
significantly under-inflated.  
Your vehicle’s TPMS can alert you about a low tire  
pressure condition but it does not replace normal tire  
maintenance. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on  
page 5-63 and Tires on page 5-49.  
Accordingly, When the low tire pressure telltale  
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as  
soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper  
pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire  
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.  
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire  
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling  
and stopping ability.  
Notice: Do not use a tire sealant if your vehicle has  
Tire Pressure Monitors. The liquid sealant can  
damage the tire pressure monitor sensors.  
5-60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The TPMS matching process is outlined below:  
1. Set the parking brake.  
Resetting the TPMS Sensor  
Identification Codes  
2. Turn the ignition switch to RUN with the engine off.  
Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code.  
Any time you replace one or more of the TPMS sensors,  
rotate the vehicle’s tires, or install a full-size spare  
that has a TPMS sensor, the sensor’s identification  
codes will need to be matched to the new tire/wheel  
position. Each tire/wheel position is matched to  
the TPMS sensor using a TPMS diagnostic tool. See  
your GM dealer for service.  
3. Press the Driver Information Center (DIC) vehicle  
information button until the RELEARN TIRE  
POSITIONS displays.  
4. Press the set/reset button to allow the system to  
learn the tire positions. The horn will sound twice  
to indicate that the TPMS is ready, and then  
the message TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE will display.  
The sensor matching process can begin.  
The TPMS sensors may also be matched to each  
tire/wheel position by increasing or decreasing the tire’s  
air pressure. When increasing the tire’s air pressure,  
do not exceed the maximum tire pressure indicated on  
the tire’s sidewall.  
5. Start with the driver’s side front tire.  
6. Remove the valve cap from the valve stem.  
Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing or  
decreasing the tire’s air pressure for five seconds,  
or until a horn chirp sounds. The horn chirp,  
which may take up to 30 seconds, confirms that the  
sensor identification code has been matched to  
this tire position. To decrease the tire’s air-pressure  
use the pointed end of the valve cap, a pencil-style  
air pressure gage or a key.  
You will have two minutes to match the first tire/wheel  
position, and five minutes overall, to match all  
four tire/wheel positions. If it takes longer than  
two minutes, to match the first tire and wheel, or  
more than five minutes to match all four tire and wheel  
positions the matching process stops and you will  
need to start over.  
5-61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. Proceed to the passenger’s side front tire, and  
repeat the procedure in Step 6.  
One or more missing or inoperable TPMS sensors will  
cause the service tire monitor message to be displayed.  
See your GM dealer for service if all the TPMS  
sensors are installed and the error message comes on  
and stays on.  
8. Proceed to the passenger’s side rear tire, and  
repeat the procedure in Step 6.  
9. Proceed to the driver’s side rear tire, and repeat the  
procedure in Step 6.  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:  
10. When the re-learning is complete, the horn will  
sound and the TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message  
will clear from the DIC display. Exit the matching  
process by turning the ignition switch to OFF.  
1. This device may not cause interference.  
2. This device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired  
operation.  
11. Set all four tires to the recommended air  
pressure level as indicated on the tire and  
loading information label.  
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:  
12. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.  
1. This device may not cause interference, and  
The compact spare tire does not have a TPMS sensor.  
If you replace one of the road tires with the compact  
spare, the SERVICE TIRE MONITOR SYSTEM  
message will be displayed on the DIC screen. This  
message should go off once you re-install the road tire  
containing the TPMS sensor. The SERVICE TIRE  
MONITOR SYSTEM message is also displayed when a  
part of the TPMS is not working properly.  
2. This device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired  
operation of the device.  
Changes or modifications to this system by other than  
an authorized service facility could void authorization to  
use this equipment.  
5-62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tire Inspection and Rotation  
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles  
(8 000 to 13 000 km).  
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires as  
soon as possible and check wheel alignment. Also  
check for damaged tires or wheels. See When It Is Time  
on page 5-69 for more information.  
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more  
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotation  
is the most important. See Scheduled Maintenance  
on page 6-4.  
Five-Tire Rotation Pattern  
A five-tire rotation pattern may be used for your  
professional vehicle, if it has a full-size spare tire and  
wheel assembly that matches the original equipment  
tires and wheels in size, type and brand. The correct  
five-tire rotation pattern is shown.  
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and  
rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire and  
Loading Information label. See Loading Your Vehicle on  
page 4-31.  
Vehicles that have the Tire Pressure Monitor System  
(TPMS) will need to have the sensors reset after a tire  
rotation is performed. See Tire Pressure Monitor  
System on page 5-59.  
Four-Tire Rotation Pattern  
If your vehicle has a compact spare tire, it should not be  
included in the tire rotation process. Use the four-tire  
rotation pattern shown.  
5-63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened.  
See “Wheel Nut Torque” under Capacities and  
Specifications on page 5-101.  
When It Is Time for New Tires  
One way to tell when it is  
time for new tires is to  
check the treadwear  
indicators, which will  
appear when your tires  
have only 1/16 inch  
(1.6 mm) or less of tread  
remaining.  
{CAUTION:  
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to  
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts  
become loose after a time. The wheel could  
come off and cause an accident. When you  
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from  
places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle.  
In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a  
paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a  
scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get all  
the rust or dirt off. See Changing a Flat Tire on  
page 5-72.  
You need a new tire if any of the following statements  
are true:  
You can see the indicators at three or more places  
around the tire.  
You can see cord or fabric showing through the  
tire’s rubber.  
The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged  
deep enough to show cord or fabric.  
The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.  
The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that  
cannot be repaired well because of the size or  
location of the damage.  
5-64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Buying New Tires  
{CAUTION:  
GM has developed and matched specific tires for your  
vehicle. The original equipment tires installed on  
your vehicle, when it was new, were designed to meet  
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria Specification  
(TPC spec) system rating. If you need replacement  
tires, GM strongly recommends that you get tires with  
the same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehicle  
will continue to have tires that are designed to give the  
same performance and vehicle safety, during normal  
use, as the original tires.  
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control of  
your vehicle while driving. If you mix tires of  
different sizes, brands, or types (radial and  
bias-belted tires), the vehicle may not handle  
properly, and you could have a crash. Using  
tires of different sizes, brands, or types may  
also cause damage to your vehicle. Be sure to  
use the correct size, brand, and type of tires  
on all wheels.  
GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a  
dozen critical specifications that impact the overall  
performance of your vehicle, including brake system  
performance, ride and handling, traction control, and tire  
pressure monitoring performance. GM’s TPC Spec  
number is molded onto the tire’s sidewall by the  
tire manufacturer. If the tires have an all-season tread  
design, the TPC spec number will be followed by an MS  
for mud and snow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling on  
page 5-50 for additional information.  
Your vehicle may have a compact spare tire  
and wheel assembly. If the vehicle has a  
compact spare tire and wheel, they have the  
same overall diameter as your vehicle’s  
full-size tires and wheels. Because they were  
designed and developed for use on your  
vehicle, it is all right to drive your vehicle with  
the compact spare installed properly. Compact  
spare tires are designed for temporary use  
only. See Spare Tire on page 5-81.  
5-65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed on the  
Tire and Loading Information Label. This label is  
attached to the vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar). See  
Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-31.  
{CAUTION:  
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, the  
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after  
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel  
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only  
radial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle.  
Different Size Tires and Wheels  
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than  
your original equipment wheels and tires, this may  
affect the way your vehicle performs, including its  
braking, ride and handling characteristics, stability and  
resistance to rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle  
has electronic systems such as, antilock brakes; traction  
control; and electronic stability control, the performance  
of these systems can be affected.  
If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those that  
do not have a TPC Spec number, make sure they  
are the same size, load range, speed rating, and  
construction type (radial and bias-belted tires) as your  
vehicle’s original tires.  
Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring system  
may give an inaccurate low-pressure warning if non-TPC  
spec rated tires are installed on your vehicle. Non-TPC  
Spec rated tires may give a low-pressure warning  
that is higher or lower than the proper warning level you  
would get with TPC Spec rated tires. See Tire  
5-66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Uniform Tire Quality Grading  
{CAUTION:  
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the  
tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum  
section width. For example:  
If you add different sized wheels, your vehicle  
may not provide an acceptable level of  
performance and safety if tires not  
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A  
The following information relates to the system  
developed by the United States National Highway  
Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by  
treadwear, traction and temperature performance.  
(This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.)  
The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most  
passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading  
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type  
snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires,  
tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches  
(25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-production tires.  
recommended for those wheels are selected.  
You may increase the chance that you will  
crash and suffer serious injury. Only use  
GM specific wheel and tire systems developed  
for your vehicle, and have them properly  
installed by a GM certified technician.  
See Buying New Tires on page 5-65 and Accessories  
and Modifications on page 5-3 for additional information.  
While the tires available on General Motors passenger  
cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these  
grades, they must also conform to federal safety  
requirements and additional General Motors Tire  
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.  
5-67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Treadwear  
Temperature – A, B, C  
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on  
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled  
conditions on a specified government test course.  
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and  
a half (1.5) times as well on the government course as  
a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires  
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,  
however, and may depart significantly from the norm  
due to variations in driving habits, service practices and  
differences in road characteristics and climate.  
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,  
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation  
of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested  
under controlled conditions on a specified indoor  
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can  
cause the material of the tire to degenerate and  
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to  
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a  
level of performance which all passenger car tires must  
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard  
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of  
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the  
minimum required by law.  
Traction – AA, A, B, C  
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,  
B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability  
to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled  
conditions on specified government test surfaces of  
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor  
traction performance. Warning: The traction grade  
assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking  
traction tests, and does not include acceleration,  
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.  
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is  
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not  
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or  
excessive loading, either separately or in combination,  
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.  
5-68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance  
{CAUTION:  
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned and  
balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest  
tire life and best overall performance. Adjustments to  
wheel alignment and tire balancing will not be necessary  
on a regular basis. However, if you notice unusual tire  
wear or your vehicle pulling to one side or the other, the  
alignment may need to be checked. If you notice your  
vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your  
tires and wheels may need to be rebalanced. See your  
dealer for proper diagnosis.  
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel  
bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be  
dangerous. It could affect the braking and  
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose  
air and make you lose control. You could have  
a collision in which you or others could be  
injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel  
bolts and wheel nuts for replacement.  
Wheel Replacement  
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badly rusted  
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the  
wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced.  
If the wheel leaks air, replace it. Some aluminum  
wheels can sometimes be repaired. See your GM dealer  
if any of these conditions exist.  
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems  
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or  
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,  
vehicle ground clearance, and tire or tire chain  
clearance to the body and chassis.  
If your vehicle is a professional model, the wheels have  
a unique offset and bolt hole diameter. Each of the  
wheels on the professional vehicle have eight wheels  
nuts. The wheels on the non-professional vehicle  
have five wheel nuts. See Changing a Flat Tire on  
page 5-72 for more information.  
Your GM dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.  
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying  
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted  
the same way as the one it replaces.  
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts or  
wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM original  
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the  
right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle.  
5-69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Used Replacement Wheels  
Tire Chains  
{CAUTION:  
{CAUTION:  
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is  
dangerous. You cannot know how it has been  
used or how far it has been driven. It could fail  
suddenly and cause a crash. If you have to  
replace a wheel, use a new GM original  
equipment wheel.  
Do not use tire chains. There is not enough  
clearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle  
without the proper amount of clearance can  
cause damage to the brakes, suspension or  
other vehicle parts. The area damaged by the  
tire chains could cause you to lose control of  
your vehicle and you or others may be injured  
in a crash.  
Use another type of traction device only if its  
manufacturer recommends it for use on your  
vehicle and tire size combination and road  
conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s  
instructions. To help avoid damage to your  
vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the  
device if it is contacting your vehicle, and do  
not spin your vehicle’s wheels. If you do find  
traction devices that will fit, install them on the  
front tires.  
5-70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If a Tire Goes Flat  
{CAUTION:  
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving,  
especially if you maintain your vehicle’s tires properly.  
If air goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out  
slowly. But if you should ever have a blowout, here  
are a few tips about what to expect and what to do:  
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do  
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without  
the appropriate safety equipment and training.  
The jack provided with your vehicle is  
designed only for changing a flat tire. If it is  
used for anything else, you or others could be  
badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off  
the jack. Use the jack provided with your  
vehicle only for changing a flat tire.  
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that pulls  
the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the  
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.  
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to  
a stop well out of the traffic lane.  
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a  
skid and may require the same correction you would  
use in a skid. In any rear blowout remove your foot from  
the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control  
by steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may  
be very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently  
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.  
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use the  
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.  
5-71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Changing a Flat Tire  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage  
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your vehicle’s  
hazard warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers  
on page 3-6 for more information.  
3. Turn off the engine and do not restart  
while the vehicle is raised.  
4. Do not allow passengers to remain in  
the vehicle.  
{CAUTION:  
To be even more certain the vehicle will not  
move, you should put blocks at the front and  
rear of the tire farthest away from the one  
being changed. That would be the tire, on the  
other side, at the opposite end of the vehicle.  
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle  
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you  
or other people. You and they could be badly  
injured or even killed. Find a level place to  
change your tire. To help prevent the vehicle  
from moving:  
1. Set the parking brake firmly.  
2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
5-72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
When your vehicle has a flat tire, use the following  
example as a guide to assist you in the placement of  
wheel blocks.  
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools  
The equipment you will need is in the trunk. To  
access the equipment, do the following:  
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 2-13 for more  
information.  
2. Press the area at the  
front of the handle  
located on the cover  
so that the back  
edge raises.  
The following information will tell you next how to use  
the jack and change a tire.  
3. Grab the handle and  
remove the cover.  
5-73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The tools you will be using include the jack (A) and the  
wheel wrench (B).  
4. Turn the wing nut to remove the retainer that holds  
the wrench and jack.  
5. Remove the wheel wrench, jack and spare tire from  
the trunk. See Spare Tire on page 5-81 for more  
information.  
5-74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removing the Flat Tire and  
Installing the Spare Tire  
2. For models with exposed lug nuts, loosen  
them using the wheel wrench. Do not remove  
them yet.  
1. For models having aluminum wheels with a center  
wheel cover, use the flat end of the wheel wrench  
to gently pry the wheel covers off. Be careful  
not to scratch the aluminum wheel edge and do not  
try to remove it with your hands. Then loosen the  
wheel nuts with the wheel wrench. Do not remove  
them yet.  
5-75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
{CAUTION:  
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is  
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack you  
could be badly injured or killed. Never get  
under a vehicle when it is supported only  
by a jack.  
{CAUTION:  
3. Find the jacking location from the diagram above  
and use the corresponding cutouts located in the  
plastic molding.  
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly  
positioned can damage the vehicle and even  
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal  
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the  
jack lift head into the proper location before  
raising the vehicle.  
The front location is (A) 8.5 inches (21 cm) from the  
rear edge of the front wheel well, and the rear  
location (B) is 3.5 inches (8.5 cm) from the front  
edge of the rear wheel well.  
The notches may also be labeled JACK with an  
arrow pointing to the jacking location on the vehicle.  
Notice: If you position the jack under the rocker  
molding and attempt to raise the vehicle, you could  
break the molding and/or cause other damage to  
your vehicle. Always position the jack so that when  
the jack head is raised, it will fit firmly in the  
notch located inboard from the rocker molding.  
5-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Turn the jack handle counterclockwise to lower the  
jack lift head until the jack fits under the vehicle.  
7. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle  
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the  
ground for the spare tire to fit under the vehicle.  
5. Raise the jack until the metal flange fits firmly into  
the channel of the jack head.  
6. Put the spare tire near you.  
5-77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8. Remove all wheel nuts and take off the flat tire.  
10. Place the spare tire on the wheel-mounting surface.  
{CAUTION:  
{CAUTION:  
Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to  
which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts  
become loose after a time. The wheel could  
come off and cause an accident. When you  
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from  
the places where the wheel attaches to the  
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth  
or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use  
a scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get  
all the rust or dirt off.  
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. If  
you do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel  
could fall off, causing a serious accident.  
11. Put the wheel nuts back  
on with the rounded  
end of the nuts toward  
the wheel. Tighten each  
nut by hand until the  
wheel is held against  
the hub.  
9. Remove any rust or dirt  
from the wheel bolts,  
mounting surfaces, and  
spare wheel.  
5-78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
{CAUTION:  
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened  
wheel nuts can cause the wheel to come loose  
and even come off. This could lead to an  
accident. Be sure to use the correct wheel  
nuts. If you have to replace them, be sure to  
get new GM original equipment wheel nuts.  
Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have  
the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the  
proper torque specification. See Capacities  
and Specifications on page 5-101 for wheel nut  
torque specification.  
12. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle  
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.  
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead  
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid  
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel  
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper  
torque specification. See Capacities and  
Specifications on page 5-101 for the wheel nut  
torque specification.  
5-79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire  
and Tools  
{CAUTION:  
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the  
passenger compartment of the vehicle could  
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,  
loose equipment could strike someone. Store  
all these in the proper place.  
5-Wheel Nuts  
8-Wheel Nuts  
13. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in a crisscross  
sequence as shown.  
After you have put the spare tire on your vehicle, you  
will need to store the flat tire in your trunk.  
If your vehicle is equipped with wheel nut covers,  
screw the nut covers on with your fingers, then  
tighten one-quarter turn with the wheel wrench.  
Store the flat tire as far forward in the trunk as possible.  
Store the jack and wheel wrench in their compartment  
in the trunk. For storage, the jack must be raised  
until the screw end is flush with the edge of the jack.  
Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on your compact  
spare. If you try to put a wheel cover on the compact  
spare, you could damage the cover or the spare.  
The compact spare is for temporary use only. Replace  
the compact spare tire with a full-size tire as soon  
as you can.  
Do not try to put a wheel cover on your compact spare  
tire, if equipped. It will not fit. Store the wheel cover  
and lug nut caps in the trunk until you have the flat tire  
repaired or replaced.  
5-80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3. Insert the jack container (E) into the spare tire (F).  
Then insert the jack and wheel wrench (D) into the  
center of the compact spare tire making sure to  
line up the wheel nut hole with the bolt (G) on the  
compartment floor.  
4. Secure the tire and wheel with the retainer (C) and  
then the wing nut (B).  
5. Reinstall the compact spare tire cover (A).  
Spare Tire  
Compact Spare Tire  
Your vehicle may be equipped with a compact spare  
tire. Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated  
when the vehicle was new, it can lose air after a  
time. Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should  
be 60 psi (420 kPa).  
A. Cover  
E. Jack Container  
F. Spare Tire  
G. Bolt  
B. Wing Nut  
C. Retainer  
D. Jack and Wheel  
Wrench  
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 2-13  
2. Reinstall the spare tire (F) with the valve stem up,  
and line up the wheel nut hole with the bolt (G) or  
wheel center and place on the compartment floor.  
5-81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
After installing the compact spare on the vehicle, stop  
as soon as possible and make sure the spare tire  
is correctly inflated. The compact spare is made to  
perform well at speeds up to 65 mph (105 km/h)  
for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you can  
finish your trip and have the full-size tire repaired or  
replaced at your convenience. Of course, it is best  
to replace the spare with a full-size tire as soon as  
possible. The spare tire will last longer and be in good  
shape in case it is needed again.  
Spare Tire  
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire, which,  
when new, was fully inflated. A spare tire may lose  
air over time, so check its inflation pressure regularly.  
Your Vehicle on page 4-31 for information regarding  
proper tire inflation and loading your vehicle. For  
instructions on how to remove, install or store a spare  
Tire on page 5-75.  
Notice: When the compact spare is installed, do  
not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash  
with guide rails. The compact spare can get  
caught on the rails. That can damage the tire and  
wheel, and maybe other parts of your vehicle.  
After installing the spare tire on your vehicle, you should  
stop as soon as possible and make sure the spare is  
correctly inflated. Have the damaged or flat road  
tire repaired or replaced as soon as you can and  
installed back onto your vehicle. This way, a spare tire  
will be available in case you need it again.  
Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles.  
And do not mix the compact spare tire or wheel with  
other wheels or tires. They will not fit. Keep the  
spare tire and its wheel together.  
Your vehicle may have a different size spare tire than  
the road tire, that was originally installed on your vehicle.  
This spare tire was developed for use on your vehicle,  
so it is all right to drive on it.  
Notice: Tire chains will not fit your compact spare.  
Using them can damage your vehicle and can  
damage the chains too. Do not use tire chains on  
your compact spare.  
If your vehicle has a spare tire that does not match your  
vehicle’s original road tires and wheels in size and  
type, do not include the spare in the tire rotation.  
5-82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning  
glass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratch  
the glass and/or cause damage to the integrated  
radio antenna and the rear window defogger. When  
cleaning the glass on your vehicle, use only a  
soft cloth and glass cleaner.  
Appearance Care  
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle  
Your vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best if  
it is cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust and  
dirt can accumulate on your upholstery. Dirt can  
damage carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces.  
Regular vacuuming is recommended to remove particles  
from your upholstery. It is important to keep your  
upholstery from becoming and remaining heavily soiled.  
Soils should be removed as quickly as possible. Your  
vehicle’s interior may experience extremes of heat  
that could cause stains to set rapidly.  
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become  
concentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space. Before  
using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety  
instructions on the label. While cleaning your vehicle’s  
interior, maintain adequate ventilation by opening  
your vehicle’s doors and windows.  
Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs  
using a small brush with soft bristles.  
Your GM dealer has a product for cleaning your  
vehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, you can  
also obtain a product from your GM dealer to remove  
odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.  
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent  
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments  
that transfer color to your home furnishings may also  
transfer color to your vehicle’s interior.  
When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only use cleaners  
specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.  
Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on  
surfaces for which they were not intended. Use glass  
cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental over-spray  
from other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,  
apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.  
5-83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Do not clean your vehicle using the following cleaners  
or techniques:  
Fabric/Carpet  
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment  
frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister  
vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be used  
on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. For soils, always  
try to remove them first with plain water or club soda.  
Before cleaning, gently remove as much of the soil as  
possible using one of the following techniques:  
Never use a knife or any other sharp object to  
remove a soil from any interior surface.  
Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damage to  
your vehicle’s interior surfaces.  
Never apply heavy pressure or rub aggressively  
with a cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure  
can damage your interior and does not improve the  
effectiveness of soil removal.  
For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a paper  
towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the paper towel  
until no more can be removed.  
Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoid laundry  
detergents or dishwashing soaps with degreasers.  
Using too much soap will leave a residue that  
leaves streaks and attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners,  
about 20 drops per gallon (3.78 L) of water is a  
good guide.  
For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible and  
then vacuum.  
To clean, use the following instructions:  
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water or  
club soda.  
Do not heavily saturate your upholstery while  
cleaning.  
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.  
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub  
toward the center. Continue cleaning, using a clean  
area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled.  
Damage to your vehicle’s interior may result from  
the use of many organic solvents such as naptha,  
alcohol, etc.  
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the  
cleaning cloth remains clean.  
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild  
soap solution and repeat the cleaning process  
that was used with plain water.  
5-84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner or  
spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercial  
upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test a  
small hidden area for colorfastness first. If the locally  
cleaned area gives any impression that a ring formation  
may result, clean the entire surface.  
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other  
Plastic Surfaces  
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to  
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,  
a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution  
can be used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never use  
spot lifters or removers on plastic surfaces. Many  
commercial cleaners and coatings that are sold to  
preserve and protect soft plastic surfaces may  
permanently change the appearance and feel of your  
interior and are not recommended. Do not use silicone  
or wax-based products, or those containing organic  
solvents to clean your vehicle’s interior because  
they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in  
a non-uniform manner.  
After the cleaning process has been completed, a paper  
towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the  
fabric or carpet.  
Leather  
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to  
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,  
a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can  
be used. Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do not use  
heat to dry. Never use steam to clean leather. Never  
use spot lifters or spot removers on leather. Many  
commercial leather cleaners and coatings that are sold  
to preserve and protect leather may permanently  
change the appearance and feel of your leather and are  
not recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based  
products, or those containing organic solvents to clean  
your vehicle’s interior because they can alter the  
appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform  
manner. Never use shoe polish on your leather.  
Some commercial products may increase gloss on your  
instrument panel. The increase in gloss may cause  
annoying reflections in the windshield and even make  
it difficult to see through the windshield under certain  
conditions.  
Wood Panels  
Use a clean cloth moistened in warm, soapy water (use  
mild dish washing soap). Dry the wood immediately  
with a clean cloth.  
5-85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Speaker Covers  
Washing Your Vehicle  
Vacuum around a speaker cover gently, so that the  
speaker will not be damaged. Clean spots with  
just water and mild soap.  
The paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty, depth of  
color, gloss retention, and durability.  
The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to keep it  
clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water.  
Care of Safety Belts  
Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.  
Use a car washing soap. Do not use strong soaps  
or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well,  
removing all soap residue completely. GM-approved  
cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer. See  
not use cleaning agents that are petroleum based,  
or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agents  
should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on the  
surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with a soft,  
clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surface  
scratches and water spotting.  
Keep belts clean and dry.  
{CAUTION:  
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, it  
may severely weaken them. In a crash, they  
might not be able to provide adequate  
protection. Clean safety belts only with mild  
soap and lukewarm water.  
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter  
the vehicle.  
Weatherstrips  
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses  
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last  
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply  
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,  
damp weather frequent application may be required. See  
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car  
washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.  
Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle on  
page 5-86.  
5-86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts  
Finish Care  
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep  
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually  
needed. However, you may use chrome polish on  
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.  
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle by  
hand may be necessary to remove residue from  
the paint finish. GM-approved cleaning products can be  
obtained from your dealer. See Vehicle  
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damaging  
protective trim, never use auto or chrome polish,  
steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum. A coating of  
wax, rubbed to high polish, is recommended for all  
bright metal parts.  
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive  
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may  
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and  
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat  
paint finish on your vehicle.  
Windshield and Wiper Blades  
The vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish. The  
clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored  
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are  
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat  
paint finish.  
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield  
washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running,  
wax, sap, or other material may be on the blade  
or windshield.  
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other  
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird  
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,  
can damage the vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted  
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If  
necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked  
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.  
Clean the outside of the windshield with a glass  
cleaning liquid or powder and water solution. The  
windshield is clean if beads do not form when it is rinsed  
with water.  
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades  
and affect their performance. Clean the blade by wiping  
vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength windshield  
washer solvent. Then rinse the blade with water.  
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather,  
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period  
of years. To help keep the paint finish looking new, keep  
the vehicle in a garage or covered whenever possible.  
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;  
replace blades that look worn.  
5-87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels, but  
avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff off  
immediately after application.  
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels  
The vehicle may be equipped with either aluminum or  
chrome-plated wheels.  
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an  
automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire  
cleaning brushes, you could damage the aluminum  
or chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not  
be covered by your warranty. Never drive a vehicle  
equipped with aluminum or chrome-plated wheels  
through an automatic car wash that uses silicone  
carbide tire cleaning brushes.  
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild  
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing  
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then  
be applied.  
Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,  
abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners  
that contain acid on aluminum or chrome-plated  
wheels, you could damage the surface of the  
wheel(s). The repairs would not be covered by your  
warranty. Use only GM-approved cleaners on  
aluminum or chrome-plated wheels.  
Do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash  
that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. These  
brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.  
Tires  
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted  
surface of your vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,  
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,  
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on  
them because you could damage the surface. Do not  
use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.  
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.  
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing  
products on your vehicle may damage the paint  
finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing,  
always wipe off any overspray from all painted  
surfaces on your vehicle.  
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels  
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not  
be covered by your warranty. Use chrome polish on  
chrome wheels only.  
5-88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Sheet Metal Damage  
Underbody Maintenance  
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal  
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop  
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or  
replaced to restore corrosion protection.  
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust  
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not  
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the  
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,  
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion  
protection.  
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the  
corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.  
At least every spring, flush these materials from the  
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud  
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of  
the frame should be loosened before being flushed.  
Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can  
do this for you.  
Finish Damage  
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the  
finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal  
will corrode quickly and may develop into major repair  
expense.  
Chemical Paint Spotting  
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with  
touch-up materials available from your GM dealer.  
Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in your  
GM dealer’s body and paint shop.  
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a  
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and  
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage can  
take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,  
and small, irregular dark spots etched into the  
paint surface.  
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM will  
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of  
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within  
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,  
whichever occurs first.  
5-89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials  
Description  
Usage  
Removes swirl marks, fine  
scratches, and other light  
surface contamination.  
Removes light scratches  
and protects finish.  
Cleans, shines, and  
protects in one step. No  
wiping necessary.  
Description  
Usage  
Swirl Remover Polish  
Polishing Cloth  
Wax-Treated  
Interior and exterior  
polishing cloth.  
Cleaner Wax  
Tar and Road  
Oil Remover  
Removes tar, road oil,  
and asphalt.  
Foaming Tire Shine  
Low Gloss  
Chrome Cleaner  
and Polish  
Use on chrome or  
stainless steel.  
White Sidewall  
Tire Cleaner  
Vinyl Cleaner  
Removes soil and black  
marks from whitewalls.  
Cleans vinyl.  
Removes dirt, grime,  
smoke and fingerprints.  
Removes dirt and grime  
from chrome wheels and  
wire wheel covers.  
Medium foaming  
shampoo. Cleans and  
lightly waxes.  
Wash Wax Concentrate  
Biodegradable and  
phosphate free.  
Glass Cleaner  
Quickly removes spots  
and stains from carpets,  
vinyl, and cloth  
upholstery.  
Odorless spray odor  
eliminator used on fabrics,  
vinyl, leather and carpet.  
Chrome and Wire  
Wheel Cleaner  
Spot Lifter  
Removes dust,  
fingerprints, and surface  
contaminants. Spray on  
and wipe off.  
Finish Enhancer  
Odor Eliminator  
5-90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Engine Identification  
Vehicle Identification  
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code. This  
code will help you identify your vehicle’s engine,  
specifications, and replacement parts.  
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)  
Service Parts Identification Label  
You will find this label on your spare tire cover. It is very  
helpful if you ever need to order parts. On this label,  
you will find the following:  
VIN  
Model designation  
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on  
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on  
the driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the  
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also  
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts  
labels and the certificates of title and registration.  
Paint information  
Production options and special equipment  
Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.  
5-91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Headlamp Wiring  
Electrical System  
The headlamp wiring system has four individual fuses.  
An electrical overload will cause the lamps to go on  
and off, or in some cases to remain off. If this happens,  
have the headlamp wiring checked right away.  
Add-On Electrical Equipment  
Notice: Don’t add anything electrical to your  
vehicle unless you check with your dealer first.  
Some electrical equipment can damage your vehicle  
and the damage wouldn’t be covered by your  
warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment can  
keep other components from working as they  
should.  
Windshield Wiper Fuses  
The windshield wiper motor is protected by an internal  
circuit breaker. If the wiper motor overheats due to  
heavy snow, the wipers will stop until the motor cools  
and will then restart.  
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to  
add anything electrical to your vehicle, see Servicing  
A fuse powers the wiper motor. If the fuse blows, there  
is an electrical problem. Be sure to have it fixed.  
5-92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If you ever have a problem on the road and do not have  
a spare fuse, you can “borrow” one that has the same  
amperage. Pick some feature of your vehicle that  
you can get along without — like the radio or cigarette  
lighter — and use its fuse, if it is the correct amperage.  
Replace it as soon as you can.  
Power Windows and Other  
Power Options  
Circuit breakers protect the power windows and power  
seats. When the current load is too heavy, the circuit  
breaker opens and closes, protecting the circuit until the  
problem is fixed or goes away.  
The fuses are located in two fuse blocks, one located in  
the engine compartment, and the other under the  
rear seat. If a fuse should blow, have your vehicle  
serviced by your dealer immediately.  
Fuses and Circuit Breakers  
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from  
short circuits by a combination of fuses and circuit  
breakers. This greatly reduces the chance of fires  
caused by electrical problems.  
Underhood Fuse Block  
The underhood fuse block is located on the passenger’s  
side of the engine compartment. Remove the fuse  
cover and secondary service cover to access the  
fuse block.  
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the  
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you  
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical  
size and rating. If a fuse should blow, see your dealer  
for service immediately.  
5-93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Fuses  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
Usage  
Fuses  
F5  
F6  
F7  
F8  
Usage  
Powertrain Control Module  
Transaxle  
Spare  
Spare  
Spare  
Driver’s Side Low Beam  
Passenger’s Side Low Beam  
Airbag  
5-94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fuses  
F9  
Usage  
J-Case Fuse  
JC1  
Usage  
Heated Windshield Washer  
Cooling Fan High  
Spare  
Spare  
F10  
F11  
F12  
F13  
F14  
F15  
F16  
F17  
F18  
F19  
F20  
F21  
F22  
F23  
F24  
F25  
F26  
F27  
High Beam Headlamp  
High Beam Headlamp  
Windshield Washer Pump  
Spare  
Climate Controls  
Spare  
JC2  
JC3  
JC4  
JC5  
JC6  
JC7  
JC8  
Crank  
Cooling Fan Low  
Anti-lock Brake System 2  
Anti-lock Brake System 1  
Air Pump  
Fog Lamps  
Horn  
Windshield Wiper  
Lamp  
Relay  
R1  
R2  
R3  
R4  
R5  
R6  
R7  
R8  
Usage  
Cooling Fan 1  
Cooling Fan 2  
Crank  
Powertrain  
Spare  
Lamp  
Oxygen Sensor  
Powertrain  
Engine Control Module  
Crank  
Electric Ignition  
Air Conditioning  
Air Solenoid  
Engine Control Module, Transaxle  
Control Module  
Ignition  
Cooling Fan 3  
Windshield Wiper  
Air Pump  
Windshield Wiper High  
Air Conditioning  
Air Control  
R9  
F28  
R10  
R11  
R12  
F29  
F30  
F31  
F32  
Spare  
Spare  
Spare  
Spare  
5-95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Rear Underseat Fuse Block  
The rear fuse block is located under the rear seat on  
the driver’s side. The rear seat cushion must be  
removed to access the rear fuse block.  
Removing the Rear Seat Cushion  
Notice: If you touch the exposed wires with the  
metal on the seat cushion, you could cause a short  
that could damage the battery and or wires. Avoid  
contact between the rear seat and the fuse  
center whenever you remove or reinstall the rear  
seat. Do not remove covers from any of the covered  
parts, and do not store anything under the seats.  
To remove the rear seat cushion, do the following:  
To access the fuse block, pull out and lift up on the  
cover latch, located at the end of the fuse block, near  
the battery cable.  
1. Pull up on the front of the cushion to release the  
front hooks.  
2. Pull the cushion up and out toward the front of the  
vehicle.  
5-96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To reinstall the rear seat cushion, do the following:  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
safety belt has not been routed through the  
seat cushion at all, it will not be there to work  
for the next passenger. The person sitting in  
that position could be badly injured. After  
reinstalling the seat cushion, always check to  
be sure that the safety belts are properly  
routed and are not twisted.  
1. Buckle the center passenger position safety belt,  
then route the safety belts through the proper slots  
in the seat cushion. Do not let the safety belts  
get twisted.  
2. Slide the rear of the cushion up and under the  
seatback so the rear-locating guides hook into  
the wire loops on the back frame.  
3. With the seat cushion lowered, push rearward and  
then press down on the seat cushion until the  
spring locks on both ends engage.  
{CAUTION:  
4. Check to make sure the safety belts are properly  
routed and that no portion of any safety belt is  
trapped under the seat. Also make sure the seat  
cushion is secured.  
A safety belt that is not properly routed  
through the seat cushion or is twisted will not  
provide the protection needed in a crash. If the  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
5-97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
J-Case Fuses  
Usage  
Climate Control Fan  
Rear Defogger (Option)  
Automatic Leveling  
Control/Compressor  
Fuses  
F3  
Usage  
JC1  
JC2  
Interior Lamps  
Courtesy Lamps, Passenger’s Side  
Turn Signal  
F4  
F5  
F6  
JC3  
Canister Vent  
Electronic Suspension  
Control (Option)  
Automatic Leveling Control  
Module (Option)  
Fuses  
F1  
F2  
Usage  
Amplifier  
Navigation (Option)  
F7  
F8  
Rear Seat Lumbar (Option)  
5-98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fuses  
F9  
Usage  
Door Unlatch (Option)  
Switch Dimmer  
Fuel Pump  
Body Control Module Logic  
Airbag  
Auxiliary Power Outlets  
Driver’s Side Turn Signal  
Right Rear Turn Signal  
Not Used  
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp,  
Back-up Lamps  
Fuses  
F30  
F31  
F32  
F33  
F34  
F35  
Usage  
Not Used  
F10  
F11  
F12  
F13  
F14  
F15  
F16  
F17  
Instrument Panel Harness Module  
Rear Heated Seats (Option)  
Not Used  
Steering Wheel Illumination  
Body Harness Module  
Memory Seat Module Logic, Right  
Front Massage (Option)  
Object Detection Sensor  
Sunroof  
F36  
F37  
F38  
F40  
F18  
Shifter Solenoid (Option)  
F19  
F20  
F21  
F22  
Rear Door Locks  
Stoplamp (Option)  
Radio  
Retained Accessory Power,  
Miscellaneous  
Driver’s Side Park Lamp  
Passenger’s Side Park Lamp  
Heated Steering Wheel (Option)  
Rear Climate Control  
Not Used  
Heated/Cooled Seats,  
Ignition 3 (Option)  
F41  
F42  
F43  
F44  
F45  
F46  
OnStar® (Option)  
Auxiliary Power Outlet, Cigarette  
Lighter, Console  
Driver Door Module  
Passenger Door Module  
Trunk Release (Option)  
Heated/Cooled Seats (Option)  
Not Used  
F23  
F24  
F25  
F26  
F27  
F28  
F29  
F47  
F48  
F49  
Ignition Switch  
Not Used  
Regulated Voltage Control Sense  
5-99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Circuit  
Relays  
R3  
R4  
Usage  
Usage  
Breakers  
Run (Option)  
Front Passenger’s Seat, Memory  
Seat Module  
Driver’s Power Seat, Memory  
Seat Module  
Door Module, Power Windows  
Memory Seat Module, Tilt/  
Telescoping Steering Wheel (Option)  
Park Lamps (Option)  
Front Heating, Ventilation, Air  
Conditioning Fan  
CB1  
R5  
CB2  
CB3  
CB4  
R6  
R7  
Trunk Release  
Fuel Pump  
Door Unlatch, License Plate  
Lamp (Option)  
R8  
R9  
Door Lock  
Resistor  
Usage  
Terminating Resistor  
R10  
R11  
R12  
R13  
R14  
Door Unlock  
F39  
Overhead Lamps (Option)  
Stoplamps (Option)  
Not Used  
Rear Defogger (Option)  
Electronic Leveling  
Control Compressor  
Relays  
R1  
R2  
Usage  
Retained Accessory Power  
Park Lamps  
R15  
5-100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Capacities and Specifications  
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended Fluids and  
Lubricants on page 6-12 for more information.  
Capacities  
Application  
English  
12.9 qt  
7.5 qt  
Metric  
12.2 L  
7.1 L  
Cooling System  
Engine Oil with Filter  
Fuel Tank  
18.5 gal  
15.0 qt  
100 lb ft  
70.0 L  
14.2 L  
140 Y  
Transaxle  
Wheel Nut Torque  
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level as recommended in this  
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.  
Engine Specifications  
Engine  
VIN Code  
Transaxle  
Automatic  
Automatic  
Spark Plug Gap  
4.6L DOHC V8  
4.6L DOHC V8  
Y
9
0.050 inches (1.27 mm)  
0.050 inches (1.27 mm)  
5-101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
NOTES  
5-102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Your Vehicle and the Environment  
Maintenance Schedule  
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your  
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the  
environment. All recommended maintenance is  
important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even  
affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid  
levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of  
emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our  
environment, and to keep your vehicle in good condition,  
be sure to maintain your vehicle properly.  
Introduction  
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and  
change as recommended.  
Using the Maintenance Schedule  
We at General Motors want to help you keep your  
vehicle in good working condition. But we do not know  
exactly how you will drive it. You may drive very  
short distances only a few times a week. Or you may  
drive long distances all the time in very hot, dusty  
weather. You may use your vehicle in making deliveries.  
Or you may drive it to work, to do errands, or in many  
other ways.  
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan  
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your  
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer  
for details.  
Maintenance Requirements  
Because of all the different ways people use their  
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need more  
frequent checks and replacements. So please read  
the following and note how you drive. If you have any  
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,  
see your GM Goodwrench® dealer.  
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,  
replacement parts, and recommended fluids and  
lubricants as prescribed in this manual are necessary  
to keep your vehicle in good working condition. Any  
damage caused by failure to follow scheduled  
maintenance may not be covered by warranty.  
6-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
This schedule is for vehicles that:  
Some maintenance services can be complex.  
So, unless you are technically qualified and have  
the necessary equipment, you should have your  
GM Goodwrench® dealer do these jobs.  
When you go to your GM Goodwrench® dealer for your  
service needs, you will know that GM-trained and  
supported service technicians will perform the work  
using genuine GM parts.  
carry passengers and cargo within recommended  
limits. You will find these limits on the tire and  
loading information label. See Loading Your Vehicle  
on page 4-31.  
are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal  
driving limits.  
use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane  
on page 5-5.  
If you want to purchase service information, see Service  
The services in Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4  
should be performed when indicated. See Additional  
Footnotes on page 6-7 for further information.  
Owner Checks and Services on page 6-9 tells you  
what should be checked, when to check it, and  
what you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in  
good condition.  
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants to  
Parts on page 6-13. When your vehicle is serviced,  
make sure these are used. All parts should be replaced  
and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone  
else drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of  
genuine GM parts.  
{CAUTION:  
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can  
be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you  
can be seriously injured. Do your own  
maintenance work only if you have the  
required know-how and the proper tools and  
equipment for the job. If you have any doubt,  
see your GM Goodwrench® dealer to have a  
qualified technician do the work.  
6-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message  
appears, certain services, checks, and inspections are  
required. Required services are described in the  
following for “Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.”  
Generally, it is recommended that your first service be  
Maintenance I, your second service be Maintenance II,  
and that you alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II  
thereafter. However, in some cases, Maintenance II  
may be required more often.  
Scheduled Maintenance  
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message in the  
Driver Information Center (DIC) comes on, it means that  
service is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle  
serviced as soon as possible within the next  
600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are driving  
under the best conditions, the engine oil life system may  
not indicate that vehicle service is necessary for over a  
year. However, your engine oil and filter must be changed  
at least once a year and at this time the system must be  
reset. Your GM Goodwrench® dealer has GM-trained  
service technicians who will perform this work using  
genuine GM parts and reset the system.  
Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the  
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes on  
within 10 months since the vehicle was purchased or  
Maintenance II was performed.  
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previous  
service performed was Maintenance I. Always use  
Maintenance II whenever the message comes on  
10 months or more since the last service or if the  
message has not come on at all for one year.  
If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,  
you must service your vehicle within 3,000 miles  
(5 000 km) since your last service. Remember to reset  
the oil life system whenever the oil is changed. See  
Engine Oil Life System on page 5-16 for information on  
the Engine Oil Life System and resetting the system.  
6-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Scheduled Maintenance  
Service  
Maintenance I Maintenance II  
Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 5-13. Reset oil  
life system. See Engine Oil Life System on page 5-16. An Emission  
Control Service.  
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (k).  
Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine Air  
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-18. See footnote (m).  
Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection and  
Rotation on page 5-63 and “Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once a Month  
on page 6-9.  
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).  
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid  
as needed.  
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services” in  
this section.  
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b).  
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).  
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).  
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e).  
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).  
Check transaxle fluid level and add fluid as needed.  
Replace passenger compartment air filter. See footnote (g).  
6-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional Required Services  
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles  
(kilometers) shown for each item.  
Additional Required Services  
25,000  
(41 500)  
50,000  
75,000  
100,000  
125,000  
150,000  
Service and Miles (Kilometers)  
(83 000) (125 000) (166 000) (207 500) (240 000)  
Inspect fuel system for damage  
or leaks.  
Inspect exhaust system for loose or  
damaged components.  
Replace engine air cleaner filter. See  
Throttle body service. An Emission  
Control Service. See footnotes † and (l).  
Change automatic transaxle fluid and  
filter (severe service). See footnote (h).  
Change automatic transaxle fluid and  
filter (normal service).  
Replace spark plugs. An Emission  
Control Service.  
Except Professional Vehicle: Engine  
cooling system service (or every  
five years, whichever occurs first). An  
Emission Control Service. See  
footnote (j).  
6-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Additional Required Services (cont’d)  
25,000  
(41 500)  
50,000  
75,000  
100,000  
125,000  
150,000  
Service and Miles (Kilometers)  
(83 000) (125 000) (166 000) (207 500) (240 000)  
Professional Vehicle Only: Engine  
cooling system service (or every  
five years, whichever occurs first).  
An Emission Control Service. See  
footnote (j).  
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.  
An Emission Control Service. See  
footnote (n).  
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper  
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect  
disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface  
condition. Inspect other brake parts, including calipers,  
parking brake, etc.  
Maintenance Footnotes  
The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the  
California Air Resources Board has determined that the  
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify  
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to  
the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,  
urge that all recommended maintenance services be  
performed at the indicated intervals and the  
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and  
steering system for damaged, loose, or missing parts or  
signs of wear. Inspect power steering lines and hoses  
for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.  
maintenance be recorded.  
6-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if  
they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated. Inspect  
all pipes, fittings and clamps; replace with genuine  
GM parts as needed. To help ensure proper operation,  
a pressure test of the cooling system and pressure  
cap and cleaning the outside of the radiator and  
air conditioning condenser is recommended at least  
once a year.  
(h) Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the  
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these  
conditions:  
In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature  
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.  
In hilly or mountainous terrain.  
When doing frequent trailer towing.  
Professional vehicle uses, such as limousine  
(d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking.  
Replace wiper blades that appear worn or damaged  
or that streak or miss areas of the windshield.  
service.  
Uses such as high performance operation.  
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your  
belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and anchorages  
are working properly. Look for any other loose or  
damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything  
that might keep a safety belt system from doing its  
job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts  
replaced. Also look for any opened or broken airbag  
coverings, and have them repaired or replaced.  
(j) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This service  
can be complex; you should have your dealer perform  
this service. See Engine Coolant on page 5-22 for  
what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser,  
pressure cap, and filler neck. Pressure test the  
cooling system and pressure cap.  
(k) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a  
problem. Have the system inspected and repaired  
and the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.  
The airbag system does not need regular maintenance.  
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders. Lubricate all  
hinges and latches, including those for the hood, rear  
compartment, glove box door, and console door.  
More frequent lubrication may be required when  
exposed to a corrosive environment. Applying silicone  
grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth will make  
them last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.  
(l) Inspect throttle body bore and valve plates for  
deposits. Open the throttle valve and inspect all  
surfaces. Clean as required.  
(m) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, inspect  
the filter at each engine oil change.  
(n) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks, or  
obvious damage. Replace belt if necessary.  
(g) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, the filter  
may require replacement more often.  
6-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Engine Coolant Level Check  
Owner Checks and Services  
Check the engine coolant level and add  
These owner checks and services should be performed  
at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety,  
dependability, and emission control performance of your  
vehicle. Your GM Goodwrench® dealer can assist you  
with these checks and services.  
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary. See  
Engine Coolant on page 5-22 for further details.  
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check  
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the  
windshield washer fluid reservoir and add the proper  
fluid if necessary.  
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.  
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your  
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown  
At Least Once a Month  
At Each Fuel Fill  
Tire Inflation Check  
It is important to perform these underhood checks at  
each fuel fill.  
Visually inspect your vehicle’s tires and make sure they  
are inflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget to  
check the spare tire. See Tires on page 5-49 for further  
details. Check to make sure the spare tire is stored  
securely. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-72.  
Engine Oil Level Check  
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil  
if necessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-13 for  
further details.  
Tire Wear Inspection  
Tire rotation may be required for high mileage highway  
drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System service  
notification. Check the tires for wear and, if necessary,  
rotate the tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on  
page 5-63.  
Notice: It is important to check your oil regularly  
and keep it at the proper level. Failure to keep your  
engine oil at the proper level can cause damage  
to your engine not covered by your warranty.  
6-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock Control  
System Check  
At Least Once a Year  
Starter Switch Check  
{CAUTION:  
{CAUTION:  
When you are doing this inspection, the  
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle  
moves, you or others could be injured.  
When you are doing this inspection, the  
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle  
moves, you or others could be injured.  
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough  
room around the vehicle. It should be parked on  
a level surface.  
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room  
around the vehicle.  
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular  
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake  
on page 2-29.  
brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-29.  
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to  
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.  
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if  
the vehicle begins to move.  
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The vehicle  
should start only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). If  
the vehicle starts in any other position, contact your  
GM Goodwrench® dealer for service.  
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to RUN, but do  
not start the engine. Without applying the regular  
brake, try to move the shift lever out of PARK (P)  
with normal effort. If the shift lever moves out  
of PARK (P), contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer  
for service.  
6-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing  
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set  
the parking brake.  
Ignition Transaxle Lock Check  
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn  
the ignition to OFF in each shift lever position.  
To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With  
the engine running and transaxle in NEUTRAL (N),  
slowly remove foot pressure from the regular  
brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the  
parking brake only.  
The ignition should turn to OFF only when the shift  
lever is in PARK (P).  
The key should come out only in OFF.  
Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if service is  
required.  
To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding  
ability: With the engine running, shift to PARK (P).  
Then release the parking brake followed by the  
regular brake.  
Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if service  
is required.  
Parking Brake and Automatic Transaxle  
Park (P) Mechanism Check  
{CAUTION:  
Underbody Flushing Service  
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any  
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to  
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris  
can collect.  
When you are doing this check, your vehicle  
could begin to move. You or others could be  
injured and property could be damaged. Make  
sure there is room in front of your vehicle in  
case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the  
regular brake at once should the vehicle begin  
to move.  
6-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recommended Fluids and  
Lubricants  
Usage  
Fluid/Lubricant  
Chassis Lubricant  
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, in  
Canada 88901242) or lubricant  
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,  
Category LB or GC-LB.  
GM Power Steering Fluid  
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184, in  
Canada 89021186).  
DEXRON®-VI Automatic  
Transmission Fluid.  
Parking Brake  
Cable Guides  
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part  
number, or specification may be obtained from  
your dealer.  
Power Steering  
System  
Usage  
Fluid/Lubricant  
Automatic  
Transaxle  
Engine oil which meets  
GM Standard GM6094M and  
displays the American Petroleum  
Institute Certified for Gasoline  
Engines starburst symbol.  
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube  
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in  
Canada 10953474).  
Key Lock  
Cylinders  
Engine Oil  
GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the  
requirements for your vehicle. To  
determine the proper viscosity for  
your vehicle’s engine, see Engine  
Oil on page 5-13.  
Hood Latch  
Assembly,  
Secondary  
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol  
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293, in  
Latch, Pivots, Canada 992723) or lubricant  
Spring  
Anchor, and  
Release Pawl  
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,  
Category LB or GC-LB.  
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable  
water and use only DEX-COOL®  
Coolant. See Engine Coolant on  
page 5-22.  
Engine Coolant  
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube  
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in  
Canada 10953474).  
Dielectric Silicone Grease  
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579, in  
Canada 992887).  
Hood and Door  
Hinges  
Hydraulic Brake Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or  
System  
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.  
Weatherstrip  
Conditioning  
Windshield  
Washer  
GM Optikleen® Washer Solvent.  
6-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts  
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.  
Part  
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter Element  
Engine Oil Filter  
GM Part Number  
22676970  
ACDelco® Part Number  
A1627C  
PF61  
89017342  
Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element  
Spark Plugs  
25689297  
12571535  
CF118C  
41–987  
Wiper Blade  
21.7 in (55.0 cm)  
Driver’s Side  
Passenger’s Side  
25753757  
25753758  
6-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintenance Record  
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the  
type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2. Any additional  
information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-9 can be added on the following record pages. You should  
retain all maintenance receipts.  
Maintenance Record  
Odometer  
Reading  
Maintenance I or  
Maintenance II  
Date  
Serviced By  
Services Performed  
6-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintenance Record (cont’d)  
Odometer  
Reading  
Maintenance I or  
Maintenance II  
Date  
Serviced By  
Services Performed  
6-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance Record (cont’d)  
Odometer  
Reading  
Maintenance I or  
Maintenance II  
Date  
Serviced By  
Services Performed  
6-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
For resolution of issues related to the Cadillac  
Professional Vehicle, contact 1-800-43-FLEET  
(1-800-433-5338).  
Customer Assistance and  
Information  
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order  
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have  
the following information available to give the Customer  
Assistance Representative:  
Customer Satisfaction Procedure  
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to  
your dealer and to Cadillac. Normally, any concerns  
with the sales transaction or the operation of your  
vehicle will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service  
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best  
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can  
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your  
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:  
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is  
available from the vehicle registration or title, or the  
plate at the top left of the instrument panel and  
visible through the windshield.  
Dealership name and location.  
Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.  
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of  
dealership management. Normally, concerns can  
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has  
already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts  
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or  
the general manager.  
When contacting Cadillac, please remember that your  
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility. That  
is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you  
have a concern.  
STEP THREE: Both General Motors and your dealer  
are committed to making sure you are completely  
satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you continue  
to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure  
outlined in Steps One and Two, you should file with the  
BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additional  
rights you may have. Canadian owners refer to your  
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet for  
information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration  
Plan (CAMVAP).  
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership  
management, it appears your concern cannot be  
resolved by the dealership without further help, contact  
the Cadillac Customer Assistance Center, 24 hours  
a day, by calling 1-800-458-8006. In Canada, contact  
the Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication Centre  
by calling 1-888-446-2000.  
7-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program  
administered by the Council of Better Business  
Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle  
repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle  
Limited Warranty. Although you may be required to  
resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to  
filing a court action, use of the program is free of  
charge and your case will generally be heard within  
40 days. If you do not agree with the decision given in  
your case, you may reject it and proceed with any other  
venue for relief available to you.  
Online Owner Center  
The Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownership  
needs. Specific vehicle information can be found in  
one place.  
The Online Owner Center allows you to:  
Get e-mail service reminders.  
Access information about your specific vehicle,  
including tips and videos and an electronic  
version of this owner’s manual (United States only).  
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the  
toll-free telephone number or write them at the  
following address:  
Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and  
maintenance schedule.  
Find GM dealers for service nationwide.  
BBB Auto Line Program  
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.  
4200 Wilson Boulevard  
Suite 800  
Receive special promotions and privileges only  
available to members (United States only).  
Refer to the web for updated information.  
Arlington, VA 22203-1838  
To register your vehicle, visit www.MyGMLink.com  
(United States) or My GM Canada within  
www.gmcanada.com (Canada).  
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100  
This program is available in all 50 states and the District  
of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,  
mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves the  
right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue  
its participation in this program.  
7-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
www.Cadillac.com  
Customer Assistance for Text  
Telephone (TTY) Users  
1-800-458-8006  
1-800-43-FLEET (1-800-433-5338) (Cadillac  
Professional Vehicle)  
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or  
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),  
Cadillac has TTY equipment available at its Customer  
Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate with  
Cadillac by dialing: 1-800-833-CMCC (2622). (TTY  
users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)  
1-800-833-2622 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))  
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112  
Fax Number: 313-381-0022  
From Puerto Rico:  
1-800-496-9992 (English)  
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)  
Fax Number: 313-381-0022  
Customer Assistance Offices  
From U.S. Virgin Islands:  
1-800-496-9994  
Cadillac encourages customers to call the toll-free  
number for assistance. However, if a customer wishes  
to write or e-mail Cadillac, refer to the addresses below.  
Fax Number: 313-381-0022  
Canada — Customer Assistance  
General Motors of Canada Limited  
Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication  
Centre, 163-005  
United States — Customer Assistance  
Cadillac Customer Assistance Center  
Cadillac Motor Car Division  
P.O. Box 33169  
1908 Colonel Sam Drive  
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7  
Detroit, MI 48232-5169  
1-888-446-2000  
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs)  
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112  
7-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Overseas — Customer Assistance  
GM Mobility Reimbursement  
Program  
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.  
Mexico, Central America and  
Caribbean Islands/Countries  
(Except Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin  
Islands) — Customer Assistance  
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.  
Customer Assistance Center  
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740  
Col. Lomas de Bezares  
This program, available to qualified applicants, can  
reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligible  
aftermarket adaptive equipment required for your vehicle,  
such as hand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift.  
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.  
01-800-508-0000  
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800  
The offer is available for a very limited period of time  
from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more  
details, or to determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visit  
gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance  
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users,  
call 1-800-833-9935.  
GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program. Call  
1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. TTY users  
call 1-800-263-3830.  
7-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Cadillac Owner Privileges™  
Roadside Service  
Roadside Service provides several Cadillac Owner  
Privileges™ at “no charge,” throughout your Cadillac  
Warranty Period — 48 months/50,000 miles (80 000 km).  
Cadillac’s exceptional Roadside Service is more than an  
auto club or towing service. It provides every Cadillac  
owner with the advantage of contacting a Cadillac  
advisor and, where available, a Cadillac trained dealer  
technician who can provide on-site service.  
Emergency Road Service is performed on site for the  
following situations:  
Each technician travels with a specially equipped  
service vehicle complete with the necessary Cadillac  
parts and tools required to handle most roadside repairs.  
Cadillac Roadside Service® can be reached by dialing  
1-800-882-1112, 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.  
This service is provided at no charge for any situation  
covered by the base warranty coverage and at a  
nominal charge if the Cadillac is no longer covered by  
the base warranty. Roadside Service is available only in  
the United States and Canada.  
Towing Service  
Battery Jump Starting  
Lock Out Assistance  
Fuel Delivery  
Flat Tire Change (Covers change only)  
Trip Interruption — If your trip is interrupted due to  
a warranty failure, incidental expenses may be  
reimbursed during the 48 months/50,000 miles  
(80 000 km) warranty period. Items covered  
are hotel, meals, and rental car.  
7-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Roadside Service Availability  
Roadside Service for the Hearing or  
Speech Impaired  
Wherever you drive in the United States or Canada, an  
advisor is available to assist you over the phone. A dealer  
technician, if available, can travel to your location within a  
30 mile (50 km) radius of a participating Cadillac  
dealership. If beyond this radius, we will arrange to have  
your car towed to the nearest Cadillac dealership.  
Roadside Service is prepared to assist owners who  
have hearing difficulties or are speech impaired. Cadillac  
has installed special telecommunication devices called  
Text Telephone (TTY) in the Roadside Service Center.  
Any customer who has access to a (TTY) or a  
conventional teletypewriter can communicate with  
Cadillac by dialing from the United States or Canada  
1-888-889-2438 — daily, 24 hours.  
Reaching Roadside Service  
Dial the toll-free Roadside Service number:  
1-800-882-1112. A Roadside Service Advisor will assist  
you and request the following information:  
Courtesy Transportation  
A description of the problem  
To enhance your ownership experience, we and our  
participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy  
Transportation, a customer support program for  
new vehicles.  
Name, home address, home telephone number  
Location of your Cadillac and number you are  
calling from  
The model year, Vehicle Identification  
Number (VIN), mileage, and date of delivery  
The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to  
customers in conjunction with the Bumper-to-Bumper  
coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.  
Several transportation options are available when  
warranty repairs are required. This will reduce your  
inconvenience during warranty repairs.  
7-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Public Transportation or Fuel  
Reimbursement  
Scheduling Service Appointments  
When your vehicle requires warranty service, you should  
contact your dealer and request an appointment. By  
scheduling a service appointment and advising  
your service consultant of your transportation needs,  
your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience.  
If your vehicle requires warranty repairs, reimbursement  
of public transportation expenses may be available, for up  
to a maximum of five days. In addition, should you  
arrange transportation through a friend or relative,  
reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses may be  
available, up to a five-day maximum. Claim amounts  
should reflect actual costs and be supported by original  
receipts.  
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service  
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be  
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is  
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership, let  
them know this, and ask for instructions.  
Courtesy Rental Vehicle  
If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle off  
for service, you are urged to do so as early in the work  
day as possible to allow for the same day repair.  
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy  
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle  
that you obtain if your vehicle is kept for a warranty  
repair. Reimbursement will be limited to a maximum  
amount per day and must be supported by receipts. This  
requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement  
and meet state, local and rental vehicle provider  
requirements. Requirements vary and may include  
minimum age requirements, insurance coverage, credit  
card, etc. You are responsible for fuel usage charges  
and may also be responsible for taxes, levies,  
usage fees, excessive mileage or rental usage beyond  
the completion of the repair.  
Transportation Options  
Warranty service can generally be completed while you  
wait. However, if you are unable to wait, GM helps  
to minimize your inconvenience by providing several  
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,  
your dealer can offer you one of the following:  
Shuttle Service  
Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle  
service to get you to your destination with minimal  
interruption of your daily schedule. This includes  
one-way or round trip shuttle service to a destination up  
to 10 miles (16 km) from the dealership.  
Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle as a  
courtesy rental.  
7-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional Program Information  
Vehicle Data Collection and Event  
Data Recorders  
Courtesy Transportation is available during the  
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period, but it is  
not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. A  
separate booklet entitled Warranty and Owner  
Assistance Information furnished with each new vehicle  
provides detailed warranty coverage information.  
Your vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles, has a  
number of sophisticated computer systems that monitor  
and control several aspects of the vehicle’s performance.  
Your vehicle uses on-board vehicle computers to monitor  
emission control components to optimize fuel economy,  
to monitor conditions for airbag deployment and, if so  
equipped, to provide anti-lock braking and to help the  
driver control the vehicle in difficult driving situations.  
Some information may be stored during regular  
operations to facilitate repair of detected malfunctions;  
other information is stored only in a crash event by  
computer systems, such as those commonly called event  
data recorders (EDR).  
Courtesy Transportation is available only at participating  
dealers and all program options, such as shuttle  
service, may not be available at every dealer. Please  
contact your dealer for specific information about  
availability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangements  
will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel.  
Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during  
the Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General  
Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty,  
alternative transportation may be available under the  
Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult  
your dealer for details.  
In a crash event, computer systems, such as the Airbag  
Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) in your vehicle  
may record information about the condition of the vehicle  
and how it was operated, such as data related to  
engine speed, brake application, throttle position, vehicle  
speed, safety belt usage, airbag readiness, airbag  
performance, and the severity of a collision. If your  
vehicle is equipped with StabiliTrak®, steering  
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,  
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at  
any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility  
pursuant to the terms and conditions described  
herein at its sole discretion.  
performance, including yaw rate, steering wheel angle,  
and lateral acceleration, is also recorded. This  
information has been used to improve vehicle crash  
performance and may be used to improve crash  
performance of future vehicles and driving safety.  
7-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Unlike the data recorders on many airplanes, these  
on-board systems do not record sounds, such as  
conversation of vehicle occupants.  
Others, such as law enforcement, may have access to  
the special equipment that can read the information  
if they have access to the vehicle or the device  
that stores the data.  
If your vehicle is equipped with OnStar®, please  
check the OnStar® subscription service agreement  
or manual for information on its operations and  
data collection.  
To read this information, special equipment is needed  
and access to the vehicle or the device that stores  
the data is required. GM will not access information  
about a crash event or share it with others other than:  
with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the  
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee,  
Collision Damage Repair  
in response to an official request of police or similar  
government office,  
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is  
damaged, have the damage repaired by a qualified  
technician using the proper equipment and quality  
replacement parts. Poorly performed collision repairs  
will diminish your vehicle’s resale value, and safety  
performance can be compromised in subsequent  
collisions.  
as part of GM’s defense of litigation through the  
discovery process, or  
as required by law.  
In addition, once GM collects or receives data, GM may:  
use the data for GM research needs,  
Collision Parts  
make it available for research where appropriate  
confidentiality is to be maintained and need is  
shown, or  
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with the  
same materials and construction methods as the parts  
with which your vehicle was originally built. Genuine GM  
Collision parts are your best choice to assure that your  
vehicle’s designed appearance, durability and safety are  
preserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can help  
maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.  
share summary data which is not tied to a specific  
vehicle with non-GM organizations for research  
purposes.  
7-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for  
repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles  
that were total losses in prior accidents. In most  
cases, the parts being recycled are from undamaged  
sections of the vehicle. A recycled original equipment  
GM part, may be an acceptable choice to maintain your  
vehicle’s originally designed appearance and safety  
performance, however, the history of these parts is not  
known. Such parts are not covered by your GM New  
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any related failures  
are not covered by that warranty.  
Insuring Your Vehicle  
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with  
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage. There  
are significant differences in the quality of coverage  
afforded by various insurance policy terms. Many  
insurance policies provide reduced protection to your  
GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage repairs  
by using aftermarket collision parts. Some insurance  
companies will not specify aftermarket collision  
parts. When purchasing insurance, we recommend  
that you assure your vehicle will be repaired with  
GM original equipment collision parts. If such insurance  
coverage is not available from your current insurance  
carrier, consider switching to another insurance carrier.  
Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These are  
made by companies other than GM and may not  
have been tested for your vehicle. As a result, these  
parts may fit poorly, exhibit premature  
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may  
require you to have insurance that assures repairs with  
Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)  
parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts. Read  
your lease carefully, as you may be charged at the  
end of your lease for poor quality repairs.  
durability/corrosion problems, and may not perform  
properly in subsequent collisions. Aftermarket parts are  
not covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited  
Warranty, and any vehicle failure related to such parts  
are not covered by that warranty.  
Repair Facility  
GM also recommends that you choose a collision repair  
facility that meets your needs before you ever need  
collision repairs. Your GM dealer may have a collision  
repair center with GM-trained technicians and state  
of the art equipment, or be able to recommend a  
collision repair center that has GM-trained technicians  
and comparable equipment.  
7-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Gather the important information you will need from  
the other driver. Things like name, address, phone  
number, driver’s license number, vehicle license  
plate, vehicle make, model and model year, Vehicle  
Identification Number (VIN), insurance company and  
policy number, and a general description of the  
damage to the other vehicle.  
If an Accident Occurs  
Here is what to do if you are involved in an accident.  
Try to relax and then check to make sure you are all  
right. If you are uninjured, make sure that no one else  
in your vehicle, or the other vehicle, is injured.  
If there has been an injury, call 911 for help. Do not  
leave the scene of an accident until all matters have  
been taken care of. Move your vehicle only if its  
position puts you in danger or you are instructed to  
move it by a police officer.  
If possible, call your insurance company from the  
scene of the accident. They will walk you through the  
information they will need. If they ask for a police  
report, phone or go to the police department  
headquarters the next day and you can get a copy of  
the report for a nominal fee. In some states with “no  
fault” insurance laws, a report may not be necessary.  
This is especially true if there are no injuries and both  
vehicles are driveable.  
Give only the necessary and requested information  
to police and other parties involved in the accident.  
Do not discuss your personal condition, mental frame  
of mind, or anything unrelated to the accident. This  
will help guard against post-accident legal action.  
Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your  
vehicle. Whether you select a GM dealer or a private  
collision repair facility to fix the damage, make sure  
you are comfortable with them. Remember, you  
will have to feel comfortable with their work for  
a long time.  
If you need roadside assistance, call GM Roadside  
Assistance. See Roadside Service on page 7-6 for  
more information.  
If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where the  
towing service will be taking it. Get a card from the  
tow truck operator or write down the driver’s name,  
the service’s name, and the phone number.  
Once you have an estimate, read it carefully and  
make sure you understand what work will be  
performed on your vehicle. If you have a question,  
ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcome  
this opportunity.  
Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it is  
towed away. Make sure this includes your insurance  
information and registration if you keep these items  
in your vehicle.  
7-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Managing the Vehicle Damage  
Repair Process  
Reporting Safety Defects  
Reporting Safety Defects to the  
United States Government  
In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs,  
GM recommends that you take an active role in its  
repair. If you have a pre-determined repair facility of  
choice, take your vehicle there, or have it towed there.  
Specify to the facility that any required replacement  
collision parts be original equipment parts, either new  
Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts.  
Remember, recycled parts will not be covered by your  
GM vehicle warranty.  
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could  
cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you  
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic  
Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying  
General Motors.  
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an  
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in  
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy  
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in  
individual problems between you, your dealer, or  
General Motors.  
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must live  
with the repair. Depending on your policy limits, your  
insurance company may initially value the repair using  
aftermarket parts. Discuss this with your repair  
professional, and insist on Genuine GM parts.  
Remember if your vehicle is leased you may be  
obligated to have the vehicle repaired with Genuine  
GM parts, even if your insurance coverage does not pay  
the full cost.  
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety  
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in  
the Washington, D.C. area) or write to:  
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation  
Washington, D.C. 20590  
If another party’s insurance company is paying for the  
repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair  
valuation based on that insurance company’s collision  
policy repair limits, as you have no contractual limits with  
that company. In such cases, you can have control of  
the repair and parts choices as long as cost stays within  
reasonable limits.  
You can also obtain other information about motor  
vehicle safety from the hotline.  
7-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Reporting Safety Defects to the  
Canadian Government  
Service Publications Ordering  
Information  
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle  
has a safety defect, you should immediately notify  
Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General  
Motors of Canada Limited. You may call them at  
1-800-333-0510 or write to:  
Service Manuals  
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair  
information on engines, transmission, axle suspension,  
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.  
Transport Canada  
Place de Ville Tower C  
330 Sparks Street  
Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer  
Case Unit Repair Manual  
Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5  
This manual provides information on unit repair service  
procedures, adjustments, and specifications for GM  
transmissions, transaxles, and transfer cases.  
Reporting Safety Defects to  
General Motors  
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in  
a situation like this, we certainly hope you will notify  
us. Please call us at 1-800-458-8006, or write:  
Service Bulletins  
Service Bulletins give technical service information  
needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars  
and trucks. Each bulletin contains instructions to  
assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle.  
Cadillac Customer Assistance Center  
Cadillac Motor Car Division  
P.O. Box 33169  
In Canada, information pertaining to Product Service  
Bulletins can be obtained by contacting your General  
Motors dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE  
(1-800-463-7483).  
Detroit, MI 48232-5169  
In Canada, please call us at 1-888-446-2000. Or, write:  
Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication  
Centre, 163-005  
General Motors of Canada Limited  
1908 Colonel Sam Drive  
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7  
7-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123  
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM  
Eastern Time  
Owner’s Information  
Owner publications are written specifically for owners  
and intended to provide basic operational information  
about the vehicle. The owner’s manual will include  
the Maintenance Schedule for all models.  
For Credit Card Orders Only  
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on the  
World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com  
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual, and  
Warranty Booklet.  
Or you can write to:  
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00  
Helm, Incorporated  
P.O. Box 07130  
Detroit, MI 48207  
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.  
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00  
Prices are subject to change without notice and without  
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.  
Current and Past Model Order Forms  
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are  
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make  
checks payable in U.S. funds.  
Service Publications are available for current and  
past model GM vehicles. To request an order form,  
please specify year and model name of the vehicle.  
7-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NOTES  
7-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Audio System(s) (cont.)  
Diversity Antenna System ............................ 3-124  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Checking Things Under the Hood ...................... 5-10  
Cleaning (cont.)  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Headlamps (cont.)  
G
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Light (cont.)  
J
StabiliTrak® Indicator .................................... 3-64  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Intellibeam™, OnStar®, and Compass ......... 2-35  
OnStar® and Compass .............................. 2-37  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
O
PASS-Key® III+ .............................................. 2-21  
PASS-Key® III+ Operation ................................ 2-21  
OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual ............... 2-43  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Q
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......... 1-14  
OnStar® and Compass ................................. 2-37  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Safety Belt (cont.)  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
StabiliTrak® Indicator Light ................................ 3-64  
PASS-Key® III+ ........................................... 2-21  
PASS-Key® III+ Operation ............................. 2-21  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
StabiliTrak® System ..................................... 4-10  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Belkin Computer Drive F5U234 User Manual
BenQ Digital Camera DC T800 User Manual
Blackberry Cell Phone 9720 User Manual
Breckwell Heating System Breckwell Hearth Products LUXURY SERIES User Manual
Briggs Stratton Portable Generator 01933 User Manual
Bush Hog Brush Cutter 280 Series User Manual
Cabletron Systems Network Router 9032578 05 User Manual
Canon Projector D78 5152 User Manual
Carrier Furnace 58DRC User Manual
Casio Digital Camera EX P505 User Manual